C Cimos

Reference Manual Objects
Introduction
Introduction
Content
Introduction
General ...................................................................................................................2
Documentation structure.........................................................................................3
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Edition: 01.03.2005
N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\01_Introduction_009.doc
1-1
Introduction
General
You have here the Objects1 Manual for CEMAT V6. This manual is part of the Reference
Manual. It should support you in performing the work required to configure your plant.
The Objects1 Manual is part of a comprehensive CEMAT V6 complete documentation.
In the current version V6, this consists of the volumes listed below.
Engineering
Manual
Reference Manuals
System
Objects
ADD ONs
Glossary
After the installation of CEMAT V6 the CEMAT documentation is available as PDL in

directory D:\CEMAT_CS\Docu
On the following pages you will find the content of each manual.
1-2
Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Introduction
Documentation structure
The manuals contain the following chapters:
Engineering Manual
1
Introduction
Preparations
Installation of a PCS 7 Project
Assignments
Engineering Examples
PLC Engineering
AS-AS Coupling
OS Engineering
9.
Engineering Tools
10
Engineering Check List
11
Project Administration
12
free
13
Graphic Templates
14
Tips&Tricks
15
Update Information
Reference - System
1
Introduction
Cemat System Architecture
3
4
5
6
1-3
Introduction
Reference - Objects
1
Introduction
General
Unidirectional Drive
Bi-Directional Drive
Damper
Valve
Adapt to Simocode
Adapt to Simocode small
9.
Adapt
10
Annunciation Module
11
Annunciation Module with 7 Alarms
12
Measuring Value
13
Measured Value Integrator
14
Silopilot
15
Group Module
16
Route Module
17
Selection
18
Interlock
19
Interlock 5
20
21
PID Controller
22
PID Controller with 3 Parameter sets
23
24
CNT-Module
25
RT-Module
26
27
Route Selection Main module
28
Route Selection Information
29
Route Selection Substation
30
Objektdatenerfassung
Reference ADD ONs

1
Introduction
Route Selection
Object Data Acquisition
Reference - Glossary
1-4
Introduction
Definitions and Instructions
Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Cemat V 7.0
Function Block Library ILS_CEM
Function Description
General
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol. The notices shown below are graded according to the
degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Attention
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding notice is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used.
A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation
of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notices in this
documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices,
systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG.
The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes
could violate the rights of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The distribution and duplication of this document or the utilization and transmission of its contents are not permitted
without express written permission. Offenders will be liable for
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency

with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be
precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary
corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 4848, 90327 Nuremberg, Germany
Siemens AG 2005
Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
0BGeneral
GENERAL
CEMAT Modules
Module data
Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration:
Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

Type/number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Error handling
Start-up characteristics
Time characteristics
Annunciation characteristics
Module states
Commands
I/O bar of ...
OS variables table

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\02_General_009.doc
7
9
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
15
0BGeneral
CEMAT Modules
The library "ILS_CEM" contains all blocks which are required for a running CEMAT PLC. The
Reference Manual Objects describes the functions of the CEMAT Object modules. All further
Blocks you find in the general Documentation of PCS 7.
In this chapter you find the general, information about the CEMAT modules which is not specific
for a certain object. You will find information about performance, an introduction to the module
description (AS), general display rules (OS) and the representation forms of the objects.
In addition you will find operating instruction for the HMI.

C_DAMPER
C_DRV_2D
C_ANNUNC
C_ANNUN8
C_MEASUR
C_VALVE
C_PID3
C_ROUTE
C_GROUP
C_SILOP
C_SELECT
C_COUNT
C_RUNNT
C_MEAS_I
C_FB_PLC
C_SIMO_A
C_INTER5
FB1002
FB1003
FB1004
FB1005
FB1006
FB1007
FB1008
FB1009
FB1010
FB1011
FB1013
FB1015
FB1016
FB1026
FB1020
FB1033
FB1075
Interlock with 5 Inputs
Adapter for
SIMOCODE
AS-Objekt
Integration
Runtime supervision
Counter block
Selection module
Silo pilot
Group module
Route module
PID mit 3 Stzen fr

GAIN, TN,TV
Valve
Measuring value
Annunciation module
with 7 Alarms
Annunciation module
Bi-directional drive
Damper
Unidirectional drive
Number
of
functions
per
AS 416-2
0,01
0,025
**
0,005
0,005
0,005
0,1
0,025
0,05
0,12
***
0,05
0,055
0,05
0,02
0,065
0,085
0,05
Runtime in
(ms)
CPU416-3
without
fault
C_DRV_1D
Module
Comment from
(Type Name) symbol list
FB1001
Number
FB/FC
Module data
0,045
0,45
***
0,07
0,075
0,07
0,04
0,085
0,105
0,07
Runtime in
(ms)
CPU416-3
with 20%
fault
0,125
0,125
***
0,15
0,155
0,15
0,12
0,165
0,185
0,15
320
1632
150
214
510
916
512
2062
2814
1948
2250
3726
4344
3112
1428
5172
6598
4026
520
2122
270
326
644
1136
834
2614
3678
2650
3286
4656
5418
3918
1864
6286
7934
5010
18
18
42
12
26
28
24
88
38
46
20
14
40
80
38
Runtime Module Loading Temp.

in (ms) length memory memory
CPU416 (bytes) (bytes) (bytes)
-3 with
100%
fault
134
120
66
80
90
122
86
140
176
164
916
154
394
166
108
200
262
178
InstanceDB
length
(bytes)
314
520
174
170
200
276
372
528
896
768
1940
836
1206
714
430
988
1188
882
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Instance- MultiDB
instance
loading module
memory
(bytes)
12
38
35
65
12
28
25
18
23
17
Number Number of
of
annunciaHMI
tions
variables
0BGeneral
OB35_SYS1 ILS OB35 Begin
OB35_SYS2 ILS OB35 End
C_MUX
C_ADAPT
C_PUSHBT
OB1_SYS1
C_OB1SY1
FC529
FC530
FC1017
FC1018
FC1088
FC1102
FC1103
Number
of
functions
per
AS 416-2
**
**
**
0,005
0,01
**
**
**
0,015
Runtime in
(ms)
CPU416-3
without
fault
Runtime in
(ms)
CPU416-3
with 20%
fault
72
72
308
292
248
44
40
44
122
122
382
378
328
94
90
94
638
10
812
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Runtime Module Loading Temp.

in (ms) length memory memory
CPU416 (bytes) (bytes) (bytes)
-3 with
100%
fault
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
46
InstanceDB
length
(bytes)
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
182
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
yes
Instance- MultiDB
instance
loading module
memory
(bytes)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
11
Number Number of
of
annunciaHMI
tions
variables
*** the runtime for the C_PID3 is 25% higher than for the FB61 CTRL_PID
** not relevant
CAUTION: The modules specified in the table require the following FB, FC and DB: DB678-DB682, FB50, FB1030, FC509 to FC530 and FC1061, FC1062
CEMAT OB1 Start
ILS OB1 Begin
Control Desk Push

Buttons and Lamps
Adapter block to connect non-CEMAT

modules into group
Additional block for

group/route
ILS OB1 End
OB1_SYS2
FC528
Interlock with 10 Inputs
C_INTERL
Module
Comment from
(Type Name) symbol list
FB1075
Number
FB/FC
0BGeneral
0BGeneral
Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Number of functions per AS
The system functions are called only once.
Runtime in ms
The time that the CPU needs to process the associated module program in the normal situation
(e.g. in the case of a driver, the processing time of the watch-dog timer organizational block
(OB), without producing an annunciation for a channel error).
The following table contains the runtimes in a S7 416-2 DP 6ES7416-2XK01-0AB0. The runtimes for other CPUs depend on their performance.
Module length
Memory requirement of the program code, once per module type.
Instance DB length
Memory requirements of an instance DB
Temporary memory
The local data storage required in a processing level for an invocation of the module. This is limited for a specific CPU, and causes a CPU stop should it be exceeded. You must check this in
the CPU configuration and, if necessary, redistribute to the processing levels (OBs) in accordance with the actual requirement.
Multi-instance module
The technological module uses the specified modules and must be contained in the AP (application program). They are stored in the same library.
30
Select
150
Motor
Runtime
15
54ms
Controller Cycl. S7
CPU 416-2 max. 600 i.e. number of CEMAT modules, max. 550
CPU 416-3 max. 1800 i.e. limitation via the cycle time
Damper Annun. Meas. Valve Silopilot Counter

value
20
200
200
50
2
10
Communication resources (PBK) for
10
Group Route
Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration:
805
PBK
3 min.
4,5
min
Compil. Load
7 min
Map.
0BGeneral
0BGeneral
Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

The module descriptions always have same form. This helps you to find the required information
quickly when you read the description of the individual module.
Here is a description of the sections:
Type/number
The listed blocks have to be called if you want to use the object. The Blocks are listed with
name and number.
Module name:
Unique name of the S7 Block, e. g. C_DRV_1D.

For the CEMAT Objects this corresponds to the name of the object type.
Module no.:
Unique number of the function block (FB) or function (FC).
Calling OBs
This provides details of the organizational blocks (OBs) in which the described block must be
installed.
In contrast to the general PCS 7 libraries the CEMAT library has some specialties. Most of the
CEMAT blocks must be called exclusively in the OB1 task. Exceptions to this are the counter
and the pulse evaluation of the software speed monitor and the silo pilot. These blocks can be
called in a time interrupt OB. The detailed information you find in the object descriptions.
Some blocks of the system chart have to be called in more than one task, e. g. the system part
of the PLC-PLC coupling. If you copy the complete system chart from the delivered library into
the S7 Program of your project, the blocks are automatically called in the right tasks.
When you install the modules in the CFC they are automatically called after the most recently
installed module. If necessary, you must change the processing sequence with the run-time editor. The CFC creates the necessary OBs during the compilation.
Function
This contains a summary of the function of the module. The section operating principle contains
further information for complex modules.
Operating principle
This contains more detailed information on the function of individual inputs, operating modes,
time processes, etc. You should understand the interrelationships described here in order to use
the module effectively.
11
0BGeneral
Error handling
The error display is located in the CFC plan at the ENO Boolean module exit. The value corresponds to the BIE (binary result in STEP 7-STL on completion of the module) or the OK bit (in
SCL notation) and means:
ENO=BIE=OK=1 (TRUE) -> the module result is correct.
ENO=BIE=OK=0 (FALSE) -> the result or the general conditions for this calculation (e.g. entry
values, operating mode, etc.) are invalid.
A differentiation is made between:
First run
The module is called initially from the OB in which it has been inserted. This is usually the OB in
which the normal, process-related processing takes place (e.g. OB1). The module is preset with
the status corresponding to the input parameters. These can be default values (also refer to I/O
bar) or previously configured values, which, for example, you have parameterized in the CFC.
No special start-up behavior is described unless the module deviates from this rule.
Start-up
The module is processed once during a CPU start-up. To ensure this, the module has to be
called from a start-up OB (where it is included automatically by the ES). The start-up behavior is
described in this case.
The CEMAT object modules dont have start-up characteristics. The blocks are called exclusively in the cyclical program.
A module with time characteristics must be installed in an cyclic interrupt OB. It calculates its
time constants/parameters using its sampling time (the time interval between two successive,
cyclical processing steps). The sampling is determined by the step downs for the so-called runtime group. This ensures that the module is not processed for every OB passage. This sampling
time is entered in the I/O bar, in the SAMPLE_T parameter.
The time behavior is mentioned only when the module exhibits such behavior.
The CEMAT object modules dont have time characteristics. However for some of the objects
the run sequence is important. This is described under time characteristics.
12
0BGeneral
The module with this behavior reports various events to the higher-level OS. When present, the
parameters needed to create the annunciation are documented. Modules without annunciation
behavior can be augmented with additional annunciation modules. The description for modules
with annunciation capability contains an indication of the annunciation behavior.
Module states
The status of the CEMAT Objects is shown in the symbol through change of the bitmap of
change of the color and in the faceplate through a short info text. The presentation of the visualization status is shown under module status.
Commands
The possible commands for the object are listed in the OS variables table.
I/O bar of ...

The I/O bar provides the data interface for the module. You can use this to pass data to the
module and to fetch results from the module.
Element
U1
Meaning
Summand 1
Format
REAL
Default
0
Type
I
Attr.
Q
HMI
+
Permitted
Values
>0
The "I/O-bar" table shows all input and output parameters of the module type which the user
can access with his configuring means. Those elements that can be reached only from the
module algorithm are not listed (so-called internal variables). The columns have the following
meaning:
Element
Name of the parameter, derived from the designation, e.g. PV_IN = Process Variable Input
(process quantity, control quantity). Where appropriate, the same name convention as for
SIMATIC is used.
Meaning
Function (possibly short description)
Format
S7 data type of the parameter (BOOL, REAL, etc.).
Default
The value of the parameter before the module runs for the first time (provided it has not been
changed during the configuring).
13
0BGeneral
Type
Type of the module algorithm access to the parameter; a differentiation is made between inputs,
non-isolated inputs and outputs (refer to table).
Parameter Types:
Abbreviation
Type
Input. Value supplied to the module (display in the CFC: left-hand parameter list)
Output. Output value (display in the CFC: right-hand parameter list)
IO
Input/Output. Non-isolated input, which can be written from the OS and

rewritten from the module (display in the CFC: left-hand parameter list)
Attr. (Attribute)
Additional characteristics of the parameter when used in CFC. Non-connected input and inputoutput parameters can be parameterized (only input-output parameters for online FCs). Output
parameters cannot be parameterized and can be transferred in the CFC by connecting to an input of the same data type. Additional or deviating properties of the parameter are specified as
follows:
Attributes of the parameters:
Abbreviation
Attribute
Can be operated (only using the OS). An OS can make write access to the
element. It is implicitly not visible in the CFC.
Transferred to the OS when changed
MESSAGE ID not parameterizable for annunciation module (e.g. ALARM

8P). ID specified from the annunciation server.
Connectable. The element can be connected with another output of the

same type.
Not visible in the CFC. Because the element is supplied by the CFC or the
OS, it is not displayed in the CFC (e.g. message ID). It is a default value
that can be changed in the CFC.
HMI
The parameters marked with "+" can be changed and monitored from the associated OS module.
Permitted values
Additional limitation within the data type value range.
14
0BGeneral
OS variables table
In the OS variables table the detail information for all HMI variables is listed for the object type.
These variables are used to exchange information between AS and OS.
The following information can be seen in the table
S7 Parameter Name
Parameter name used in the S7 program (internal information)
Assignment
Symbolic name of the parameter used in the CFG-File (internal information)
OS Variable No.
Variable number used in the CFG-File (internal information)
Designation German
Description text of the parameter in German
Designation English
Description text of the parameter in English
Output level
Where is the information shown in the OS
S = in the Symbol
O = in the Faceplate
D = in the Diagnostic dialog
Presentation Number/NK
Number of Digits for representation on the OS
Unit
Unit of the value
Type
Parameter type
I
= Input
O
= Output
I/O
= In/Out
Value range
Value can be entered within this range
Annunciation Class
Message class, e. g. ALF = PLC Control System Annunciation
Fault Class
Classification according to the origin of the fault
E = Electrical
S = Safety
M = Mechanical
P = Process
Event Text
Text which is displayed in the alarm line
Operator Authorization
Assigned authorization code according to the user administrator (see list under Operator Authorization)
15
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Unidirectional Drive C_DRV_1D
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks
The distribution and duplication of this document or the

utilization and transmission of its contents are not permitted

Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BUnidirectional Drive C_DRV_1D
UNIDIRECTIONAL DRIVE C_DRV_1D
Description of C_DRV_1D
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Hardware outputs
Interfaces to the OS
Message characteristics
Module States
Commands
4
4
5
6
6
7
14
16
18
20
21
24
24
25
25
I/O-bar of C_DRV_1D
26
OS-Variable table
31
RS_LINK Structure (future)
38

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_DRV_1D_009.doc
Type/Number
Main module:
Module name:
Module no.:
C_DRV_1D
FB1001
Calling OBs
C_DRV_1D must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

Function
With the unidirectional drive one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of drives. The
module monitors as per standard feedback ERM in conjunction with contactor output EBE,
electrical availability ESB, overload EBM, the position of the local switch in automatic operation
EVO and a speed monitor signal. In the event of a fault the module switches off the drive.
The drive block offers two alternatives for the supervision of a speed monitor signal: A steady 1Signal or Pulses (software speed monitor). The pulse evaluation is built in the drive block itself.
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this block with the CEMAT-adapter-block
"C_SIMOS", which communicates with the SIMOCODE basic-unit.
Alarm messages:
In the event of a fault the drive generates an alarm message. Additional protection signals like
e.g. pull-rope or belt drift switch of conveyor belts, bearing temperature etc. also switch off the
drive but they cannot be analyzed in detail by the drive module. One must program an
annunciation module for each protection signal in order to display the alarm message on the
screen.
Visualization:
All drive conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard
for OS provides block icons for status display (running, off, faulty, operating mode) as well as
faceplates for the display of more detailed information.
Operating modes:
The drive module has 3 types of operating modes:
Automatic mode
(Start/Stop is done through the associated group)
Single-start mode (Start/Stop for each drive separately is possible via the OS)
Local mode
via the PLC (Start/Stop with local switch)
The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module generates a
release signal for the respective operating mode. This signal must be connected to the
appropriate operating mode release interface of the drive module.
Sequence Test
In Sequence Test mode the motor can be started without hardware signals. The feedback of the
contactor and eventually a speed monitor are simulated. The hardware inputs (ESB; EBM;
EVO...) are still active and have to be simulated by a test program at the beginning of OB1
Cycle.
If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the drive can be connected to input SIM_ON of
the Driver blocks to enable the simulation.

Operating principle
Hardware inputs
ERM
Feedback ON
Basic state 0-signal
The ERM parameter must be connected. It is appropriate to use the feedback contact of the
main contactor for this purpose. The feedback is monitored in automatic mode and in the singlestart mode. The monitoring time for switching on/off the motor can be set with the parameter
FEEDBTIM. An alarm is issued if no feedback occurs and/or the monitoring time expires.
ESB
Electrical availability
The ESB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the motor. The electrical
availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown
with an alarm.
EBM
Overload
Basic state 1-Signal
The EBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the motor (bimetal). The overload is
monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EVO
Local switch
The EVO parameter is used for the connection with the local switch of the motor. EVO = 1signal means automatic position and EVO = 0-signal means local position. No alarm signal
occurs in the control room in local mode.
In position Local (EVO = 0-signal) the motor can be started and stopped via ESR and ESP.
ESP
Local stop
The ESP parameter is used to stop the motor in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. the 0signal stops the motor.
By default the local stop ESP is only active if the drive is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to
LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
ESR
Local start
The ESR parameter is used to start the motor in local mode. A 1-signal to ESR starts the motor.
Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface = 1signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal).
Caution:
The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM contactor feedback
message arrives. For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.

Input interfaces
EEVG
Start interlock
The drive can be started in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EEVG prevents the start. In local mode the starting interlock is not
effective.
Typical application:
The fan can be started only with closed fan damper. For this, the interface EEVG must be
connected with the signal KVS1 of the damper. The run signal of the fan must be connected to
the inching release of the damper, i.e. as soon as the fan is operating, the damper can be
opened or positioned.
The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to damper direction 1 and to the fan
drive. As soon as the damper has reached limit position 1 the start interlock of the fan drive has
1-signal and the fan drive is also switched on.
EBVG
Operating interlock
The drive can run in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EBVG prevents the start or switches off the running drive. In local
mode the operating interlock is not effective.
Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running may the following drive be started. As
soon as the upstream drive fails the following drive must stop as well.
For this, interface EBVG must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The
start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both drives. As soon as the upstream
drive is running the operating interlock of the following drive has 1-signal and this drive is also
started.
ESVG
Protection interlock (always effective)
All signals which indicate a drive fault and which are not monitored by the drive module as per
standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status
healthy, 0-signal means faulty.
Interface ESVG is effective for all operating modes of the drive.
Caution:
When the drive is switched off via ESVG the drive module does not generate an
alarm message. There is no summarizing fault indication at the group and the
protection interlock is not shown in the status call.
For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the
protective interlock one must use the output MAU of the appropriate annunciation
module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken
into consideration.
All suppressor circuits concerning operator and machine safety and so which must be effective
all the time (e.g. pull-rope).

ESVA
Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Basic state 1-signal
standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status OK,
0-signal means faulty.
Interface ESVA is effective only in automatic mode and single-start mode, i.e. in the case of a
fault the drive can still be operated in local mode.
Caution:
When the drive is switched off via ESVA the drive module does not generate an
For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the
into consideration.
Belt drift switch: If the belt drift switch responds this means in automatic mode a drive fault.
However, it must be possible to start the drive in local mode to align the belt.
ESPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface ESPO stops the motor without resetting of the command memory EKS.
The motor is still activated and restarts automatically with 1-Signal at this interface.
To stop the motor completely 1-Signal at EBFA or 0-Signal at EBVG is required. If the motor is
stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group. This interface is effective
in automatic mode only.
When ESPO has 0-signal and a running drive is switched into the automatic mode the drive will
stop.
A pump which is started and stopped depending on a pressure signal.
EDRW
Hardware speed monitor
If a continuous 1-signal is available for speed monitor supervision the speed monitor signal must
be connected to interface EDRW. At the same time the software speed monitor must be
disabled (REL_SSM = 0-signal)
A 1-signal at interface EDRW means that the motor is running and the Speed monitor has
responded. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed
monitor does not provide a continuous 1-signal within the default time, the drive module
generates an alarm message.
The speed monitor supervision is only effective in automatic mode and in single-start mode.
REL_SSM
Release software speed monitor
REL_SSM must be connected with a 1-signal if you wish to use the function of the software
speed monitor. The EDRW interface is then no longer evaluated.
The 0-signal causes monitoring of the EDRW interface.
This interfaces is not operable through OS.

SW_SPEED
Pulse signal software speed monitor
If you get pulses from the speed monitor, the pulse input must be connected to interface
SW_SPEED. The software speed monitor function must be enabled via REL_SSM = 1-Signal.
The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does
not provide pulses within the default time (considering the tolerance value TOL_SSM), the drive
module generates an alarm message. Input-signal for software speed monitor.
Make sure that the duration of the pulses is long enough. If the OB1 cycle time is 100ms, pulses
and pause should be at least 200ms.
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-Signal
With 0-Signal at SM_EVS_I, EVS gets 1-Signal after speed monitor has 1-Signal and the speed
monitor supervision time has elapsed.
With 1-Signal at SM_EVS_I, EVS gets 1-Signal immediately with the 1-Signal of the speed
monitor.
REL_EBD
Bypass Speed Monitor
Speed Monitor Bypass can only be enabled/disabled from the Diagnostic Picture. If the Bypass
is switched on the speed monitor supervision is not active.
Caution:
NSTP_L_A
This is no block parameter
No stop after switching local auto
This parameter is foreseen for specific project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no
stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode, if the interlocking
conditions are fulfilled.
Caution: Parameter NSTP_L_A has to be modified only after an explicit instruction from the
Cemat Development.
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
With 0-signal at this parameter the local-stop is not effective in automatic mode.
1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too and an alarm will be
created.
ELOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the drive for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the drive
can be started/stopped via inputs ESR and ESP. The operating mode is changed by the
appropriate group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed
on to the drive module by connecting interface ELOC with signal GLO of the appropriate group.
In local mode operation via the PLC only the protective interlock ESVG is effective. The
connection of interfaces EEVG, EBVG and ESVA is not analyzed in local mode. In local mode
no logic signal EVS is generated!

EEIZ
Single-start mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the drive, i.e. the drive can be
started and stopped separately from the central control room. The operating modes are
changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES.
This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface EEIZ with signal
GES of the appropriate group.
In single-start mode all interlocks of the drive are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn
time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
ESTB
Stand-by mode
In the philosophy of CEMAT-Standards only the active plant sections can generate alarm
messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty this is indicated in the symbol at the flow
mimic but there will be no alarm message.
A 1-Signal at interface ESTB means that the drive is in stand-by mode. In this mode the drive is
monitored for availability even under stand still conditions. If a fault occurs when the drive is in
stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
ETFG
Inching release
Interface ETFG must be connected with LOG1 if the drive is to be operated as a positioning
drive, i.e. it is to be switched ON and OFF in short intervals (<= 2s).
EMFR
Annunciation release
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked.

In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message
would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this one should connect the control
voltage signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This causes no
alarms to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation
module which has to be engineered for this purpose.
EMZS
Fault interlock to the group
A 1-signal on EMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the
status call the drive fault can still be seen.
To interlock a main drive together with the affiliated auxiliary drive one must connect the
feedback contact ERM and the ON command EBE of the auxiliary drive to the protective
interlock of the main drive and vice versa. In this case, the group would indicate a fault as soon
as one of the two drives is running. To prevent this one must connect ERM and EBE of the
auxiliary drive together with OR to interface EMZS of the main drive.
ELPZ
Lamp test (additional)
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk
separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface.
10
Caution: Using ELPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.

EQIT
Acknowledge (additional)
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to
acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be
connected to this interface.
Caution: Using EQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
EBFE
Command ON
Interface to start the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is started. The interface is
normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the
associated route(s).
The drive is started either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process
value STARTDEL).
Caution:
Interface EBFE should not be connected with a continuous signal as a drive fault
can then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required, one must take
care that the EBFE has signal zero when there is a fault.
EBFA
Command OFF
Interface to switch off the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is switched off. The
interface is normally connected through the negated GDE signal of the associated group(s) or
through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s).
The drive is switched off either immediately or delayed according to the set stop delay time
(process value STOPDEL).
QSTP
Quick stop
In some situations it may be necessary to stop the drives of a group instantaneously (without
stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate stopping of
the drive in automatic mode (interface EBFA may have a delaying effect).
The group module sets during quick stop the signal GQS. Interface QSTP of the drives must be
connected with this signal.
During ship loading, when a chamber of the ship is fully loaded, the ship moves slightly and
loading continues immediately. For this, one stops the group with this function immediately (no
stop delay), and restarts immediately and the already loaded belts continue to convey.
DSIG_BQ
Driver Signal(s) Bad Quality
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only
possible if driver blocks are used.
For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be
connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in
the Faceplate of the motor.

11
If SIMOCODE Adapter block is used:

REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to enable this function with 1-signal at this parameter. In
the faceplate of the drive an additional button appears which allows opening the SIMOCODE
faceplate.
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Format BYTE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter STAT_SC
of the Adapter block "C_SIMOS". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at
parameter "REL_SC". In the TEXT1 Variable (preset with C_SIMOS) the respective Adapter
Module can be set per instance.
If the SUBCONTROL function is used:

SUBC_FT
General fault Subcontrol
A running drive will be stopped with 1-signal at this parameter. The drive becomes the status
faulty and the symbol turns to red color. The alarm message has to be generated by the
subcontrol block.
In order to display the motor current in % in the drive faceplate:

REL_MVC
Enable display of motor current
1-signal at this parameter enables the display of motor current in the faceplate and at the same
time an additional button appears in order to open the measure faceplate itself.
Look also to parameter "MV_PERC"
MV_PERC
Motor current from C_MEASUR
Format INTEGER
If a measure block for the motor current exists or a SIMOCODE is used, the percentage value of
the motor current can be displayed in the faceplate of the motor. Therefore the output
MV_PERC of the C_MEASUR or the output I_PERC of C_SIMOS has to be connected to this
interface.
Additionally the function must be enabled via REL_MVC or REL_SC.
Caution: In case of a measuring value the upper limit 1 of the measure corresponds to 100%
value of motor current. In the bar of the drive faceplate 0-130% are displayed.
For customizing of the diagnosis window:

STA2_B10
Spare input for visualization
STA2_B10 till STA2_B17

These parameter are transferred to the STATUS2 and can be used for additional purposes for
e.g. in the diagnostic window.
Look at the table OS-variables.
12

If the setpoint function is used (e. g. for variable speed drives):

EN_SP
Enable setpoint
With 1-Signal at input EN_SP the Setpoint input function is enabled. In the drive faceplate the
input field and the display of the actual Setpoint and the Process value is activated (visible).
The Setpoint can either be entered via Drive Faceplate ore as an external Setpoint. The
Setpoint is checked for Low limit SP_LLM and High limit SP_HLM. If the value exceeds the
limits it is aborted. There is no further evaluation in the drive block, the Setpoint is directly
written to the output SP_O.
SP_TR
Setpoint tracking
1-Signal at input SP_TR enables the Setpoint tracking. The external Setpoint SP_EX is tracked
to the internal Setpoint SP_IN.
EN_SPEX
Enable external setpoint
With 1-Signal at the input EN_SPEX the drive block reads the Setpoint from Input SP_EX.
SP_EX
Setpoint extern
Format REAL
Setpoint input from another AS module (e. g. from a PID controller).
The Unit is transmitted via Shortcut and the default setting is 'rpm'.
SP_IN
Setpoint from OS
Format REAL
Setpoint input from OS Standard Faceplate (must not be connected in the CFC).
PV_IN
Process Value input (actual value)
Format REAL
Input PV_IN has to be connected to the Process value. The value will be displayed in the
faceplate of the drive.
Additional input for Route Selection Function (Future):

GFSO
Group fault / status off
1-Signal at GFSO deselects the drive for the Group Summarizing fault and for the Group Status
Call.
If the Route Selection Function is used, Substations can be created (e. g. for a bag filter). The
Substation block C_RS_SUB is linked to Route Selection Module C_RSM in order to get the
start-/ stop command but the drives of a Substation are directly linked to the group via
GR_LINK1.
If the Substation is not active, the corresponding drives should not be displayed in the group
summarizing fault indication and in the group status call.
Therefore the output RS_GFSO of the C_RS_SUB must be connected to the input GFSO of the
drive blocks which are belonging to the Substation.
13
Links
The fault of the drive is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated
group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault.
To ensure this function, every drive must be connected with at least one route or a group to
which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
Associated group/route
The GR_LINK1 interface of the drive must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route
or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
Associated group /route
If the drive belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be
connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
For several groups/route
If the drive belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be
series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the
groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the
drive.
14
Caution:
The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a
group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.

Example of a circuit:
Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Motor1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_DRV_1D
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
Caution:
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive.
For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the
associated routes and finally the associated groups.

15
Process values
The process values can be set during engineering and they can be changed online from the
OS. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be
connected in the CFC.
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
Default: 4
Format INTEGER (0 999)

Value in seconds
The time for the feedback monitoring is preset as per standard to 4 seconds. If this time is not
sufficient, e.g. with motors with star-delta starting, then the set time must be extended
correspondingly. The longer time is only valid during the start, for stopping it is still the standard
monitoring time of about 4s.
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds
In automatic mode the start of the drive is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In singlestart mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds
The stopping of the drive via interface EBFA is delayed by the set time.
SPEEDTIM
Speed monitor monitoring time
Default: 0

Value in seconds
Within the set time the interface for the speed monitor EDRW must have 1-signal. When this
time is exceeded, the drive generates a speed monitor fault.
Caution:
HORN_TIM
In the default setting (SM_EVS_I = 0) the EVS signal becomes 1 only after this
time has elapsed. In this case this value must be made 0 when no speed monitor
is required. Otherwise there will be an unnecessary delay in the starting of the
subsequent drives.
With SM_EVS_I = 1 the EVS-Signal becomes 1 immediately with the speed
monitor signal.
Horn time for single start
Default: 10

Value in seconds
During the start of the drive in single-start mode a horn bit (module output HORN) is set for the
duration of the set time and the start of the drive is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to
trigger a start-up warning.
16

TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for software speed monitor
Default: 50

Value X * cycle-time. (default setting accords approximately 5 seconds).
The software speed monitor should sense an edge change at the pulse input within this time.
Only then does the internal output have a 1-signal.
Additional process parameters for the Setpoint function (e. g. for variable speed drives):
SP_HLM
Setpoint High limit
Format REAL
The Setpoint values SP_IN and SP_EX are limited by SP_HLM and SP_LLM.
SP_HLM is the maximum value for Setpoint SP_IN and SP_EX
SP_LLM
Setpoint Low limit
Format REAL
The Setpoints valus SP_IN and SP_EX are limited by SP_HLM and SP_LLM.
SP_LLM is the minimum value for Setpoint SP_IN and SP_EX.
Additional process parameters for Maintenance function:

MAI_INT
Maintenance Interval
Format DWORD
The Maintenance Interval relates, depending on the parameterization, to a fixed time value, to
the operating hours or to the number of starts. If the Maintenance Interval is exceeded the
output MAI_AL will be set.
MAI_REQL
Maintenance Request Limit
The Die Maintenance Request Limit can be used in order to indicate to the operator that the
Maintenance interval will be completed soon. If the Maintenance Request Limit is exceeded, the
output MAI_REQ will be set.

17
Output interfaces
EVS
Logic signal
A 1-signal means drive running in automatic mode or in single-start mode. It is mainly used for
the interlocking with other drives and as a feedback to the route or the group. This signal is not
generated in local mode!
EST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs in a running drive, during drive start up or during stand-by mode, the
dynamic fault bit is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged.
Caution:
In the following cases the drive fault cannot be acknowledged:

- If the ON-command is permanently active;
- With a welded contactor (ERM = 1-signal).
SST
Group fault
A 1-signal means that some fault is still present.
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the drive in single-start mode for a given time period and
can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
EVSP
Logic signal for sporadic running drives
A 1-signal means drive has received a start command in automatic mode or in single start
mode (Command Memory is ON). The drive starts when the interface ESPO has 1-Signal.
The EVSP-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In the Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output
SIM_ON of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all
driver blocks to simulation mode.
Additional output for setpoint input function (e. g. for variable speed drives):
SP_O
Setpoint Output
Format DWORD
In case of a variable speed drive (if EN_SP has 1-Signal) the Setpoint can be entered via drive
Faceplate of given via external Setpoint interface SP_EX. The Setpoint it then transferred to the
Output SP_O.
Output SP_O can be connected to driver block or to a SUBCONTORL (VSD) block.
18

Additional output for maintenance function:

MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
The auto request value has been exceeded, which means the maintenance interval is nearly
completed. This output can be connected to an annunciation block in order to generate an
alarm.
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
The Maintenance interval has been completed. This output can be connected to an
annunciation block in order to generate an alarm.
Additional outputs for Route Selection Function (Future):

In case the Route Selection Function is used, the drive is not linked to the Group any more.
They are linked to the C_RSM block. The drive interfaces EBFE, EBFA, GR_LIINK1,
GR_LINK2, MUX_LINK are not used in this case.
RS_LINK
Link to the Route Selection Module
Output RS_LINK has to be connected to input OBJ_Pnnn of the C_RSM block. Up to 300 links
are possible. The C_RSM block has a link to the group and it forwards this information to the
drive block.
GR_LINK
Group link
The annunciation blocks and measuring value blocks belonging to a motor have no connection
to C_RSM. In this case a link to the group would still be necessary.
In order to simplify the programming, the output GR_LINK of the drive block can be connected
to the input GR_LINK1 of the C_ANNUNC, C_ANNUN8 or C_MEASUR.
RS_GFSO
Output RS_GFSO has 1-Signal if the module not active in any route. This signal must be
connected to input GFSO of the annunciation blocks and measuring value blocks as a filter
function for the Group Fault Display and for the Group Status Call.
Only the active elements should be displayed in the group fault display and in the status call.

19
Hardware outputs
EBE
Command ON
The EBE signal is used to trigger the main contactor.
ELS
Running/fault lamp
The ELS running/fault lamp signals the status of the drive and can be used for the connection of
an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present).
A continuous 1-signal indicates that the drive is running. Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic
fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged). A 0signal indicates that the drive has stopped.
20

TEST_OSS
Test interface
The test interfaces are only used during module development and must not be changed!
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
SSM_CVOS
Display counter software speed-monitor
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Reset time RT for OS
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Run-time for OS
Interface to OS
RT_H
Run-time for OS refreshed every hour
Interface to OS
CNT_OS
Counter contactor for OS
Interface to OS
CNT_H
Counter contactor for OS refreshed every hour
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface status for OS
Interface to OS
VISU_OS
Status for symbol display
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word for OS
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status word for OS
Interface to OS

21
CURR_OS
Display of the motor current
Interface to OS
If a measuring value is assigned to the motor the parameter CURR_OS contains the measuring
value in percentage. The text for the Faceplate description is defined in the object properties of
parameter CURR_OS under "Identifier". The default value is "I =".
As the measuring value must not necessarily be a current value (often the power is used
instead). In this case it is required to modify the text under "Identifier".
Note: The texts under "Identifier" are internal variables and for that reason a modification of the
text requires a new OS Compile.
CMEAS_DB
Instance DB of the associated C_MEASUR
Interface to OS
DLY_CNT
Count down (when start/stop delay is active)
Interface to OS
MAI_CNT
Maintenance Actual counter in hours or starts
Interface to OS
CNT_TRIP
Maintenance Counter Trips
Interface to OS
FT_DUR
Maintenance Fault duration in sec
Interface to OS
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
Interface to OS
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
Interface to OS
22

RS_JOB
RS Job Number
Interface to OS (belongs to RS_LINK Structure)

RS_JOB shows the order number of the selected route. (from C_RSM)
RS_NAME
RS Name

RS_NAME shows the name of the selected route (from C_RSM)
RS_MAT
RS Material Name

RS_MAT shows Material number of the selected route (from C_RSM)

23
The module must be called before the associated route or group.
Any called C_MUX modules must run before this module.
The module uses the ALARM_8 module to generate annunciations.
A plausibility and priority logic at the process level analyses all object faults
only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault
secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically
the fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely.
The current operational state of the plant objects is automatically taken into consideration during
the fault analysis, e.g. all fault annunciations are suppressed automatically for a stationary
group
no superfluous fault annunciations are created
the operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations.
Each fault annunciation is also classified.
This shows whether an electrical or a mechanical fault, a process fault or a shut-down with a
local safety switch applies.
An electrician does not always need to be called first
The production operator can give specific instructions.
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "true" annunciations.

An annunciation release for each object means that the communication and OS are not
overloaded with an "annunciation storm" e.g. overloaded after a power failure.
Refer to the OS variables table for the assignment of the annunciation text and annunciation
class to the module parameters.
24

Module States
Variable VISU_OS:
No.
Status / Display Text
Display Symbol
Text Presentation
off
White
Black, white
fault not acknowledged
Blinking red
White, red
fault
Red
White, red
running
Green
Black, green
local mode
Yellow
Black, yellow
local mode running
Blinking yellow
Black, yellow
single mode
Blue
Black, blue
single mode running
Blinking blue
Black, blue
Also refer to the OS variables table
Commands
Refer to the OS variables table for the assignment of the command word.

25
I/O-bar of C_DRV_1D
C_DRV_1D
26
Format
Default
Typ
e
Feedback ON
BOOL
ESB
BOOL
EBM
Overload
BOOL
EVO
Local switch
BOOL
ESP
Local stop
BOOL
ESR
Local start
BOOL
EEVG
Start interlock
BOOL
EBVG
Operating interlock
BOOL
ESVG
Protection interlock
BOOL
ESVA
(only in automatic mode)
BOOL
ESPO
Sporadic on/off
BOOL
EDRW
BOOL
ELOC
Local mode release
BOOL
EEIZ
BOOL
ESTB
Stand-by mode
BOOL
ETFG
Inching release
BOOL
EMFR
BOOL
EMZS
BOOL
ELPZ
BOOL
EQIT
BOOL
EBFE
Command ON
BOOL
EBFA
Command OFF
BOOL
QSTP
Quick stop
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality
BOOL
STA2_B10
Spare input transferred into

STATUS 2
BOOL
Element
Meaning
ERM
Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B12

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B13

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B14

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B15

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B16

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B17

STATUS 2
BOOL
REL_SSM
Release software speed

monitor
BOOL
SW_SPEED
Pulse signal for software

speed monitor
BOOL
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when
speed monitor 1-signal
BOOL
NSTP_L_A
No stop after switchover

local auto
BOOL
LST_ACT
Local stop active in

automatic mode
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
BYTE
B#16#0
SUBC_FT
BOOL
REL_MVC
enable display of motor

current
BOOL
MV_PERC
Motor current from

C_MEASUR
BOOL
EN_SP
VSD: enable VSD function
BOOL
EN_SPEX
VSD: enable setpoint extern
BOOL
SP_TR
VSD: Setpoint tracking
BOOL
SP_IN
VSD: Setpoint from OS
REAL
SP_EX
VSD: External Setpoint
REAL
SP_HLM
VSD: Setpoint high limit
REAL
SP_LLM
VSD: Setpoint low limit
REAL
PV_IN
VSD: Process value (actual

Speed)
REAL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
Element
Meaning
STA2_B11

HMI
Permitted
Values
27
28

Typ
e
Attr.
W#16#0
INT
Start delay
INT
STOPDEL
Stop delay
INT
SPEEDTIM
Speed monitor monitoring

time
INT
HORN_TIM
INT
10
TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for

software speed monitor
INT
50
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
For several routes/groups
INT
MAI_INT
DWORD DW#16#0
MAI_REQL
DWORD DW#16#0
RES_RTOS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_H
Run-time for OS
refreshed every hour
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT_OS
Counter contactor
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT_H
Counter contactor
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_CNT
Maintenance Actual
Counter in hours or starts
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT_TRIP
Maintenance
Counter for Trips
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
FT_DUR
Maintenance
Fault time duration
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
RT_H_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
DWORD DW#16#0
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
STARTDEL
HMI
Permitted
Values

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
VSD: Setpoint Output
REAL
SSM_CVOS
Display counter software

speed monitor
BYTE
B#16#0
INTFC_OS
VISU_OS
STATUS
Element
Meaning
SP_O
DWORD DW#16#0
HMI
BYTE
B#16#0
Status word 1
DWORD
W#16#0
STATUS2
Status word 2
DWORD
W#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
CURR_OS
Display of motor current
INT
CMEAS_DB
Instance-DB from
C_MEASUR
INT
EVS
Logic signal
BOOL
EST
Dynamic fault
BOOL
SST
Group fault
BOOL
HORN
Start-up horn
BOOL
EVSP
Logic signal sporadic drive
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation on (Driver)
BOOL
EBE
Command ON
BOOL
ELS
Lamp
BOOL
MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
BOOL
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
BOOL
DLY_CNT
Count down
(when start/stop delay
active)
INT
RS_LINK
link to route selection

Module/ STATUS
DWORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
RS_STRT_DLY Start delay time
INT
RS_STOP_DLY Stop delay time
INT
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number
STRING
(12)
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)

Permitted
Values
29
30
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK
Group link information

(from C_RSM)
INT
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP
Block Type (1D=1, 2D=3

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL
Permitted
Values

OFF
ON
Reset Running Time OS
Commandword
Designation English
Brcke Drehwchter EIN/AUS Bypass Speed monitor ON/OFF
BDW_on/off
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
AUS
EIN
Laufzeit lschen
OFF
ON
R_RTOS
Designation German
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
S7-Par-Name
COMMAND
Assignment
OS-Variable table
OS-Var.
Output Level
O
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
OM
OM
31
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
Presentation
Number/NK
32
SUBC_FT
EN_SP
EN_SPEX
SP_TR
SQT
SST
BQU
EVS
EVS_SP
EKS
ON_DLY
OFF_DLY
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
EVO
EBM
ESD
ESV
LST
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sammelfehler Subcontrol
Freigabe Sollwert eingabe

Freigabe Sollwert extern
Freigabe Sollwert nachfhren
Sequenz Test
Sammelstrung
Signal Strung
verknpfungssignal
verknpfungssignal sporad.
Komando Speicher
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Enable setpoint input

Enable external setpoint
Enable setpoint tracking
Sequence test
general fault
Bad Quality of signals
Running Signal
Running Signal sporadic drive
Command memory
ON delay
OFF delay
Electrical availabilitv
fault
Local switch fault
Overload fault
Speed monitor fault
Protection interlock fault
Local Stop Fault
ESB
Contactor fault
Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Bimetall
Strung Drehwchter
Strung Schutzverriegelung
Strung Vorort Stop
STA_B31
Status
Local mode
Single start mode released
Bypass speed monitor
Software speed mon. output
Start up warning
Fault not acknowledged
Feedback ON
General fault SIMOCODE
S,O
Strung Schtz
ESS
STA_B30
Status
Betriebsart Vorort
Freigabe Einzelbetrieb
Brcke Drehwchter
Softwaredrehwchter
Anfahtwarnung
Strung nicht quittiert
Rckmeldung EIN
Strung SIMOCODE
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LOCAL
EIZ
BDW
SSM
HORN
EST
ERM
SC_FT
STATUS
16Bit

STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Reserve parameter
Enable SIMOCODE
General Warning SIMOCODE
Enable display of current
Local stop active in automatic
Feedback ON
El. Availability
Overload
Local Switch
Local Stop
Local Start
Command ON / OFF
Status
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
Reserve Parameter
16 Freigabe SIMOCODE
17 Warnung SIMOCODE
18 Freigabe Anzeige Strom
19 Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik
20
21
22
23
REL_SC
WA_SC
REL_MVC
LST_ACT
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
STA2_B30
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
Status
Rckmeldung EIN
Schaltbereitschaft
Bimetall
Vorortschalter
Vorort Stop
Vorort Start
Befehl Ein
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
ERM
ESB
EBM
EVO
ESP
ESR
EBE
STA2_OS
S,O
16Bit
33
Local switch fault

Overload fault
Speed monitor fault
local stop
Still Faulty
Strung noch vorhanden
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
ALA_EVO
ALA_EBM
ALA_ESD
ALA_LST
ALA_SIG7
ALA_REP
Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit
RES_RTOS
34
CNT_TRIP
MAI_CNT
MAI_INT
MAI_ALL
RT_H
Betriebszeit in sek fr OS
RT_OS
Betriebszeit fr MIS akt.

Je Stunde
Maintenace Intervall
Maintenance Fehergrenze
Maintenance: Zhlerstand fr
Stunden oder Strungen
Maintenance: Strrungszhler
Rckmeldezeit
Einschaltverzgerung
Drehwchterberwachungszeit
Hupzeit fr Einzelstart
Ausschaltverzgerung
Toleranz Softwaredrehwchter
Istwert Software Drehwchter
FEEDBTIM
STARTDEL
SPEEDTIM
HORN_TIM
STOPDEL
TOL_SSM
SSM_CVOS
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIG2
ALA_ESB
Maintenance Alarm limit
Maintenance: Counter status for
hours or starts
Maintenance: Counter for Trips
run time for MIS refreshed every h
reset time for runtime OS
run time in sec for OS
feedback time
start delay
speed monitor time
time for start up warning
stop delay
Tolerance speed monitor
actual value software speed monitor
Electrical availability fault
Contactor fault
Alarm
Strung Schtz
Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Bimetall
Strung Drehwchter
Vorort Stop
Status for Symbol and Text

off
Fault acknowledged
running
local mode
local mode running
single mode
single mode running
Alarm
Zustand fr Symbol und Texte

Steht
Strung quittiert
Luft
Vorortbetrieb steht
Luft in Vorortbetrieb
Einzelbetrieb steht
Luft in Einzelbetrieb
SIG1
hex
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALA_ESS
dezimal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M
M
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
S,O
ALARM
VISU_OS
sek.
sek.
sek.
sek.
sek.
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Datum/Uhr
x/3600
0-999
0-9999
0-999
0-999
0-999
1-255
1-255
16Bit
Byte
ESB
ESS
REP
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
ALF
ALF S EVO
ALF M EBM
ALF M DER
ALF S LST
ALF
ALF
xxxxx
Datum/U
hr
xxx
xxxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
2
3
4
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MAI_STA_B41
MAI_STA_B42
MAI_STA_B43
MAI_STA_B44
MAI_STA_B45
MAI_STA_B46
MAI_STA_B47
MAI_STA_B30
MAI_STA_B31
MAI_STA_B32
MAI_STA_B33
MAI_STA_B34
MAI_STA_B35
MAI_STA_B36
MAI_STA_B37
MAI_STA_B20
MAI_STA_B21
MAI_STA_B22
MAI_STA_B23
MAI_STA_B24
MAI_STA_B25
MAI_STA_B26
MAI_STA_B27
MAI_STA_B10
MAI_STA_B11
MAI_STA_B12
MAI_STA_B13
MAI_STA_B14
MAI_STA_B15
MAI_STA_B16
MAI_STA_B17
Maintenance Interval: starts
Maintenance interval: Operating hour
Maintenance: Fault time duration in s

Maintenance Status
Maintenance interval: fixed
Bedienanforderng
Bedienung
Bedineung ausgefhrt
Bedienung Temp
(keine Bedienaktion)
Status Alarm (Intervall

berschr.))
Status Anforderung
(Anforderungswert berschr.)
Status luft (MT on)
Operation Request
Operation In Progress
Operation Completed
Opartation Temp
(No Operator Action)
Status Request (Req. Val.

Exceeded))
Status Run (Maintenance on)
Status Alarm (Interval exceeded))
Maintenance Kommando Start Maintenance Command: start

Maintenance Komando
Maintenance Command: stop/reset
Stop/Reset
Maintenance: Strungsdauer
in s
Maintenance Status
Maintenance Intervall:fest
Maintenance Intervall:
Betriebsstunden
Maintenance Intervall: Starts
MAI_STA_B40
MAI_STA
FT_DUR
O
DWORD
DWORD
35
Maintenance Reserve
RS Name
RS Materialkennung
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
36
RS Auftragsnummer
RS_JOB
Sollwert Eingabe OS
Sollwert Eingabe extern
Sollwert Obergrenze
Sollwert Untergrenze
Prozess wert
RS_LINK / Stautus
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
SP_IN
SP_EX
SP_HLM
SP_LLM
PV_IN
Count down wenn EinAusschaltverzegerung luft
RS_LINK
INT
INT Anzeige Motorstrom in %

INT Instanz-DB vom C_MEASUR
DLY_CNT
CURR_OS
CMEAS_DB
MAI_X
RS Material
RS Name
RS JOB Number
RS_LINK / Status
Setpoint input OS
External Setpoint
High limit for Setpoint
Low limit for Setpoint
Process Value (feedback)
Count down when start- stop-delay

are active
Display of motor current in %

Instance DB of motor current
Maintenance Spare
S,O
S,O
O
O, D
O, D
O, D
O
O
O
O
O
O
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
INT
INT
INT
DWORD

rpm
rpm
rpm
O
O
ELOC
EEIZ
ESTB
ETFG
REL_SSM
REL_EVS_I
EMFR
EMZS
ELPZ
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
19
20
21
22
23
18
16
17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
5
6
7
Interfaceword
Local mode release

Single start mode release
Stand-by mode
Inching release
Sporadic ON/OFF
Speed monitor
Protection interlock (only automat.)
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Protection interlock (allways activ)
Schnellstop
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Quittieren (Zusatz)
Lampen prfen (Zusatz)
Meldefreigabe
Strungsverriegelung zur
Gruppe
Quick stop
Command ON
Command OFF
Fault interlock to group
Freigabe Software Drehw.

rel sofware Speed monitor
Freigabe EVS sofor bei EDRW EVS=1 immediately when EDRW=1
QSTP
EBFE
EBFA
EQIT
ESPO
EDRW
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
ESVA
OS_IF_B43
Vorortbetrieb Freigabe
Einzelbetrieb Freigabe
Betriebsart Stand-by
Tipp-Freigabe
Einschaltverriegelung
Betriebsverriegelung
Schutzverriegelung
Schutzverriegelung
(nur Automatikb.)
Sporadisch Ein/Aus
Drehwchter
Nahtstellenwort
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
0
1
2
EEVG
EBVG
ESVG
INTFC_OS
D
Bit
O
32Bit
37

Internal structure of the Route Selection Interface (Block Outputs)
Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Luft oder ist in Richtung 1
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
Voll- / Leermeldung/ Prozess
signal
Status = RS Kommando
RS_LINK /Status
Runs or is in position 1
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Full / Empty Message/
Process signal
Status = RS Command
Betriebsverriegelung ok
Operation condition ok
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
Gespeichertes Kommando
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
OP_COND
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
38
Format
DWORD
WORD
Stored command cancel

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Designation German
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
Startkommando Gruppe (GBE)
Stoppkommando Gruppe
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD
Object is listed in RS_DB

Object is connected to RS
Start command group (GBE)
Stop command group (GDA)
RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
Gruppen-Link Information
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM
Gruppenzustandsanzeige aus Group fault/ status off

INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL
39
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Bi-directional Drive C_DRV 2D
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BBi-directional Drive C_DRV 2D
BI-DIRECTIONAL DRIVE C_DRV 2D
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Hardware outputs
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
6
6
8
16
18
20
22
23
26
26
27
27
I/O-bar of C_DRV_2D
28
OS variables table
33
41

Type/Number
Main module:
Module name:
Module no.:
C_DRV_2D
FB1003
Calling OBs
C_DRV_2D must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

Function
With the bi-directional drive one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of drives. The
module monitors as per standard the feedback ERM1 and ERM2 in conjunction with contactor
output EBE1 and EBE2, electrical availability ESB, overload EBM, the position of the local
switch in automatic operation EVO and a speed monitor signal. In the event of a fault the
module switches off the drive.
The drive block offers two alternatives for the supervision of a speed monitor signal: A steady 1Signal or Pulses (software speed monitor). The pulse evaluation is built in the drive block itself.
Alarm messages:
In the event of a fault the bi-directional drive generates an alarm message. Additional protection
signals like e.g. pull-rope or belt drift switch of conveyor belts, bearing temperature etc. also
switch off the drive but they cannot be analysed in detail by the drive module. One must
program an annunciation module for each protection signal in order to display the alarm
message on the screen.
Visualization:
All drive conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT Standard
for OS provides block icons for status display (running, off, faulty, operating mode) as well as
Operating modes:
The drive module has 3 types of operating modes:
Automatic mode
(Start/Stop is done through the associated group)
Single-start mode (Start/Stop for each drive separately is possible via the OS)
Local mode
via the PLC (Start/Stop with local switch)
appropriate operating mode release interface of the drive module.
Sequence Test:
In Sequence Test mode the motor can be started without hardware signals. The feedback of the
contactor and eventually a speed monitor are simulated. The hardware signals (ESB; EBM;
EVO) are still active and have to be forced by a test program at the beginning of the OB1Task.
If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the drive can be connected to input SIM_ON of
each driver block to enable the simulation.

Operating principle
Hardware inputs
ERM1
Feedback ON direction 1
The ERM1 parameter must be connected. It is appropriate to use the feedback contact of the
main contactor 1 for this purpose. The feedback is monitored in automatic mode and in the
single-start mode. The monitoring time for switching on/off the motor can be set with the
parameter FEEDBTIM. An alarm is issued if no feedback occurs and/or the monitoring time
expires.
ERM2
See ERM1
ESB
The ESB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the motor. The electrical
availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown
with an alarm.
EBM
Overload
The EBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the motor. The overload is monitored in
automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EVO
Local switch
The EVO parameter is used for the connection with the local switch of the motor. EVO = 1signal means automatic position and EVO = 0-signal means local position. No alarm signal
occurs in the control room in local mode.
In position Local (EVO = 0-signal) the motor can be started and stopped via ESR1/ESR2 and
ESP.
ESP
Local stop
The ESP parameter is used to stop the motor in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. the 0signal stops the motor.
By default the local stop ESP is only active if the drive is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to
LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
ESR1
Local start direction 1
A positive edge to the parameter ESR1 starts the motor in direction 1.

Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface =
1-signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal).
Caution:
The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM1 contactor feedback

ESR2
A positive edge to the parameter ESR2 starts the motor in direction 2.

Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface =
1-signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal).
Caution:
The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM2 contactor feedback

Input interfaces
EEVG1
Start interlock direction 1
The drive can be started in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EEVG1 prevents the start. In local mode the starting interlock is not
effective.
The fan can be started only with closed fan damper. For this, the interface EEVG1must be
connected with the signal KVS1 of the damper. The run signal of the fan must be connected to
the inching release of the damper, i.e. as soon as the fan is operating, the damper can be
opened or positioned.
The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to damper direction 1 and to the fan
drive. As soon as the damper has reached limit position 1 the start interlock of the fan drive has
1-signal and the fan drive is also switched on.
EEVG2
Operating interlock direction 1
Look at EEVG1
EBVG1
The drive can run in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EBVG1 prevents the start or switches off the running drive. In local
Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running may the following drive be started. As
soon as the upstream drive fails the following drive must stop as well.
For this, interface EBVG1 must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The
start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both drives. As soon as the upstream
drive is running the operating interlock of the following drive has 1-signal and this drive is also
started.
EBVG2
Look at EBVG1

ESVG
Protection interlock (always effective)
standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status
healthy, 0-signal means faulty.
Interface ESVG is effective for all operating modes of the drive.
Caution:
When the drive is switched off via ESVG the drive module does not generate an
For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the
into consideration.
All suppressor circuits concerning operator and machine safety and which therefore must be
effective all the time (e.g. pull-rope).
ESVA
Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Basic state 1-signal
standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status OK,
0-signal means faulty.
Interface ESVA is effective only in automatic mode and single-start mode, i.e. in the case of a
fault the drive can still be operated in local mode.
Caution:
When the drive is switched off via ESVA the drive module does not generate an
For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the
into consideration.
Belt drift switch: If the belt drift switch responds this means in automatic mode a drive fault.
However, it must be possible to start the drive in local mode to align the belt.
ESPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface ESPO stops the motor without resetting of the command memory EKS.
The motor is still activated and restarts automatically with 1-Signal at this interface.
To stop the motor completely 1-Signal at EBFA or 0-Signal at EBVG is required. If the motor is
stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group. This interface is effective
in automatic mode only.
When ESPO has 0-signal and a running drive is switched into the automatic mode the drive will
stop.
A pump which is started and stopped depending on a pressure signal.

EDRW
If a continuous 1-signal is available for speed monitor supervision the speed monitor signal must
be connected to interface EDRW. At the same time the software speed monitor must be
disabled (REL_SSM = 0-signal)
A 1-signal at interface EDRW means that the motor is running and the Speed monitor has
responded. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed
monitor does not provide a continuous 1-signal within the default time, the drive module
generates an alarm message.
REL_SSM
Release software speed monitor
REL_SSM must be connected with a 1-signal if you wish to use the function of the software
speed monitor. The EDRW interface is then no longer evaluated.
The 0-signal causes monitoring of the EDRW interface.
This interfaces is not operable through OS.
SW_SPEED
Pulse signal software speed monitor
If you get pulses from the speed monitor, the pulse input must be connected to interface
SW_SPEED. The software speed monitor function must be enabled via REL_SSM = 1-Signal.
The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does
not provide pulses within the default time (considering the tolerance value TOL_SSM), the drive
module generates an alarm message. Input-signal for software speed monitor.
Make sure that the duration of the pulses is long enough. If the OB1 cycle time is 100ms, pulses
and pause should be at least 200ms.
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-signal
With 0-signal at SM_EVS_I, the EVS gets 1-signal after the speed monitor has got 1-signal and
supervision time of the monitor has elapsed.
With 1-signal at SM_EVS_I, the EVS gets 1-signal immediately with the 1-signal of the speed
monitor.
REL_EBD
Bypass Speed Monitor
The Speed Monitor can be enabled/disabled from the Diagnostic Picture from the OS only.
When the Bypass is set no supervision of speed monitor is active.
10
Caution:
This is no block parameter

NSTP_L_A
This parameter is foreseen for different project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no
stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode, if the interlocking
Cemat Development.
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too, and an alarm will be
created.
ELOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the drive for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the drive
can be started/stopped via inputs ESR and ESP. The operating mode is changed by the
appropriate group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed
on to the drive module by connecting interface ELOC with signal GLO of the appropriate group.
In local mode operation via the PLC only the protective interlock ESVG is effective. The
connection of interfaces EEVG, EBVG and ESVA is not analyzed in local mode. In local mode
no logic signal EVS is generated!
EEIZ
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the drive, i.e. the drive can be
started and stopped separately from the central control room. The operating modes are
changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES.
This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface EEIZ with signal
GES of the appropriate group.
In single-start mode all interlocks of the drive are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn
ESTB
Stand-by mode
A 1-Signal at interface ESTB means that the drive is in stand-by mode. In this mode the drive is
monitored for availability even under stand still conditions. If a fault occurs when the drive is in
stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
ETFG
Inching release
Interface ETFG must be connected with LOG1 if the drive is to be operated as a positioning
drive, i.e. it is to be switched ON and OFF in short intervals (<= 2s).

11
EMFR

would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this one should connect the control
voltage signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This causes no
alarms to be generated. The cause of "control voltage failure" is generated by an annunciation
EMZS
A 1-signal on EMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the
To interlock a main drive together with the affiliated auxiliary drive one must connect the
feedback contact ERM and the ON command EBE of the auxiliary drive to the protective
interlock of the main drive and vice versa. In this case, the group would indicate a fault as soon
as one of the two drives is running. To prevent this one must connect ERM and EBE of the
auxiliary drive together with OR to interface EMZS of the main drive.
ELPZ
Caution: Using ELPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
EQIT
acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding control desk signal (pulse) has to be
12
Caution: Using EQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.

EBFE1
Command ON direction 1
Interface to start the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is started in direction 1.
The interface is normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the
WBE signal of the associated route(s).
The drive is started either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process
value STARTDEL).
Caution:
Interface EBFE1 should not be connected with a continuous signal as a drive fault
can then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required, one must take
care that the EBFE1 has signal zero when there is a fault.
EBFE2
Command OFF
See EBFE1
EBFA
Interface to switch off the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is switched off. The
through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s).
The drive is switched off either immediately or delayed according to the set stop delay time
(process value STOPDEL).
QSTP
Quick stop
stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate stopping of
the drive in automatic mode (interface EBFA may have a delaying effect).
During ship loading, when a chamber of the ship is fully loaded, the ship moves slightly and
loading continues immediately. For this, one stops the group with this function immediately (no
stop delay), and restarts immediately and the already loaded belts continue to convey.
DSIG_BQ
This interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status of the I/O Cards. This is
possible when driver blocks are used.
Connected all QBAD-signals from the drivers to an OR-function. The output of this OR-function
connected to DSIG_BQ. The status is shown on the faceplate in case of any Bad Quality

13

REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
the faceplate of the drive an additional button appears which allows to open the SIMOCODE
faceplate. In the TEXT1 Variable (preset with C_SIMOS) the respective Adapter Module can
be set per instance.
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Format BYTE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter STAT_SC
of the Adapter block "C_SIMOS". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at
parameter "REL_SC".
In order to display the motor current in % in the drive faceplate:

REL_MVC
Enable display of motor current
1-signal at this parameter enables the display of motor current in the faceplate and at the same
time an additional button appears in order to open the measure faceplate itself.
Look also to parameter "MV_PERC"
MV_PERC
Motor current via C_MEASURE
Format Integer
If a measure block for the motor current exists or a SIMOCODE is used, the percentage value of
the motor current can be displayed on the faceplate of the motor. Therefore the output
MV_PERC of C_MEASUR or the output I_PERC of C_SIMOS has to be connected to this
interface.
Additionally the function must be enabled via REL_MVC or REL_SC.
Caution: In case of a measuring value the upper limit 1 of the measure corresponds to 100%
value of motor current. In the bar of the drive faceplate 0-130% are displayed.

STA2_B10
Spare input for visualisation

14


GFSO
Call.
GR_LINK1.

15
Links
To ensure this function, every drive must be connected with at least one route or a group to
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
For several groups/routes
If the drive belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be
drive.
16
Caution:
The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a

Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Motor1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_DRV_2D
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
I
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
Caution:
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive.
For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the

17
Process values
control room. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must
not be connected in the CFC.
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
Default: 4
Format INTEGER (0 - 999)

Value in seconds.
The time for the feedback monitoring is preset as per standard to 4 seconds. If this time is not
sufficient, e.g. with motors with star-delta starting, then the set time must be extended
correspondingly. The longer time is only valid during the start, for stopping it is still the standard
monitoring time of about 4s.
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
In automatic mode the start of the drive is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In singlestart mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
The stopping of the drive via interface EBFA is delayed by the set time.
SPEEDTIM
Speed monitor monitoring time
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
Within the set time the interface for the speed monitor EDRW must have 1-signal. When this
time is exceeded, the drive generates a speed monitor fault.
Caution:
HORN_TIM
The EVS signal becomes "1" only after this time has elapsed. Therefore this value
must be made "0" when no speed monitor is required. Otherwise there will be an
unnecessary delay in the starting of the subsequent drives.
With SM_EVS_I=1 the EVS-signal becomes 1-signal immediately with speed
monitor signal.
Default: 10

Value in seconds.
During the start of the drive in single-start mode a horn bit (module output HORN) is set for the
duration of the set time and the start of the drive is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to
trigger a start-up warning.
18

CHMONTIM
Monitoring change direction
Default: 10

Value in seconds
When the motor is running (EBE1 or EBE2 1-Signal) and you want to start in the opposite
direction, the start will be delayed by the set time. This enables you to ensure that the start in
the opposite direction only begins when the motor has stopped turning. This monitoring function
works in all modes. If the start in the opposite direction is blocked, this is displayed in the
operating window (Changing direction - Wait ). As soon as the monitoring has expired, this
display disappears and you can start in the opposite direction. If you want to start again in the
same direction, this monitoring has no effect and you can restart immediately.
TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for software speed monitor
Default: 50

Value X * cycle-time. (default setting accords to 5 seconds).
The software speed monitor should sense an edge change at the pulse input within this time.
Only then does the internal output have a 1-signal.

MAI_INT
Format DWORD
MAI_REQL

19
Output interfaces
EVS1
Logic signal direction 1
A 1-signal means "drive running in direction 1" in automatic mode or in single-start mode. It is
mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as a feedback to the route or the group.
This signal is not generated in local mode!
EVS2
Logic signal direction 2
See EVS1
EST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs in a running drive, during drive start up or during stand-by mode, the
dynamic fault bit is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged.
Caution:
In the following cases the drive fault cannot be acknowledged:

- If the ON-command is permanently active;
- With a welded contactor (ERM = 1-signal).
SST
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the drive in single-start mode for a given time period and
EVSP1
Logic signal direction 1 for sporadic drives
A 1-signal means drive has received a start command in automatic mode or in single start
mode (Command Memory is ON). The drive starts when the interface ESPO has 1-Signal.
The EVSP1-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
EVSP2
Logic signal direction 2 for sporadic drives
look at EVSP1
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In the Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output
SIM_ON of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all
driver blocks to simulation mode.
20


MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
alarm.
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm

RS_LINK
drive block.
GR_LINK
Group link
RS_GFSO

21
Hardware outputs
EBE1
The EBE1 signal is used to trigger the main contactor for direction 1.
EBE2
See EBE1
ELS1
Running/fault lamp direction 1
The ELS running/fault lamp signals the status of the drive and can be used for the connection of
an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present).
A continuous 1-signal indicates that the drive is running. Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic
fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged). A 0signal indicates that the drive has stopped.
ELS2
Running/fault lamp direction 2
Look at ELS1
22

TEST_OSS
Test interface
The test interfaces are only used during module development and must not be changed!
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
SSM_CVOS
Display counter software speed-monitor
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Run-time for OS
Interface to OS
RT_H
Run-time for OS refreshed every hour
Interface to OS
CNT1_OS
Interface to OS
CNT1_H
Interface to OS
CNT2_OS
Interface to OS
CNT2_H
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
VISU_OS
Interface to OS

23
STATUS
Status word for OS
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status word for OS
Interface to OS
CURR_OS
To display the current of the motor
Interface to the OS
If a measuring value is assigned to the motor the parameter CURR_OS contains the measuring
value in percentage. The text for the Faceplate description is defined in the object properties of
parameter CURR_OS under "Identifier". The default value is "I =".
As the measuring value must not necessarily be a current value (often the power is used
instead). In this case it is required to modify the text under "Identifier".
Note: The texts under "Identifier" are internal variables and for that reason a modification of the
text requires a new OS Compile.
CMEAS_DB
Instance SB of the associated C_MEASUR
Interface to the OS
DLY_CNT
Interface to OS
MAI_CNT
Interface to OS
CNT_TRIP
Interface to OS
FT_DUR
Interface to OS
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
Interface to OS
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
Interface to OS
24

RS_JOB
RS Job Number

RS_NAME
RS Name

RS_MAT
RS Material Name


25
group

overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure.
26

Module states
Variable VISU_OS:
No.
Status / Display Text
Display
Symbol
Text Presentation
off
White
Black, white
Blinking red
White, red
fault acknowledged
Red
White, red
running direction 1
Green
Black, green
running direction 2
Green
Black, green
local mode
Yellow
Black, yellow
local mode running in direction. 1
Blinking yellow
Black, yellow
local mode running in direction. 2
Blinking yellow
Black, yellow
single mode
Blue
Black, blue
10
single mode running in direction 1
Blinking blue
Black, blue
11
single mode running in direction 2
Blinking blue
Black, blue
Also refer to the OS variables table
Commands

27
I/O-bar of C_DRV_2D
28
Format
Default
Typ
e
Feedback 1 ON
BOOL
ERM2
Feedback 2 ON
BOOL
ESB
BOOL
EBM
Overload
BOOL
EVO
Local switch
BOOL
ESP
Local stop
BOOL
ESR1
BOOL
ESR2
BOOL
EEVG1
BOOL
EBVG1
Operating interlock direction

1
BOOL
EEVG2
BOOL
EBVG2

2
BOOL
ESVG
BOOL
ESVA
(only in automatic mode)
BOOL
ESPO
Sporadic on/off
BOOL
EDRW
BOOL
ELOC
Local mode release
BOOL
EEIZ
BOOL
ESTB
Stand-by mode
BOOL
ETFG
Inching release
BOOL
EMFR
BOOL
EMZS
BOOL
ELPZ
BOOL
EQIT
BOOL
EBFE1
Command direction 1 ON
BOOL
EBFE2
BOOL
Element
Meaning
ERM1
Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values

Format
Default
Typ
e
Command OFF
BOOL
QSTP
Quick stop
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
BOOL
STA2_B10

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B11

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B12

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B13

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B14

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B15

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B16

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B17

STATUS 2
BOOL
REL_SSM
Release software speed

monitor
BOOL
SW_SPEED
Pulse signal for software

speed monitor
BOOL
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when
speed monitor 1-signal
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
U
U
Element
Meaning
EBFA
NSTP_L_A
LST_ACT

local auto
Local Stop active in
Automatic
Attr.
HMI
GFSO
BOOL
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
BYTE
B#16#0
REL_MVC
enable display of motor

current
BOOL
MV_PERC
Motor current from

C_MEASUR
INT
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
W#16#0
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
INT
STARTDEL
Start delay
INT
STOPDEL
Stop delay
INT
DWORD DW#16#0

Permitted
Values
29
30

Format
Default
Typ
e
Speed monitor monitoring

time
INT
HORN_TIM
INT
10
CHMONTIM
INT
10
TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for

software speed monitor
INT
50
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
MAI_INT
DWORD DW#16#0
MAI_REQL
DWORD DW#16#0
RES_RTOS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_H
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT1_OS
Counter contactor dir.1
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT1_H

DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT2_OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT2_H

DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_CNT
Maintenance Actual
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT_TRIP
Maintenance
Counter for Trips
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
FT_DUR
Maintenance
Fault time duration
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
RT_H_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
SSM_CVOS
Display counter software

speed monitor
INTFC_OS
Element
Meaning
SPEEDTIM
BYTE
B#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
BYTE
B#16#0
Status word for test
DWORD
W#16#0
STATUS2
Status word 2
DWORD
W#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
CURR_OS
Display of motor current
INT
CMEAS_DB
Instance DB from
C_MEASURE
INT
EVS1
Logic signal dir. 1
BOOL
EVS2
Logic signal dir. 2
BOOL
EST
Dynamic fault
BOOL
SST
Group fault
BOOL
HORN
Start-up horn
BOOL
EVSP1
BOOL
EVSP2
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation ON (drivers)
BOOL
EBE1
Contactor direction 1 ON
BOOL
EBE2
Contactor direction 2 ON
BOOL
ELS1
Lamp direction 1
BOOL
ELS2
Lamp direction 2
BOOL
MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
BOOL
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
BOOL
DLY_CNT
Count down
active)
INT
RS_LINK

Module/ STATUS
DWORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
INT
INT
STRING
(12)
Element
Meaning
VISU_OS
STATUS
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number

Permitted
Values
31
32
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK

(from C_RSM)
INT
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL
Permitted
Values

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
OFF
ON Direction 1
Reset Running Time OS
ON Direction 2
Bypass Speed monitor ON/OFF
Commandword
Designation English
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AUS
EIN Richtung 1
Laufzeit lschen
EIN Richtung 2
Brcke Drehwchter EIN/AUS
OFF
ON1
R_RTOS
ON2
BDW_on/off
Designation German
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
S7 Par. Name
CommandWord
Assignment
OS variables table
OS Variabl No.
Output Level
O
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
33
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
Presentation
Number/NK
SQT
SST
BQU
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
34
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
EVO
EBM
ESD
ESV
LST
ESS2
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
EKS1
EKS2
ON_DLY
OFF_DLY
ESB
STA_B31
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
10
11
12
13
14
15
Komando Speicher
Komando Speicher
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Sequenz Test
Sammelstrung
Signal Strung
Strung Schtz 1
Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Bimetall
Strung Drehwchter
Strung Vorort Stop
Strung Schtz 2
ESS1
STA_B30
Status
Betriebsart Vorort
Richtungswechsel - Warte
Brcke Drehwchter
Softwaredrehwchter Ausgang
Rckmeldung EIN Richtung 1
Rckmeldung EIN Richtung 2
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LOCAL
EIZ
RIW
BDW
SSM
EST
ERM 1
ERM 2
StatusWord
Command memory
Command memory
ON delay
OFF delay
Sequence Test
general fault
Local switch fault

Overload fault
Speed monitor fault
Local Stop
Contactor fault 2
Contactor fault 1
Local mode
Changing direction - Wait
Bypass speed monitor
Software speed monitor output
Feedback ON Direction 1
Feedback ON Direction 2
Status
S,O
16Bit

LST_ACT
HORN
EVSP1
EVSP2
EVS1
EVS2
REL_SC
WA_SC
REL_MVC
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
18
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Anfahrwarnung
sporadisch Richtung 1
sporadisch Richtung 2
Verknpfungssignal Ri.1
Verknpfungssignal Ri.2
Freigabe Simocode
Warnung Simocode
Freigabe Anzeige Strom
Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik
Befehl Richtung 2 EIN
Status
startup warning
sporadic ON direction 1
sporadic ON direction 2
Interlocking signal direction 1
Interlocking signal direction 2
Enable Simocode
General Warning Simocode
Enable display of current
Command direction 2 ON/OFF
Command direction 1 ON/OFF
Feedback 1 ON
Feedback 2 ON
El. Availability
Overload
Local Switch
Local Stop
Local Start direction 1
Local Start direction 2
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
EBE2
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
Befehl Richtung 1 EIN
EBE1
STA2_B30
Status
Rckmeldung 1 EIN
Rckmeldung 2 EIN
Schaltbereitschaft
Bimetall
Vorortschalter
Vorort Stop
Vorort Start Richtung 1
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ERM1
ERM2
ESB
EBM
EVO
ESP
ESR1
ESR2
STATUS2
S,O
16Bit
35
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
ALA_EVO
ALA_EBM
ALA_ESD
ALA_LST
ALA_ESS2
ALA_REP
36
SIG2
ALA_ESB
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Strung Schtz Richtung 1

Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Bimetall
Strung Drehwchter
Vorort Stop
Strung Schtz Richtung 2

Steht
Strung quittiert
Luft Richtung 1
Luft Richtung 2
Vorortbetrieb steht
Luft im Vorortbetrieb Ri.1
Luft im Vorortbetrieb Ri.2
Einzelbetrieb steht
Luft im Einzelbetrieb Ri.1
Luft im Einzelbetrieb Ri.2
SIG1
hex
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
ALA_ESS1
dezimal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AlarmWord
schw,wei
wei,rot
wei,rot
schw,grn
schw,grn
schw,gelb
schw,gelb
schw,gelb
schw,trkis
schw,trkis
schw,trkis
VISU_OS
Local switch fault

Overload fault
Speed monitor fault
local stop
Contactor fault direction 2
Still Faulty
Contactor fault direction 1
Alarm

off
fault acknowledged
running direction 1
running direction 2
local mode
local mode running direction 1
local mode running direction 2
single mode
single mode running direction 1
single mode running direction 2
S,O
16Bit
Byte
ESB
ESS
ALF S EVO
ALF M EBM
ALF M DER
ALF S LST
ALF E ESS
ALF P REP
ALF
ALF
RT_OS
RES_RTOS
Maintenance: Fault time duration in s
hours or starts
run time for MIS refreshed every h
reset time for runtime OS
run time in sec for OS
Tolerance speed monitor

actual value software speed monitor
feedback time
start delay
speed monitor time
stop delay
FT_DUR
CNT_TRIP
MAI_CNT
MAI_INT
MAI_ALL
RT_H
Betriebszeit fr MIS akt.

Je Stunde
Maintenance: Strungsdauer
in s
Betriebszeit in sek fr OS
TOL_SSM
SSM_CVOS
CHMONTIM
Rckmeldezeit
Einschaltverzgerung
Drehwchterberwachungszeit
Ausschaltverzgerung
berwachung
Drehrichtungswechsel
Toleranz Softwaredrehwchter
Istwert Software Drehwchter
FEEDBTIM
STARTDEL
SPEEDTIM
HORN_TIM
STOPDEL
I
I
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
sek
sek.
sek.
sek.
sek.
sek.
xxxxx
Datum/U
hr
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
M
M
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Dword
Datum/Uhr
x/3600
1-255
1-255
0-999
0-999
0-9999
0-999
0-999
0-999
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
37
2
3
4
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MAI_STA_B41
MAI_STA_B42
MAI_STA_B43
MAI_STA_B44
MAI_STA_B45
MAI_STA_B46
MAI_STA_B47
MAI_STA_B30
MAI_STA_B31
MAI_STA_B32
MAI_STA_B33
MAI_STA_B34
MAI_STA_B35
MAI_STA_B36
MAI_STA_B37
MAI_STA_B20
MAI_STA_B21
MAI_STA_B22
MAI_STA_B23
MAI_STA_B24
MAI_STA_B25
MAI_STA_B26
MAI_STA_B27
MAI_STA_B10
MAI_STA_B11
MAI_STA_B12
MAI_STA_B13
MAI_STA_B14
MAI_STA_B15
MAI_STA_B16
MAI_STA_B17
38
MAI_X
MAI_STA_B40
MAI_STA
Maintenance interval: Operating hour
Maintenance Status
Maintenance Reserve
Bedienanforderng
Bedienung
Bedineung ausgefhrt
Bedienung Temp
Status Alarm (Intervall

berschr.))
Status Anforderung
Status luft (MT on)
Maintenance Spare
Operation Request
Operation Completed
Opartation Temp

Exceeded))
Maintenance Kommando Start Maintenance Command: start

Maintenance Komando
Stop/Reset
Maintenance Status
Betriebsstunden
DWORD
DWORD

RS Name
RS Materialkennung
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
RS Material
RS Name
RS JOB Number
RS_LINK / Status

are active
Display of motor current in %

Instance DB of motor current
RS Auftragsnummer
RS_JOB
RS_LINK / Stautus
INT
INT Anzeige Motorstrom in %

INT Instanz-DB vom C_MEASUR
RS_LINK
DLY_CNT
CURR_OS
CMEAS_DB
S,O
S,O
O
O
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
INT
INT
39
ELOC
EEIZ
ESTB
ETFG
REL_SSM
REL_EVS_I
EMFR
EMZS
ELPZ
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
40
QSTP
EBFE1
EBFE2
EBFA
EQIT
ESPO
EDRW
EEVG2
EBVG2
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
ESVA
OS_IF_B43
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
19
20
21
22
23
18
16
17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
5
6
7
Schnellstop
Befehl Richtung 1 Ein

Befehl Richtung 2 Ein
Befehl Aus
Quittieren (Zusatz)
Meldefreigabe
Strungsverriegelung zur
Gruppe
Software-Drehwchter
EVS=1 sofort bei EDRW=1
Tipp-Freigabe
Einschaltverriegelung Ri.1
Betriebsverriegelung Ri1
Schutzverriegelung
Schutzverriegelung
(nur Automatikb.)
Sporadisch Ein/Aus
Drehwchter
Einschaltverriegelung Ri.2
Betriebsverriegelung Ri2
Nahtstellenwort
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
0
1
2
EEVG1
EBVG1
ESVG
INTFC_OS
Quick stop
Command OFF
release software speed monitoring

EVS=1 immediately when EDRW=1
Local mode release

Stand-by mode
Inching release
Sporadic ON/OFF
Speed monitor
Protection interlock (only automat.)

Protection interlock (always active)
Interfaceword
32Bit

Bit

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
signal
RS_LINK /Status
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Process signal
Status = RS Command
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
OP_COND
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Format
DWORD
WORD
41
Parameter Name
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Function Name

OSAddr.
Designation German
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD

RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
42
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM
INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL

Cemat V 7.0
Damper C_DAMPER
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BDamper C_DAMPER
DAMPER C_DAMPER
Description of C_DAMPER
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Hardware outputs
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
7
7
9
15
17
20
22
23
25
25
26
27
I/O-bar of C_DAMPER
28
OS variables table
33
41

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_DAMPER_009.doc
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Description of C_DAMPER
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_DAMPER
FB1002
Calling OBs
C_DAMPER must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Function
With the damper module one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of reversible
drives (dampers). The module monitors the electrical availability KSB, overload KBM, the
position of the local switch in automatic mode KVO and the limit switches in both directions (limit
switches must be reached within the supervision time and damper must not move away from
the limit switches without any command). The supervision of torque switches and additional
protection signals is also possible.
It is possible to activate a special wagging function which responses of torque switches, or the
responses of the overshooting of the maximum runtime.
Definition of the Limit Positions:

Limit Position 1 = closed
Limit Position 2 = open
Alarm messages:
In the event of a fault the damper generates an alarm message.
Additional protection signals switch off the damper but they cannot be annunciated in detail by
the damper module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal to
display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization:
All damper statuses are made available for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard for OS
provides block icons for status display as well as faceplates for the display of more detailed
information.

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Operating modes:
The damper module has 5 types of operating modes:
Automatic mode
Single-start mode
Local mode
Positioning mode
Inching mode
Controlling both directions is done through the associated group.

Control for each damper separately is possible via the OS
Via the PLC (Control with local switches)
The setpoint can be given from the faceplate or the setpoint can be taken
from external via parameter of the block.
One can run the damper either with 2 buttons from the faceplate, or
2 signals can be connected to the parameters of the block.
Priority of the operating modes:

1 = highest priority
Prio.
Operating mode
Condition at Parameters
Local mode
KLOC=1 + KVO=0
Positioning mode
KTFG=1 + KPOS=1
Inching from faceplate or buttons
KTFG=1 + KPOS=0
Single start mode
KEIZ=1
Open loop control mode (automatic)
KLOC=0 + KEIZ=0 + KPOS=0
Changing the operating modes

The operating modes are changed by the signal status of the parameters at the block.
The group module provides signals for the enable of the local mode and the single start mode.
Sequence Test
In Sequence Test mode the damper can be started without hardware signals. The limit switches
are simulated. The hardware inputs (KSB; KBM; KVO...) are still active and have to be
simulated by a test program at the beginning of OB1 Cycle.
If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the damper can be connected to input SIM_ON
of the driver blocks to enable the simulation.

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
KWE1
Limit position 1
The KWE1 parameter is used to monitor the "closed" limit position of the damper. A 1-signal at
KWE1 means that the "closed" limit position has been reached. The connection of the KWE1
parameter is made with the make contact of the position limit switch. The break contact is
switched directly in the contactor control circuit.
KWE2
Limit position 2
The KWE2 parameter is used to monitor the "open" limit position of the damper. A 1-signal at
KWE2 means that the "open" limit position has been reached. The connection of the KWE2
parameter is made with the make contact of the position limit switch. The break contact is
switched directly in the contactor control circuit.
KSB
The KSB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the damper. The electrical
availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shut down
with an alarm.
KBM
Overload
The KBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the damper (bimetal). The overload is
monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shut down with an alarm.
KVO
Local switch
The KVO parameter is used for connecting the local switch of the damper. The KVO = 1-signal
means the Automatic position and the KVO = 0-signal means the Local position. No alarm
signal occurs in the control room in local mode.
In position Local (KVO = 0-signal) the damper can be started via KCL and KOP and stopped via
KSP.
KSP
Local stop
The KSP parameter is used to stop the damper in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. a 0signal stops the damper.
By default the local stop KSP is only active if the damper is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal
to LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
KCL
The KCL parameter is used to close the damper in local mode. A 1-signal at KCL starts the
damper in direction 1.
The prerequisite for closing the damper from local is the local release (KLOC interface = 1signal) and the position of the KVO switch at local (KVO = 0-signal).

0BDamper C_DAMPER
KOP
The KOP parameter is used to open the damper in local mode. The 1-signal at KOP starts the
damper in direction 2.
The prerequisite for opening the damper from local is the local release (KLOC interface = 1signal) and the position of the KVO switch at local (KVO = 0-signal).

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Input interfaces
KEV1
The damper can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock
has 1-signal. A 0-signal at interface KEV1 prevents the operation in direction 1. In local mode
the start interlock is not effective.
KBV1
The damper can be operated in automatic mode or in single-start mode only if the operating
interlock has 1-signal. A 0-signal at interface KBV1 prevents the starting or switches off the
damper. In local mode the operating interlock is not effective.
KSV1
Protection interlock direction 1
All signals which indicate a damper fault and which are not monitored by the damper module as
standard must be connected to the protection interlock. A 1-signal means status OK,
a 0-signal means fault.
Interfaces KSV1 and KSV2 are effective in all operating modes of the damper.
Caution: When the damper is switched off via KSV1 or KSV2, the damper module does not
generate an alarm message. There is no summarizing fault indication at the group and the
For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protection
interlock one must use the output MAU of the associated annunciation module and not the input
signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
Remark: In older standard versions, interfaces KSV1/KSV2 were used for the torque monitoring.
This interfacing is still possible but today it is much easier with interfaces KDR1 and KDR2.
KDR1
Torque switch direction 1
A 1-signal at interface KDR1 or KDR2 means the torque switch has responded. Depending on
how interface KWED is connected, this fault is analysed and annunciated immediately or the
damper resorts to wagging (see KWED).
KEV2
Protection interlock direction 2
See KEV1
KBV2
See KBV1
KSV2
See KSV1
KDR2
See KDR1

0BDamper C_DAMPER
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
created.
KLOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface enables the damper for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the
damper can be controlled via inputs KOP and KCL. The operation mode is changed by the
associated group. The group module sets the local mode signal GLO. This information is
passed on to the damper module by connecting interface KLOC with signal GLO of the
associated group.
In local mode via the PLC only protection interlock KSV1/KSV2 is effective. The connection of
interfaces KEV1/KEV2 and KBV1/KBV2 are not analysed in local mode.
KEIZ
A 1-signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the damper, i.e. the damper can be
controlled individually from the central control room. The operating modes are changed by the
associated group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES. This information is
passed on to the damper module by connecting interface KEIZ with signal GES of the
associated group.
In single-start mode all interlocks of the damper module are effective! Start is carried out after
the set horn time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
KSTB
Stand-by mode
messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty, this is indicated in the symbol at the flow
A 1-Signal at interface KSTB means that the damper is in stand-by mode. In this mode the
damper is monitored for availability. If a fault occurs when the damper is in stand-by mode, an
alarm message is generated.
KWED
Wagging code
The connection of wagging code KWED with 1-signal causes the damper to wag when the runtime is exceeded or when the torque switch is activated. This means the damper returns to the
old limit position and makes a new attempt to move in the required direction etc.
The number of attempts depends on the set wagging count (process value WAGG_NO).
When the set number of wagging attempts is exceeded the damper signals a mechanical fault.
When wagging code KWED has 0-signal the response of the torque switch leads to direct
switching off and the damper signals torque switch fault.
KWU1
Changeover limit switch, make/break contact Basic state 1-signal
The standard module expects a make contact as the limit switch, i.e. when the limit position is
reached then parameter KWE1 has 1-signal. A make contact may not always be available as
limit switch (if e.g. the contacts were used elsewhere). In such cases if the interface KWU1 is
programmed to have 0-signal, the limit switch is interpreted as a break contact.
10

KWU2
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Changeover limit switch, make/break contact Basic state 1-signal
See KWU1
KMFR

would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this, one should connect the control
voltage signal to the annunciation release interface of the appropriate modules. This causes no
alarm to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation
KMZS
A 1-signal on KMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the
KLP1
Caution: Using KLP1 the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected. There is only one interface for both direction 1 and direction 2.
KQT1
acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be
Caution: Using KQT1 the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected. There is only one interface for both direction 1 and direction 2.
KHA1
Manual command (inching direction 1)
Interfaces KHA1 and KHA2 are effective only in conjunction with inching release KTFG. They
are used for manual positioning of the damper with +/- pushbuttons (conventional control desk).
Damper output KB1 is given only as long as interface KHA1 has 1-signal.
KEB1
Command ON (direction 1)
Interface to move the damper in direction 1 in automatic mode. With 1-signal the damper is
switched on. The GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the associated
route(s) is normally connected to this interface.
Caution: Interfaces KEB1 and KEB2 must not be connected with a continuous signal because
then the damper fault cannot be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required (e.g. for fan
dampers) one must take care that the ON command becomes zero in the event of a fault (see
engineering manual "Fan dampers").

11
0BDamper C_DAMPER
KAB1
Command OFF (direction 1)
A 1-signal at this interface switches off the damper in direction 1 in automatic mode. This is
actually needed only if the damper is to be switched off in an intermediate position (e.g. with
dampers with 3 limit switches - see engineering manual).
KHA2
Manual command (inching direction 2)
Command ON (direction 2)
Command OFF (direction 2)
See KHA1
KEB2
See KEB1
KAB2
See KAB1
DSIG_BQ
the Faceplate of the damper.
The following input interfaces belong to the positioning function of the damper:
KPOS
Positioner
For dampers with positioning functions the interfaces KPOS and KTFG must be connected with
a 1-signal and an actual value for the damper position (0-100%) must be connected to the
damper module using parameter POS_IN. If you want to inch the damper outputs directly, then
the interface has to be KPOS=0 and KTFG=1.
KTFG
Inching release
To position the damper (through positioning function of the damper or manually via +/pushbuttons) the inching release must have a 1-signal.
A 1-signal at interface KTFG blocks the control via KEB1 and KEB2 as well as the control in
single-start mode.
POS_IN
Position value (0-100%)
Default: 0.0
Format REAL. Only for dampers with a positioning function!

The POS_IN interface must be connected with the damper position (actual value of the
positioner).
12
Caution: The value must be 0-100!

POS_LZ
Live-zero position
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Only for dampers with positioning function!

The POS_LZ interface must be connected with the Live-Zero signal of the analog value for the
damper position, so that the damper recognizes that the position value is erroneous.
KWEE
External setpoint ON
Only for dampers with a positioning function!

When interface KWEE has a 1-signal the damper module reads the setpoint from input interface
KWEX. This function is used if the setpoint is specified by a primary controller. In this case, one
must connect the output of the corresponding controller to interface KWEX of the damper.
KWEX
External setpoint
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
If the setpoint is specified by a primary function (e.g. Controller ), then the value must be
transferred into this input interface. It is effective if KWEE has a 1-Signal.
KSNF
Setpoint tracking

In the operating mode positioning, the setpoints track each other. If KSNF = 0, the setpoints are
not tracked to the actual value.
EN_INCH
Enable inching in positioning mode
This is not a parameter at the block. It is possible to switch to inching mode from the diagnosis
faceplate only.
When the damper is set to positioning mode by (KPOS=1 and KTFG=1) there is the possibility
to switch over to the inching mode from the faceplate.
Attention: This is not a second function fort the normal inching mode. But if there are
problems to reach the limit positions in positioning mode one can use the new function. The
operator then is responsible to switch back into positioning mode.
The following conditions will switch off this special inching mode:
- the operator (by pressing the button in the diagnosis faceplate)
- when the damper is not in the condition of positioning anymore (KTFG=0 or KPOS=0)
- when the limit position1 or 2 is reached.

13
0BDamper C_DAMPER

REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
the faceplate of the damper an additional button appears which allows opening the SIMOCODE
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Default: 0
Format BYTE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter of the
Adapter block "C_SIMOS". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at
parameter "REL_SC".

STA2_B10
Spare input for visualisation


GFSO
Call.
GR_LINK1.
14

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Links
The fault of the damper is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated
To ensure this function, every damper must be connected with at least one route or a group to
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the damper must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the
route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the damper belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be
MUX_LINK
If the damper belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be
damper.
Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a

15
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
1/5
G_LINK
Damper1
MAIN_TASK
C_DAMPER
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
16
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive.
For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated routes
and finally the associated groups.

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Process values
LSMONTIM
Limit switch delay time
Default: 2

Value in seconds.
If the damper leaves the limit position without any command, this is interpreted as a mechanical
fault. This monitoring is delayed by the set time.
RTMONTIM
Run-time monitoring
Default: 90

Value in seconds.
The run-time monitoring is effective only in automatic mode, single-start mode and positioning
mode, in fact only when the damper is moved from one limit position to the other limit position.
The damper module checks whether the target limit position or the set-point is reached within
the set time. If this time is exceeded the damper annunciates the run-time fault as a mechanical
fault.
This run-time monitoring must be adjusted depending on the damper run-time. The set time
applies to both directions.
With the value 0 the run-time monitoring is switched off in all operating modes.
WAGG_NO
Wagging counter
Default: 0

Number of wagging attempts.
If the wagging release KWED has 1-signal when a run-time fault occurs or the torque limit
switch is activated, the damper returns to the start position and then tries to run again in the
required direction. This process is called wagging. The number of wagging attempts can be set
here. After an unsuccessful number of wagging attempts mechanical fault annunciation is
generated.
HORN_TIM
Default: 10

Value in seconds.
When the damper is triggered in single-start mode, a horn bit (module output) is set for the
duration of the set time and the start of the damper is delayed. The horn bit can be connected
further for the triggering of a start-up warning.
W_OS
Setpoint of OS
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
Interface for the setpoint specification of the OS.
KWUG
Setpoint lower limit
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
The default setting corresponds to the scale beginning for the setpoint of the damper position.

17
0BDamper C_DAMPER
KWOG
Setpoint upper limit
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
The default setting corresponds to the scale end for the setpoint of the damper position.
SCB
Scale beginning
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
Scale beginning for the setpoint of the damper position.
SCE
Scale end
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
Scale end for the setpoint of the damper position.
UNIT
Unit
Default: %
Format STRING
Unit of the setpoint of the damper position.
TMIN
Minimum pulse length
Default: 0.5
Format REAL (0.0 - 9.9)

Value in seconds.
Here, the smallest pulse width to be output as damper commands is set. This pulse width must
be longer than the cycle time.
TM
Actuator runtime
Default: 60.0
Format REAL (0 - 999)

Value in seconds.
This is the run-time for the damper to travel from one limit position to the other. It has an effect
on the length of the pulses to be output. In contrast to the run-time monitoring, which is always
set as a higher value, you must enter the actual run-time here.
AN
Hysteresis response threshold
Default: 1

Value in %.
This is the beginning of the dead zone. If the deviation exceeds this percentage value the
positioner starts to output pulses.
AB
Hysteresis dropout threshold
Default: 0.5

Value in %.
This is the end of the dead zone. If the deviation is smaller than this percentage value the
positioner does not output further pulses.
18

0BDamper C_DAMPER

MAI_INT
Format DWORD
MAI_REQL

19
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Output interfaces
KVS1
Logic signal
A 1-signal means "Damper in limit position 1".

The logic signal is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as feedback for the
route or the group.
KVS2
Logic signal
A 1-signal means "Damper in limit position 2".

The logic signal is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as feedback for the
route or the group.
KST1/KST2
Dynamic fault
If a fault occurs during the triggering of the damper module, or during stand-by mode the
dynamic fault bits are set. They remaining set until the fault is acknowledged.
Caution:
SST
In the following cases the damper fault cannot be acknowledged.

- If the ON command is constantly present;
- If both limit switches have responded at the same time. (switch cogged)
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the damper in single-start mode for a given time period
and can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON
of the damper can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all driver
blocks to simulation mode.
KPO
Positioner ON
A 1-signal means that the damper is in positioning mode. The negated KPO Signal can be used
to switch the primary controller to local mode.

MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
alarm.
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
20

0BDamper C_DAMPER

RS_LINK
drive block.
GR_LINK
Group link
RS_GFSO

21
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Hardware outputs
KB1
Command direction 1
The KB1 signal is used to trigger the main contactor in direction 1 to close the damper.
KB2
Command direction 2
The KB2 signal is used to trigger the main contactor in direction 2 to open the damper.
W_ACT_O
Active Set point
Active Set point in positioning mode. This signal can be used, if the damper is controlled via
analog output (instead of using the digital output signal KB1 and KB2).
KL1
Lamp 1
The KL1 lamp indicates the status of the damper and can be used for the connection of an
annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates
that the damper has reached the limit position 1 (closed). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic
fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
KL2
Lamp 2
The KL2 lamp indicates the status of the damper and can be used for the connection of an
annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates
that the damper has reached the limit position 2 (open). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault
(non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
22

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
The test interfaces are used during module development and must not be changed!
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
X_POS_OS
Damper position display
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Reset time for number of movements for OS
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Number of movements for OS
Interface to OS
RT_H
Number of movements refreshed every hour
Interface to MIS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
VISU_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word 1
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status word 2
Interface to OS
MAI_CNT
Interface to OS
CNT_TRIP
Interface to OS

23
0BDamper C_DAMPER
FT_DUR
Interface to OS
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
Interface to OS
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
Interface to OS
RS_JOB
RS Job Number

RS_NAME
RS Name

RS_MAT
RS Material Name

24

0BDamper C_DAMPER
group


25
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Module states
Variable VISU_OS:
26
No.
Status / Text
Symbol Display
Text Presentation
limit position 2
Green
Black , green
limit position 1
Green
Black , white
moving to position 2
Blinking green
Black , green
Blinking green
Black , white
Blinking red
White , red
fault acknowledged
Red
White , red
no limit position
Gray
Black , white
fault acknowledged position 1
Red
White , red
Red
White , red
10
local mode position 2
Yellow
Black , yellow
11
Yellow
Black , yellow
12
local mode moving to position 2
Blinking yellow
Black , yellow
13
Blinking yellow
Black , yellow
14
local mode no limit position
Blinking gray
Black , yellow
15
single mode position 2
Cyan
Black , blue
16
Cyan
Black , blue
17
single mode moving to position 2
Blinking cyan
Black , blue
18
Blinking cyan
Black , blue
19
single mode no limit position
Blinking cyan
Black , blue

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Status display of a positioning damper:

1st column:
C = control operation
T = inching operation
P = positioning operation
2nd column:
E = external setpoint
3rd column:
D = damper fault
4th column:
A = analog value fault
No.
Status
Controlled
Controlled + damper fault
Controlled + analog value fault
Controlled + damper fault + analog value

fault
Inching operation
Inching operation + damper fault
Inching operation + analog value fault
Inching operation + damper fault + analog

value fault
Positioning operation
10
Positioning operation + damper fault
11
Positioning operation + analog value fault
12
Positioning operation + damper fault +

analog value fault
13
Positioning operation + ext. setpoint
14
Positioning operation + ext. setpoint +

damper fault
15

analog value fault
16

damper fault + analog value fault
Display (bitmap)
Commands

27
0BDamper C_DAMPER
I/O-bar of C_DAMPER
C_DAMPER
28
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
KWE1
Type Attr.
Limit position 1
BOOL
KWE2
Limit position 2
BOOL
KSB
BOOL
KBM
Overload
BOOL
KVO
Local switch
BOOL
KSP
Local stop
BOOL
KCL
BOOL
KOP
BOOL
KEV1
BOOL
KBV1

1
BOOL
KSV1
Protection interlock direction

1
BOOL
KDR1
BOOL
KEV2
BOOL
KBV2

2
BOOL
KSV2
Protection interlock direction

2
BOOL
KDR2
BOOL
KLOC
Local mode release
BOOL
KEIZ
BOOL
KSTB
Stand-by mode
BOOL
KWED
Wagging code
BOOL
KWU1
Changeover limit switch 1

1=N.O. 0=N.C.
BOOL
KWU2
Changeover limit switch 2

1=N.O. 0=N.C.
BOOL
KMFR
BOOL
KMZS
BOOL
KLP1
Lamp test
BOOL
HMI
Permitted
Values


Element
Meaning
KQT1
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Format
Default
Acknowledge
BOOL
KHA1
Manual command 1
(inching)
BOOL
KEB1
BOOL
KAB1
Command OFF direction 1
BOOL
KHA2
Manual command 2
(inching)
BOOL
KEB2
BOOL
KAB2
Command OFF direction 2
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
BOOL
STA2_B10

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B11

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B12

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B13

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B14

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B15

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B16

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B17

STATUS 2
BOOL
LST_ACT

automatic mode
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
BYTE
B#16#0
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
LSMONTIM
DWORD DW#16#0
Type Attr.
HMI
WORD
W#16#0
Limit switch monitoring time
INT
10
RTMONTIM
Run-time monitoring
controller
INT
15
WAGG_NO
Wagging counter
INT
HORN_TIM
Horn time for single-start

mode
INT

Permitted
Values
+
+
29
0BDamper C_DAMPER
30
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
KTFG
Type Attr.
HMI
Inching release
BOOL
KPOS
Positioner
BOOL
KSNF
Setpoint tracking
BOOL
W_OS
Setpoint of OS (KWCO)
REAL
0.000000
e+000
KWUG
REAL
0.000000
e+000
KWOG
REAL
1.000000
e+002
KWEE
External setpoint active
BOOL
KWEX
External setpoint
REAL
0.000000
e+000
SCB
Scale beginning
REAL
0.000000
e+000
SCE
Scale end
REAL
1.000000
e+002
UNIT
Unit
STRING
[8]
POS_IN
Position value 0-100
STRUCT
POS_LZ
Live-zero for position
BOOL
TMIN
Min. pulse length
REAL
5.000000
e-001
TM
Actuator run-time
REAL
3.000000
e+001
AN
Switch on of the dead zone
REAL
1.000000
e+000
AB
Switch off of the dead zone
REAL
1.000000
e+000
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
MAI_INT
DWORD DW#16#0
MAI_REQL
DWORD DW#16#0
RES_RTOS
Reset time for number of

movements for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS
Number of movements for

OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_MH
Run-time for MIS

refresh every hour
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_CNT
Maintenance Actual
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
Permitted
Values

0BDamper C_DAMPER
Element
Meaning
Format
CNT_TRIP
Maintenance
Counter for Trips
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
FT_DUR
Maintenance
Fault time duration
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
RT_H_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
X_POS_OS
Damper position display
0.000000
e+000
INTFC_OS
DWORD DW#16#0
VISU_OS
BYTE
B#16#0
STATUS
Status word 1
WORD
W#16#0
STATUS2
Status word 2
WORD
W#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
KWUG_O
REAL
0.000000
e+000
KWOG_O
REAL
1.000000
e+002
SCB_O
Scale beginning
REAL
0.000000
e+000
SCE_O
Scale end
REAL
1.000000
e+002
W_ACT_O
Setpoint Output
REAL
0.000000
e+000
KVS1
Logic signal 1
BOOL
KVS2
Logic signal 2
BOOL
KST1
Dynamic fault 1
BOOL
KST2
Dynamic fault 2
BOOL
SST
Group fault
BOOL
HORN
Start-up horn
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation ON (driver)
BOOL
KPO
Positioner ON
BOOL
KB1
Command direction 1
BOOL
REAL

Default
Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
31
0BDamper C_DAMPER
32
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
KB2
Type Attr.
Command direction 2
BOOL
KL1
Lamp 1
BOOL
KL2
Lamp 2
BOOL
MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
BOOL
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
BOOL
RS_LINK

Module/ STATUS
DWORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
INT
INT
HMI
Permitted
Values
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number
STRING
(12)
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK

(from C_RSM)
INT
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL

S7-Par-Name
Designation English
reset No. of operations (OIS)
Inching slow direction 1

Inching slow direction 2
Inching fast direction 1
Inching fast direction 2
OFF
ON direction 1
ON direction 2
Commandword
COM_B17
Commandword
Designation German
Tippen langsam Richtung 1

Tippen langsam Richtung 2
Tippen schnell Richtung 1
Tippen schnell Richtung 2
STOP
EIN Richtung 1
EIN Richtung 2
Rcksetzen Zhler Anzahl
R_RTOS 15
Bewegungen
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
ISD1
ISD2
IFD1
IFD2
OFF
ON1
ON2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Commandword
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Variable
Output Level
O
Type
O
Value
Range
16Bit
Fault Class
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
Event Text
Annun. Class
Unit
Presentation
Number/NK
33
0BDamper C_DAMPER
KBM
KSV
KM1
KM2
KDR1
KDR2
SQT
SST
BQU
KVS1
KVS2
STEU
TIPP
POSI
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
34
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
KSB
KVO
STA_B30
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sequenz Test
Sammelstrung
Signal Strung
Position 1
Position 2
Betriebsart Steuerung
Tippbetrieb
Positionierbetrieb
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft

Strung / Betriebsart Vorortschalter
(Antrieb steht nicht auf Automatik)
Strung Bimetall
Strung mechanisch Richtung 1
Strung mechanisch Richtung 2
Strung Drehmoment Richtung 1
Strung Drehmoment Richtung 2
Sequence test
fault
Position 1
Position 2
Control mode
Inching mode
Positioner mode

Local fault / operating mode local
switch (drive not in automatic)
Overload fault
Mechanical fault direction 1
Torque fault direction 1
Local mode released

Single-start mode released
Start-up warning
Positioner ON
Fault local stop
position value live zero
dynamic fault
Status
Status
Vorortbetrieb freigegeben
Einzelbetrieb freigegeben
Anfahr-Hupe
Positionierer EIN
Strung Vorort Stop
Positionsmewert live zero
Dynamische Strung
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
LOC
EIZ
HORN
KPO
LST
ULZ
KST
StatusWord
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Bit
16Bit

S,O
KB2
REL_SC
WA_SC
W_EX
LST_ACT
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
Freigabe Simocode
Warnung Simocode
Externer Sollwert
Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik
Status
Enable Simocode
General Warning Simocode
ext. Setpoint
Command Direction 2
Command Direction 1
Limit position 1
Limit position 2
El. availability
Overload
Local switch
Local Stop
Local Direction 1
Local Direction 2
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
9 Befehl Richtung 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
Befehl Richtung 1
KB1
STA2_B30
Status
Endstellung 1
Endstellung 2
Schaltbereitschaft
Bimetall
Vorortschalter
Vorort Stop
Vorort Richtung 1
Vorort Richtung 2
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
KWE1
KWE2
KSB
KBM
KVO
KSP
KCL
KOP
STATUS2
S,O
16Bit
35
0BDamper C_DAMPER
36

limit position 2
limit position 1
fault ackniwledged
no limit position
local mode no limit position
Single mode no limit position

Endlage 2
Endlage 1
Luft in Richtung 2
Luft in Richtung 1
Strung quittiert
Keine Endlage
Strung quittiert Endlage 1
Strung quittiert Endlage 2
Vorortbetrieb Endlage 2
Vorortbetrieb Endlage 1
Vorort luft in Richtung 2
Vorort luft in Richtung 1
Vorort keine Endlage
Einzelbetrieb Endlage 2
Einzelbetrieb luft in Richt. 2
Einzelbetrieb luft in Richt. 1
Einzelbetrieb keine Endlage
VISU_OS
dezimal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Byte

S,O
FT_DUR
CNT_TRIP
MAI_CNT
RT_OS
RT_H
MAI_INT
MAI_ALL
RES_RTOS

Run time supervision
Wagging number
Setpoint
Setpoint limit min
Setpoint limit max
SCB
SCE
Unit
minimum pulse length
Actuator run time
Hysteresis resp. threshold AN
Hysteresis dropout "

Local fault / operating mode local
switch
Overload fault
still faulty
Alarm
Position of the damper

Reset time for No. Of operations
Resetzeit Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS
for OS
Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS
No. of operations for OS
Anzahl Schaltvorgnge pro h fr
No. of operations refreshed per h
Maintenance: Zhlerstand fr Stunden Maintenance: Counter status for
oder Strungen
hours or starts
Maintenance: Fault time duration
Maintenance: Strungsdauer in s
in s
Klappenposition
ALA_KBM
ALA_KM1
ALA_KM2
ALA_KDR1
ALA_KDR2
ALA_REP
X_POS_OS
2
3
4
5
6
7
ALA_KVO
Endschalterverzgerungszeit
Laufzeitberwachung
Wedelzahl
Sollwert
Sollgrenze min
Sollgrenze max.
SKA
SKE
Dimension
minimale Impulslnge
Stellgliedlaufzeit
Ansprechschw. Totzone
Abfallschwelle Totzone
ALA_KSB
LSMONTIM
RTMONTIM
WAGG_NO
HORN_TIM
W_OS
KWUG
KWOG
SCB
SCE
UNIT
TMIN
TM
AN
AB
Alarm
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft

Strung / Betriebsart Vorortschalter
(Antrieb steht nicht auf Automatik)
Strung Bimetall
Strung Mechanisch Richtung 1
Strung Mechanisch Richtung 2
Strung Drehmomentschalter Richt. 1
Strung Drehmomentschalter Richt. 2
AlarmWord
D
D
M
M
S,O,D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
S,O,D
S,O,D
D
D
D
D
S,O
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxx.y
x.y
xxx
x.y
x.y
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
xxx
sec.
xxx
sec.
xxx
xxx
sec.
xxxx.xx
xxxx.xx
xxxx.xx
xxxx.xx
xxxx.xx
O
O
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWord
Dword
DWORD
DWORD
Dword
0.0-100.0
0.0-9.9
0-999
0.0-9.9
0.0-9.9
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
SKA-SKE
SKA-WOG
WUG-SKE
SCA-SCE
SCA-SCE
Byte
E
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
M
M
M
M
M
P
KSB
KBM
KM1
KM2
KDR1
KDR2
REP
KVO
37
0BDamper C_DAMPER
2
3
4
5
6
7
Status Alarm (Intervall berschr.))

Status Anforderung (Anforderungswert
9
berschr.)
10 Status luft (MT on)
11
12
13
14
15
16 Bedienanforderng
17 Bedienung
18 Bedineung ausgefhrt
Bedienung Temp
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MAI_STA_B42
MAI_STA_B43
MAI_STA_B44
MAI_STA_B45
MAI_STA_B46
MAI_STA_B47
MAI_STA_B30
MAI_STA_B20
MAI_STA_B21
MAI_STA_B22
MAI_STA_B10
MAI_STA_B11
MAI_STA_B12
MAI_STA_B13
MAI_STA_B14
MAI_STA_B15
MAI_STA_B16
MAI_STA_B17
38
MAI_X
MAI_STA_B24
MAI_STA_B25
MAI_STA_B26
MAI_STA_B27
MAI_STA_B23
MAI_STA_B32
MAI_STA_B33
MAI_STA_B34
MAI_STA_B35
MAI_STA_B36
MAI_STA_B37
Maintenance Reserve
Maintenance Kommando Start

Maintenance Komando Stop/Reset
MAI_STA_B41
MAI_STA_B31
Maintenance Spare
Operation Request
Operation Completed
Opartation Temp

Exceeded))
Maintenance Command: start

Maintenance Status
Maintenance interval: Operating
Maintenance Intervall: Betriebsstunden
hour
Maintenance Status
MAI_STA_B40
MAI_STA
0BDamper C_DAMPER
DWORD
DWORD

RS Materialkennung
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
RS Material
RS Name
RS_JOB
S,O
RS JOB Number
RS Auftragsnummer
RS Name
R
S,O
RS_LINK / Status
RS_LINK / Stautus
RS_LINK
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
39
0BDamper C_DAMPER
KWU2
KMFR
KMZS
KLP1
KQT1
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
40
KHA1
KEB1
KAB1
KHA2
KEB2
KAB2
KWU1
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B27
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
KWED
OS_IF_B20
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Handbefehl (Tippen)
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Handbefehl (Tippen)
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
16 Wedelkennung
Umschaltung Endschalter
17
1=Schliesser 0= ffner
Umschaltung Endschalter
18
1=Schliesser 0= ffner
19 Meldefreigabe
20 Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe
21 Lampen prfen (Zusatz)
22 Quittieren (Zusatz)
23
Tipp-Freigabe
Positionierer
Externer Sollwert ein
Sollwert nachfhren
KLOC
KEIZ
KSTB
KTFG
KPOS
KWEE
KSNF
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Schutzverriegelung
Drehmomentendschalter
Schutzverriegelung
Drehmomentendschalter
Manual command (inching)

Command ON
Command OFF
Manual command (inching)
Command ON
Command OFF
Wagging release
Changeover limit switch
1=N.O 0= N.C.
Changeover limit switch
1=N.O 0= N.C.
Local mode release

Stand-by mode
Inching release
Positioner
External setpoint ON
Setpoint tracking
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Torque switch
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Torque switch
Interfaceflags
Nahtstellen-Zustand
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
KEV1
KBV1
KSV1
KDR1
KEV2
KBV2
KSV2
KDR2
INTFC_OS
0BDamper C_DAMPER
32Bit

Bit
0BDamper C_DAMPER

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
signal
RS_LINK /Status
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Process signal
Status = RS Command
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
OP_COND
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Format
DWORD
WORD
41
0BDamper C_DAMPER
Parameter Name
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Function Name

OSAddr.
Designation German
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD

RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
42
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM
INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL

Cemat V 7.0
Valve C_VALVE
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BValve C_VALVE
VALVE C_VALVE
Description of C_VALVE
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Valve active
Limit position switches
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
4
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
14
16
18
21
23
23
24
I/O-bar of C_VALVE
25
OS variables table
29
36

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_VALVE_009.doc
0BValve C_VALVE
Description of C_VALVE
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_VALVE
FB1007
Calling OBs
C_VALVE must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

0BValve C_VALVE
Function
With the valve module one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of valves. The
module monitors the electrical availability and the position of the local switch in automatic mode.
If there are limit switches the module monitors the final positions.
In the event of a fault the module switches off the valve.
Alarm messages:
In the event of a fault the valve module generates an alarm message. Additional protection
signals (normally not required) do switch off the valve but they cannot be analysed in detail by
the valve module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal in order
to display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization:
The valve conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard
for OS provides block icons for status display (limit position, faulty, operating mode) as well as
Operating modes:
The valve module has 3 operating modes:
- Automatic mode
(Open/close is done through the associated group).
- Single-start mode
(Open/close for each valve separately is possible via OS).
- Local mode via the PLC (Open/close with local switch)
appropriate operating mode release interface of the valve module.
Sequence Test
In Sequence Test mode the Valve can be started without hardware signals. The limit switches
are simulated. The hardware inputs (VSB; VVO...) are still active and have to be simulated by a
test program at the beginning of OB1 Cycle.
If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the damper can be connected to input SIM_ON
of the Driver blocks to enable the simulation.

0BValve C_VALVE
Valve active
When the valve is active, the position 2 will be reached. With parameter RI1A=1 the position 1
will be reached when the valve is active.
Please pay attention to the following signal assignments.
Parameter RI1A=0 direction 2 is active (pre setting)
Automatic
Parameter VBFE
automatic start
Parameter VBFA
automatic stop
VBE
Output contactor
limit position switch

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
button direction 2
button direction 1
VBE
Output contactor

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
-----
pressed
pressed
----
Single start from faceplate
Start / Stop with local buttons

Parameter VCL
Local button open
Parameter VOP
Local button close
VBE
Output contactor

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
Please note that the push button for the non-active mode must be an normal-close contact.
Parameter (VCL)
Parameter RI1A=1 direction 1 is active

Automatic
Parameter VBFE
automatic start
Parameter VBFA
automatic stop
VBE
Output contactor

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
button direction 2
button direction 1
VBE
Output contactor

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
----
pressed
pressed
----
Single start from faceplate
Start / Stop with local buttons

Parameter VCL
Local button open
Parameter VOP
Local button close
VBE
Output contactor

direction 1 closed

direction 2 opened
Please note that the push button for the non-active mode must be an normal-close contact.
Parameter (VOP)

0BValve C_VALVE
Limit position switches

If the valve has 2 limit position switches the parameters VKR1 and VKR2 have to be 0-signal. In
this case the positions are monitored.
If the valve has no limit position switches the parameters VKR1 and VKR2 have to be 1-signal.
In this case the logic signals (VVS1 / VVS2) will be set after the run-time monitoring time
RTMONTIM is elapsed. If the monitoring time is set to 0, the logic signals will be set directly
with the output contactor (VBE).
VBE
VVS1
RTMONTIM
RTMONTIM
VVS2
If the run-time monitoring time (RTMONTIM=0)
VBE
VVS1
VVS2
In case of a single limit position switch, parameter VKR1 and VKR2 can only be used if the nonactivated limit position switch is missing. The limit switch for the active direction must be
available.
-
In case direction 2 is the "active" direction (parameter RI1A = 0), the limit switch for direction
2 must be available.
If the limit position switch 1 is not available you have to set the parameter VKR1 to 1-Signal
(no limit switch for direction 1).
In case direction 1 is the "active" direction (parameter RI1A = 1), the limit switch for direction
1 must be available.
If the limit position switch 2 is not available you have to set the parameter VKR2 to 1-Signal
(no limit switch for direction 2).

0BValve C_VALVE
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
VE1
Limit position 1
The VE1 parameter is used to monitor the "close" limit position of the valve. A 1-signal at VE1
means that the "close" limit position has been reached.
VE2
Limit position 2
The VE2 parameter is used to monitor the "open" limit position of the valve. A 1-signal at VE2
means that the "close" limit position has been reached.
VSB
The VSB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the valve. The electrical
availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode and results in a shut down
with an alarm.
VVO
Local switch
The VVO parameter is used for connecting the local switch of the valve. VVO = 1-signal means
Automatic position and VVO = 0-signal means Local position. No alarm signal occurs in the
control room in local mode.
In position Local (VVO = 0-signal) the valve can be opened via VOP and closed via VCL.
VCL
Local direction 1
The VCL parameter is used to close the valve in local mode.
VOP
Local direction 2
The VOP parameter is used to open the valve in local mode.
When direction 2 is active, (parameter RI1A=0 pre setting) then parameter VCL is an normal
close contact. That means the valve will be closed with 0-signal at VCL. The valve will be
opened with 1-signal at VOP.
When direction 1 is active, (parameter RI1A=1) then parameter VOP is an normal close contact.
That means the valve will be opened with 0-signal at VOP. The valve will be closed with 1-signal
at VCL.
Caution: The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the limit position is reached.
For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.

0BValve C_VALVE
Input interfaces
VEVG
Start interlock
The valve can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has
1-signal. 0-signal at interface VEVG prevents the start. In local mode the start interlock is not
effective.
VBVG
Operating interlock
The valve can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock
has 1-signal. 0-signal at interface VBVG prevents the start or switches off the valve. In local
Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running can the valve be opened. As soon as
the upstream drive fails the valve must close as well.
For this, interface VBVG must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The
start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both, drive and valve. As soon as the
upstream drive is running the operating interlock of the valve has 1-signal and the valve is also
started.
VSVG
All signals which indicate a valve fault and which are not monitored by the valve module as per
standard must be connected to the protection interlock. 1-signal means status OK, 0-signal
means faulty.
Interface VSVG is effective for all operating modes of the valve.
Caution: When the valve is switched off via VSVG the valve module does not generate an
alarm message. There is no summarizing fault indication at the group and the protection
interlock is not shown in the status call.
For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protection
interlock one must use the output MAU of the associated annunciation module and not the input
signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
VSPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface VSPO resets the output of the valve without resetting of the command
memory VKS. The valve remains activated and the output is automatically set again with
1-Signal at this interface. To stop the valve completely 1-Signal at VBFA or 0-Signal at VBVG is
required. If the valve is stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group.
This interface is effective in automatic mode only.
When VSPO has 0-signal and an activated valve in single mode or local mode is switched back
into the automatic mode it will be deactivated (VBE=0).

0BValve C_VALVE
NSTP_L_A
This parameter is foreseen for different project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no
stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode if the interlocking
Cemat Development.
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
created.
VLOC
Local mode release
A 1-signal at this interface releases the valve for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the valve
can be opened/closed via inputs VOP and VCL. The operation mode is changed by the
associated group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed
on to the drive module by connecting interface VLOC with signal GLO of the associated group.
In local mode operation via the PLC only protection interlock VSVG is effective. The status of
interfaces VEVG and VBVG is not effective in local mode.
VEIZ
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the valve, i.e. the valve can be
started and stopped individually from the central control room. The operating modes are
changed by the associated group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES.
This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface VEIZ with signal
GES of the associated group.
In single-start mode all interlocks of the valve are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn
VSTB
Stand-by mode
A 1-Signal at interface VSTB means that the valve is in stand-by mode. In this mode the valve is
monitored for availability. If a fault occurs in stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
RI1A
Normal open valve (direction 1 active)
In case of a normally open valve, the controlled (active) direction is direction 1 instead of
direction 2. In this case Parameter RI1A has to be set to 1-Signal.
Please also see the description under "Valve active" and "Limit Position Switches".
VKR1
No feedback contact 1
The way of working is depending on the limit switches of the valve and which direction is active.
For details see chapter Limit position switches
10

VKR2
0BValve C_VALVE
The way of working is depending on the limit switches of the valve and which direction is active.
For details see chapter Limit position switches
VMFR

would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this, one should connect the control
voltage signal to the annunciation release interface of the appropriate modules. This causes no
alarms to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation
VMZS
A 1-signal on VMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the
status call the valve fault can still be seen.
VLPZ
Caution: Using VLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
VQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and one
wants to acknowledge separately one connects the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse)
to this interface.
Caution: Using VQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
VBFE
Command ON
Interface to start the valve in automatic mode. With 1-signal the valve is started. The interface is
normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the
associated route(s).
The start is initiated either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process
values).
Caution: Interface VBFE should not be connected with a continuous signal as a valve fault can
then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required one must take care that the VBFE
has signal zero in case of a fault.

11
0BValve C_VALVE
VBFA
Command OFF
Interface to switch off the valve in automatic mode. With 1-signal the valve is switched off. The
through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s). The switch off is either immediately
or delayed according to the set stop delay time (process values).
QSTP
Quick stop
stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate deenergizing of the valve in automatic mode (interface VBFA may have a delaying effect).
DSIG_BQ
the Faceplate of the valve.
Bei Benutzung des SIMOCODE Adapter-Bausteins:

REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
the faceplate of the drive an additional button appears which allows to open the SIMOCODE
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Default: 0
Format BYTE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter of the
adapter block "C_SIMOS".
Additional one has to enable this function with 1-signal at parameter "REL_SC".
Zur Anpassung der Anzeigen im Diagnosebild:
STA2_B10

12

0BValve C_VALVE

GFSO
Call.
GR_LINK1.

13
0BValve C_VALVE
Links
The fault of the valve is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated
To ensure this function, every valve must be connected with at least one route or a group to
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the valve must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route
GR_LINK2
If the valve belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be
MUX_LINK
If the valve belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be
valve.
14

0BValve C_VALVE
Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Valve1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
V_VALVE
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO

15
0BValve C_VALVE
Process values
RTMONTIM
Run-time monitoring
Default: 5

Value in seconds.
The valve module checks whether the required limit position has been reached within the set
time. If the time is exceeded the valve module signals a run time fault. This time must be
adjusted according to the true valve run time. The set time is valid for both directions (open and
close).
LSMONTIM
Default: 2

Value in seconds.
The limit position switches are monitored. If a limit position gets lost without any command the
valve will be switched off and an alarm is generated. This monitoring function is delayed by the
time of LSMONTIM.
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
In automatic mode the triggering of the valve is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In
single-start mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
The stopping of the valve via interface VBFA is delayed by the set time.
HORN_TIM
Default: 10

Value in seconds.
When the valve is triggered in single-start mode a horn bit (module output) is set for the duration
of the set time and the start of the valve is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to trigger a
start-up warning.
16

0BValve C_VALVE

MAI_INT
Format DWORD
MAI_REQL

17
0BValve C_VALVE
Output interfaces
VVS1
Logic signal
A 1-signal means Valve in limit position 1.

The logic signal is mainly used for interlocking with other drives and as a feedback for the route
or the group.
VVS2
Logic signal
A 1-signal means "Valve in limit position 2.

The logic signal is mainly used for interlocking with other drives and as a feedback for the route
or the group.
VST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs during the triggering of the valve or in stand-by mode the dynamic fault bit
is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged.
Caution: In following cases the valve fault cannot be acknowledged.

- If the ON command is constantly present;
- if the valve is not in limit position 1
(corresponds to welded contactor in E-module)
SST
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set for a given time period during the starting of the valve in single-start mode and
VVSP
Logic signal for sporadic valves
A 1-signal means valve has received a command to open in automatic mode or in single start
mode (Command Memory is ON). The valve is opened when the interface VSPO has 1-Signal.
The VVSP-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
of the valve can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver block in order to switch all driver blocks
to simulation mode.
18

0BValve C_VALVE

MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
alarm.
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm

RS_LINK
drive block.
GR_LINK
Group link
RS_GFSO

19
0BValve C_VALVE
Hardware outputs
VBE
Command ON
The VBE signal is used to trigger the valve.
VL1
Position/fault lamp
The position/fault lamp VL1 indicates the status of the valve and can be used for the connection
of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present).
A continuous 1-signal indicates that the valve is fault-free and has reached the limit position 1
(closed). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing
indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
VL2
Position/fault lamp
The position/fault lamp VL2 indicates the status of the valve and can be used for the connection
of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present).
A continuous 1-signal indicates that the valve is fault-free and has reached the limit position 2
(open). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates
a static fault (already acknowledged).
20

0BValve C_VALVE
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
The test interfaces are used for module development and must not be changed!
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Reset time Number of movements for OS
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Number of movements for OS
Interface to OS
RT_H
Number of movements refresh. Every hour
Interface to MIS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
VISU_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word 1
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status word 2
Interface to OS
DLY_CNT
Interface to OS
MAI_CNT
Interface to OS
CNT_TRIP
Interface to OS

21
0BValve C_VALVE
FT_DUR
Interface to OS
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
Interface to OS
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
Interface to OS
RS_JOB
RS Job Number

RS_NAME
RS Name

RS_MAT
RS Material Name

22

0BValve C_VALVE
group


23
0BValve C_VALVE
Module states
Variable VISU_OS:
No.
Status / Text Display
Symbol Display
Text Presentation
limit position 1
Gray
Black, white
Blinking gray
Black, white
limit position 2
Green
Black, green
Blinking green
Black, green
Blinking red
White, red
fault acknowledged
Red
White, red
Yellow
Black, yellow
local mode
Blinking yellow
Black, yellow
Yellow
Black, yellow
10
local mode
Blinking yellow
Black, yellow
11
Blue
Black, blue
12
single mode
Blinking blue
Black, blue
13
Blue
Black, blue
14
single mode
Blinking blue
Black, blue
19
limit position 1
Green
Black, green
20
Blinking green
Black, green
21
limit position 2
Gray
Black, white
22
Blinking gray
Black, white
23
Blinking red
White, red
24
fault acknowledged
Red
White, red
See also OS variables table
Note: The status 19 until 24 are used when direction 1 is activ.
Commands
24

0BValve C_VALVE
I/O-bar of C_VALVE
C_VALVE
Format
Default
Typ
e
Limit position 1
BOOL
VE2
Limit position 2
BOOL
VSB
Electrical readiness
BOOL
VVO
Local switch
BOOL
VCL
Local direction 1
BOOL
VOP
Local direction 2
BOOL
VEVG
Start interlock
BOOL
VBVG
Operating interlock
BOOL
VSVG
BOOL
VSPO
Sporadic on/off
BOOL
VLOC
Local mode release
BOOL
VEIZ
BOOL
VSTB
Stand-by mode
BOOL
RI1A
Direction 1 is active
BOOL
VKR1
BOOL
VKR2
BOOL
VMFR
BOOL
VMZS
BOOL
VLPZ
BOOL
VQIT
BOOL
VBFE
Command ON
BOOL
VBFA
Command OFF
BOOL
QSTP
Quick stop
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
BOOL
STA2_B10

STATUS 2
BOOL
Element
Meaning
VE1

Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
25
0BValve C_VALVE
26

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B12

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B13

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B14

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B15

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B16

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B17

STATUS 2
BOOL
NSTP_L_A

local auto
BOOL
LST_ACT

automatic mode
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
BYTE
B#16#0
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
RTMONTIM
Element
Meaning
STA2_B11
DWORD DW#16#0
HMI
WORD
W#16#0
Run-time monitoring
INT
10
STARTDEL
Start delay
INT
STOPDEL
Stop delay
INT
HORN_TIM
INT
10
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
MAI_INT
DWORD DW#16#0
MAI_REQL
DWORD DW#16#0
RES_RTOS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS

OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
Permitted
Values

0BValve C_VALVE
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
Maintenance Actual
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
CNT_TRIP
Maintenance
Counter for Trips
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
FT_DUR
Maintenance
Fault time duration
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_STA
Maintenance Status
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
MAI_X
Maintenance Spare
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_OS_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
RT_H_O
Run-time for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
INTFC_OS
DWORD DW#16#0
VISU_OS
STATUS
Element
Meaning
Format
RT_H

OS
MAI_CNT
Default
BYTE
B#16#0
Status word 1
DWORD
W#16#0
STATUS2
Status word 2
DWORD
W#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
DWORD DW#16#0
VVS1
Logic signal 1
BOOL
VVS2
Logic signal 2
BOOL
VST
Dynamic fault
BOOL
SST
Group fault
BOOL
HORN
Start-up horn
BOOL
VVSP
Logic signal sporadic valve
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation on (Driver)
BOOL
VBE
Command ON
BOOL
VL1
Position/fault lamp
BOOL
VL2
Position/fault lamp
BOOL
MAI_REQ
Maintenance Request
BOOL
MAI_AL
Maintenance Alarm
BOOL

Permitted
Values
27
0BValve C_VALVE
28

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
Count down
active)
INT
RS_LINK

Module/ STATUS
DWORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
INT
INT
Element
Meaning
DLY_CNT
HMI
Permitted
Values
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number
STRING
(12)
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK

(from C_RSM)
INT
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL

S7-Par-Name
OFF
ON
R_RTOS
0 AUS
1 EIN
2 Anzahl Operationen lschen
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Commandword
Bezeichnung deutsch
OFF
ON
Reset No of Operations OS
Commandword
Bezeichnung englisch
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
COMMAND
Beleg.
OS variables table
OS-Var
Ausgabeebene
O
Typ
I/O
Werte
bereich
16Bit
Ereignistext
Strungsklasse
Meldeklasse
Dimension
Darstellung
Anz./NK
29
0BValve C_VALVE
VVO
RMF
VSV
LST
LP
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
30
16
17
18
19
VVSP
20
21
ON_DLY 22
OFF_DLY 23
SQT
SST
BQU
Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Rckmeldung
Strung Vorort Stop
Strung Endlage
Sequence test
general fault
Running Signal sporadic valve
ON delay
OFF delay
Verknpfungssignal sporadisch
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Local switch fault

Feedback fault
Fault local stop
Limit position fault
Sequenz Test
Sammelstrung
Signal Strung
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 Strung SIMOCODE
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
FT_SC
VSB
STA_B30
VKS
Command memory
Kommandospeicher
Local mode released

Limit Position 1
Limit Position 2
Status
Status
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Freigabe Vorort
Endlage 1
Endlage 2
LOC
EIZ
VVS1
VVS2
HORN
VST
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
S,O
STATUS
0BValve C_VALVE
16Bit

Bitmap
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
verbunden mit Parameter

connected to parameter
Enable SIMOCODE
General Warning SIMOCODE
Limit Position 1
Limit Position 2
El. Availability
Local Switch
Local Start Direction 1
Local Start Direction 2
Command ON / OFF
Status
20
21
22
23
19 Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
LST_AC
T
16 Freigabe SIMOCODE
17 Warnung SIMOCODE
18
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
REL_SC
WA_SC
STA2_B30
Status
Endlage 1
Endlage 2
Schaltbereitschaft
Vorortschalter
Befehl Ein
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
VE1
VE2
VSB
VVO
VCL
VOP
VBE
STATUS2
S,O
16Bit
31
0BValve C_VALVE
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG7
SIG8
32
MAI_CNT
MAI_INT
MAI_ALL
RT_H
RT_OS
RES_RTOS
RTMONTIM
STARTDEL
HORN_TIM
STOPDEL
SIG1
ALA_VVO
ALA_RMF
ALA_LST
ALA_B24
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_REP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Vorort Endlage 2
Vorort fhrt Richtung 2
Einzelbetrieb fhrt Richtung 1
Einzelbetrieb fhrt Richtung 2
9
10
11
12
13
14
Run time supervision

start delay
stop delay
Reset time for No. Of operations
for OS
No. of operations for OS
No. of operations for OS refreshed
every h
hours or starts
Resetzeit Anzahl Bewegungen fr

OS
akt. Je Stunde
Still Faulty
Laufzeitberwachung
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Local switch fault

Feedback fault
local stop
Limit Position fault
Alarm


limit position 1
limit position 2
fault acknowledged
M
M
D
D
D
D
S,O
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxxx
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Dword
DWord
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-9999
Byte
S
M
S
M
OM
OM
OM
OM
VSB
RTMONTIM
STARTDEL
HORN_TIM
STOPDEL
REP
VVO
RMF
LST
LP
ALF P
ALF
ALF
ALF
ALF
ALF E
xxxxx
Datum/U
hr
xxxxxx
Strung elektrische
Schaltbereitschaft
Strung Vorort
Strung Rckmeldung
Vorort Stop
Strung Endlage
Alarm

Endlage 1
Fhrt Richtung 1
Endlage 2
Fhrt Richtung 2
Strung nicht QT
Strung QT
Vorort Endlage 1
Vorort fhrt Richtung 1
dezimal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALA_VSB
ALARM
VISU_OS
0BValve C_VALVE
Status Alarm (Intervall berschr.))

Status Anforderung
9
10 Status luft (MT on)
11
12
13
14
15
16 Bedienanforderng
17 Bedienung
18 Bedineung ausgefhrt
Bedienung Temp
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MAI_STA_B30
MAI_STA_B20
MAI_STA_B21
MAI_STA_B22
MAI_STA_B10
MAI_STA_B11
MAI_STA_B12
MAI_STA_B13
MAI_STA_B14
MAI_STA_B15
MAI_STA_B16
MAI_STA_B17
Maintenance Reserve
Maintenance Spare
Operation Request
Operation Completed
Opartation Temp

Exceeded))
MAI_X
MAI_STA_B24
MAI_STA_B25
MAI_STA_B26
MAI_STA_B27
MAI_STA_B23
MAI_STA_B32
MAI_STA_B33
MAI_STA_B34
MAI_STA_B35
MAI_STA_B36
MAI_STA_B37
MAI_STA_B31
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAI_STA_B42
MAI_STA_B43
MAI_STA_B44
MAI_STA_B45
MAI_STA_B46
MAI_STA_B47

Maintenance: Fault time duration
in s
Maintenance Status
Maintenance interval: Operating
hour
Maintenance Kommando Start

Maintenance Command: start
Maintenance Komando Stop/Reset Maintenance Command: stop/reset
MAI_STA
MAI_STA_B41
Maintenance Status
Betriebsstunden
Maintenance: Strungsdauer in s
FT_DUR
MAI_STA_B40
CNT_TRIP
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
33
0BValve C_VALVE
RS Name
RS Materialkennung
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
34
RS Auftragsnummer
RS_JOB
RS_LINK / Stautus
INT
RS_LINK
DLY_CNT
0BValve C_VALVE
RS Material
RS Name
RS JOB Number
RS_LINK / Status

are active
S,O
S,O
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)

INT
QSTP
VBFE
VBFA
VQIT
VLPZ
VMFR
VMZS
RI1A
VKR1
VKR2
VLOC
VEIZ
VSTB
Richtung 1 ist aktiv

Kein Rckmeldekontakt 1
Kein Rckmeldekontakt 2
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Schnellstop
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Quittieren (Zusatz)
16
17 Meldefreigabe
19
20
21
22
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Quick stop
Command ON
Command OFF
Direction 1 is active
no feedback contact 1
no feedback contact 2
Local mode release

Stand-by mode
Sporadic ON/OFF
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Interfaceword
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
Sporadisch Ein/Aus
Schutzverriegelung
VSPO
Nahtstellenwort
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
VEVG
VBVG
VSVG
INTFC_OS
D
Bit
32Bit
35
0BValve C_VALVE
0BValve C_VALVE

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
signal
RS_LINK /Status
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Process signal
Status = RS Command
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
OP_COND
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
36
Format
DWORD
WORD

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Designation German
0BValve C_VALVE
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD

RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM

INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL
37
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
SIMOCODE Adapter C_SIMOS
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BSIMOCODE Adapter C_SIMOS
SIMOCODE ADAPTER C_SIMOS
Description of C_SIMOS
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Interface between block C_SIMOS and SIMOCODE Device
Basic Type 2, cyclic Signaling data
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
Engineering
Settings and Configuration for SIMOCODE
AS
Naming conventions in CFC
Example: C_DRV_2D with C_SIMOS
Using the SIMOCODE blocks from SIMOCODE PCS7 library
Example: C_DRV_1D with SMC_REV
OS
Group Display and Loop in Alarm
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
10
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
15
16
16
OS Runtime
17
I/O-bar of C_SIMOS
19
OS variables table
21

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_SIMOS_009.doc
Description of C_SIMOS
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_SIMOS
FB1034
Calling OBs
C_SIMOS must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The SIMOCODE Adapter block C_SIMOS is similar to C_SIMO_A and can be used to establish
a connection between the CEMAT blocks and the SIMOCODE. Due to the modular concept the
SIMOCODE Adapter block can be used for unidirectional drives, bi-directional drives, valves
and dampers.
The 4 input signals of the SIMOCODE will be transferred to a block output and can be used
individually (e. g. for Local Switch or ESB).
Additionally to the functions of C_SIMO_A, with C_SIMOS the Motor Power can be displayed.
The current value in % and the Power are shown in a curve window. The process parameters
for current limits have been removed and are not evaluated any more.
Basic type 1 and 2 are supported.

- Basic type 1: (12 bytes read and 4 byte write)
(with Current- and Power Value)
- Basic type 2: (4 bytes read and 4 byte write)
(with Current Value)
The SIMOCODE adapter block is open (no KNOW_HOW_PROTECT) and you can modify the
block according to your requirements.
Important: In general, no warranty can be given for changes of the block, because this is
entirely the responsibility of the user. It is always recommended to make a backup of the block
before proceeding.

Interface between block C_SIMOS and SIMOCODE Device

Basic Type 2,
cyclic Signaling data
Read Byte 0
Bit
Signal
0.0 Status On1

0.1 Status Off
0.2 Status On2
0.3 Overload fault
0.4 Overload and asymmetry fault
0.5 Motor stalled
0.6 Status General fault
0.7 Status General warning
Read Byte 1
Bit
Signal
1.0 Status Ready, Device ok.

1.1 Overload >115% warning
1.2 Intern Earth fault
1.3 Unbalance
1.4 Basic Unit Input 4
Read Byte 2/ 3 current I max.
Additional for Basic Type 1

Read Byte 4/5 Active Power (High-Word)
Read Byte 6/7 Active Power (Low-Word)
Write Control Byte 0

Bit
SIMOCODE
Reference
Signal
On 1
Off
On 2
Not used
Emergency start
Automatic
Reset
CPU-OK
Write bytes 1, 2, 3 are not used

Operating principle
Hardware inputs
BASICTYP
Basic type
Basic state = 2
SIMOCODE Communication Type

Type 2:
Type 1:
only status and current

status, current and power
If no valid value is entered to this interface, all outputs will be reset, the block is no longer
processed and the output PARAM_FT is set to 1-Signal (Parameter failure).
I_ADDR
Input start address
SIMOCODE Input start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)
O_ADDR
Output start address
SIMOCODE Output start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)

Input interfaces
START1
Start in Direction 1
1-Signal at Interface START1 starts the drive into direction 1. The output EBE/EBE1/KB1 of the
drive block has to be connected to this input.
START2
If START1=0 and START2=0, the drive will be stopped.
RESET
Reset SIMOCODE von extern
The SIMOCODE fault can be reset via Faceplate or using the interface RESET.
With 1-Signal at interface RESET the Reset Signal will be sent to the SIMOCODE.
ACK
Acknowledge from extern
Used only with conventional control desks. If one has several separate control desks and wants
to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be
connected to this interface. Application in control desk engineering.
Caution: Using ACK the PLC-wide Acknowledgement at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
RES_PBFT
Automatic Reset after PROFIBUS fault
After PROFIBUS communication fault, all SIMOCODE have a General fault and need to be
reset.
If this parameter is connected with 1-Signal, after PROFIBUS communication fault the
SIMOCODE will automatically get a reset command.
Caution: All drives which are started without external start command (as for example
Positioners) should not have a 1-Signal at RES_PBFT.

Output interfaces
I_PERC
Current value in %
Format INT
This output has to be connected to input MV_PERC of the corresponding drive. See Example
CFC. The current value in % is displayed in the SIMOCODE Faceplate and in the Curve.
POWER
Power in kW (only for basic type 1)
Format REAL
The Power value in kW is only available for Basic type 1. The power value is displayed in the
SIMOCODE faceplate an in the Curve.
READY
SIMOCODE Ready
1-Signal means the communication to the SIMOCODE is ok.
FAULT_SC
General Fault SIMOCODE
1-Signal means general fault at the SIMOCODE. After correction of the fault the Reset Button
must be pressed.
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
After correction of the fault the Reset Button must be pressed
OV_FT
Overload fault
UNBALANC
Unbalance signaling
STALL_FT
Motor stalled
WARN_SC
Summarizing warning SIMOCODE
1-Signal means general warning at the SIMOCODE.
OV_WA
Overload warning
1-Signal means overload warning at the SIMOCODE.
OVASY_FT
Overload + asymmetry fault

STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Format BYTE
This output has to be connected to input STAT_SC of the corresponding drive. See Example
CFC.
INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 1
INPUT1_0 corresponds to the Hardware-Input 1 at the SIMOCODE Basic Unit (e. g. ESB),
which has been transferred into the status word. The status of the HW Input is available at
INPUT1_O and can be connected to the CEMAT drive block.
INPUT2_O
Basic Unit Input 2
See INPUT1_O
INPUT3_O
Basic Unit Input 3
See INPUT1_O
INPUT4_O
Basic Unit Input 4
See INPUT1_O
FEED_ON1
This signal must be connected to the corresponding Input of the drive block.
For
C_DRV_2D
with
Feedback direction 1
FEED_ON2
For
C_DRV_1D
with
Feedback ON
For
C_DRV_2D
with
PARAM_FT
Parameter Fault
1-Signal means, the value for BASICTYP is neither 1 nor 2, or I_ADDR, O_ADDR contain a
negative address.

Interfaces to OS
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word
Interface to OS
10

The run sequence can be chosen as desired for the SIMOS module.
The alarms will be generated according to the Status bytes 0 and 1.
In case of a warning only a summarizing alarm is generated.
Commands

11
Engineering
For the SIMOCODE_PRO 3UF70 you need the SIMOCODE ES 2007 software.
After the installation of CEMAT you will find under D:\Cemat_CS\Tools\SIMOCODE some
example SIMOCODE files and descriptions. With these parameter settings the block C_SIMOS
was tested.

-
Basic type 1: (12 bytes read and 4 byte write)
(with Current- and Power Value)
Basic type 2: (4 bytes read and 4 byte write)
(with Current Value)
For all further information refer to SIMOCODE Manual.
12

AS
The SIMOCODE Adapter block (C_SIMOS) must have the same tagname as the corresponding
drive plus the appendix "_SC"
Example:
A motor has the following tagname:
312_SC/M01
The chart name is as follows:
312_SC1
The instance name for the motor is:
M01
The instance name for the SIMOCODE Adapter must be:
M01_SC

13
Example: C_DRV_2D with C_SIMOS
14

Using the SIMOCODE blocks from SIMOCODE PCS7 library

The SIMOCODE Adapter block C_SIMOS reads only the cyclic data from the SIMOCODE.
If additional information from SIMOCODE is needed, such as measurement or statistic values,
the SIMOCODE AS Modules and faceplates have to be used.
In this case you have to install the Software PCS7 SIMOCODE pro V7. The library contains
drive functions as well as additional blocks for measurement and statistic values.
Depending on the desired functions place the SIMOCODE Blocks into the CFC and connect it
with the CEMAT drive blocks.
Example: C_DRV_1D with SMC_REV
For further information please refer the SIMOCODE library documentation.

15
OS
The symbols for drives, dampers or valves are shown in the flow mimics only. In case of a fault
the symbol turns to red. In order to achieve the actualization of the Group display and to use the
Loop in Alarm function, you have to create a block icon for the SIMOCODE Adapter block. The
block icon of the C_SIMOS consists of a group display only.
Place this block icon next to the drive symbol. The default status is invisible. In case of a
warning or a fault the status turns to visible.
16

OS Runtime
Double-click on the block icon to
open the Drive Faceplate
To call up the SIMOCODE Adapter Faceplate from a

Drive Faceplate press button Simocode
Depending on the BASICTYP the Power value will be

shown.
With the Reset SIMOCODE button you have to
acknowledge the SIMOCODE faults in case there is no
automatic reset parameterized on SIMOCODE.

17
The diagnosis dialog shows the status, faults and warning Information.
The button A/P and E-Start are locked with user right 23 = System operations
In the Curve dialog are shown the Current in % and active Power in kW.
18

I/O-bar of C_SIMOS
C_SIMOS
Format
Default
Typ
e
Element
Meaning
BASICTYP
Basic type
(2 = standard, 1 = with temp.)
INT
I_ADDR
Input start address
INT
O_ADDR
INT
START1
ON1 to SIMOCODE
(Start direction 1)
BOOL
START2
ON2 to SIMOCODE
(Start Direction 2=
BOOL
RESET
Reset SIMOCODE from

external
BOOL
ACK
Acknowledge from external
BOOL
RES_PBFT
Auto-reset after PROFIBUS

fault or PLC start
BOOL
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
STATUS
Status word
I_PERC
Current in %
POWER
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
INT
Active Power in kW
(Basic Type 1 only)
REAL
0.0
READY
SIMOCODE ready
(Communication OK)
BOOL
FAULT_SC
BOOL
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
BOOL
OV_FT
Overload fault
BOOL
UNBALANC
Unbalance
BOOL
STALL_FT
Motor stalled
BOOL
WARN_SC
General warning SIMOCODE
BOOL
OV_WA
Overload warning
BOOL
OVASY_FT
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE (for

connection to drive)
BYTE
B#16#0
INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 1
BOOL

HMIK
Permitted
Values
+
+
19
20

Format
Default
Typ
e
Element
Meaning
INPUT2_O
Basic Unit Input 2
BOOL
INPUT3_O
Basic Unit Input 3
BOOL
INPUT4_O
Basic Unit Input 4
BOOL
FEED_ON1
BOOL
FEED_ON2
BOOL
PARAM_FT
Parameter failure
(engineering failure)
BOOL
Attr.
HMIK
Permitted
Values

Ready
Overload warning
Earth fault
Unbalance
Basic unit Input4
Basic unit Input3
Basic unit Input2
Basic unit Input1
Status
Local automatic coder

Emergency start
Reset SIMOCODE
Commandword
Designation English
Status
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ready
berlast Warnung
Erdschlu Strung
Unbalance
Grundgert Eingang4
Grundgert Eingang1
Grundgert Eingang3
Grundgert Eingang2
READY
OV_WA
EARTH_FT
UNBALANC
BU_IN4
BU_IN3
BU_IN2
BU_IN1
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
StatusWord
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Automatic / Vorort
Notstart
Reset SIMOCODE
Auto_Loc
EM_ START
RESET
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Designation German
CommandWord
S7-Par-Name
Assignment.
OS variables table
OS-Var. No.
Output Level
S,O
Presentation
Number NK
Bit
Bit
Type
O
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
16Bit
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
21
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
22
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
SQT
EM_START
Auto
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
P_BUS
OV_ASY_WA
STALL_FT
GEN_FT
GEN_WA
STA_B34
ON1
OFF
ON2
OV_FT
Assignment.
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
S7-Par-Name
OS-Var. No.
16
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
13
14
15
12
8
9
10
11
Keine Kommunikation
Sequenz Test
Notstart
Betriebsart Automatik
Ein Richtung 1
Aus
Ein Richtung 2
berlast Strung
berlast + Unsymmetrie
Warnung
Block. motor Strung
Sammelstrung
Sammelwarnung
Designation German
No Communication
Sequence test
Emergency Start
Automatic mode
Motor stalled fault

General fault
General warning
Overload+asymmetry fault.
On direction 1
Off
On direction 2
Overload fault
Designation English
Output Level
Presentation
Number NK
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Value
Range
Type
Event Text
Unit
Input start address

Basic type
Current in %
Alarm
Designation English
Eingangs Startadresse
Ausgangs Startadresse
Basistyp
Alarm
Designation German
I_ADDR
O_ADDR
BASICTYPE
Assignment.
Strom in %
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OS-Var. No.
I_PERC
ALA_SIG1
ALA_SIG2
ALA_SIG3
ALA_SIG4
ALA_SIG5
ALA_SIG6
ALA_SIG7
ALA_SIG8
AlarmWord
S7-Par-Name
Presentation
Number NK
Output Level
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Value
Range
Type
Unit
23
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
SIMOCODE Adapter C_SIMO_A
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BSIMOCODE Adapter C_SIMO_A
SIMOCODE ADAPTER C_SIMO_A
Description of C_SIMO_A
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Interface between block C_SIMO_A and SIMOCODE Unit
Basic Type 2
Operating principle
Hardware Inputs and Outputs
Input interfaces
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
AS
Example: C_DRV_2D with SIMOCODE
OS
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
9
11
12
12
12
13
14
14
15
16
16
I/O-bar of C_SIMO_A
17
OS variables table
19

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_SIMO_A_009.doc
Description of C_SIMO_A
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_SIMO_A
FB1033
Calling OBs
C_SELECT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The SIMOCODE Adapter block C_SIMO_A can be used to establish a connection between the
CEMAT drive block and the SIMOCODE. Due to the modular concept the SIMOCODE Adapter
block can be used for One-directional drives, Bi-directional drives, valves and dampers.
The 4 input signals of the SIMOCODE will be transferred to a block output and can be used
individually (e. g. for Local Switch or ESB).

-
Basic type 1 :(12 byte read and 4 byte write)
The SIMOCODE adapter block is open (no KNOW_HOW_PROTECT) and you can modify the
block according to your requirements.
Important: In general, no warranty can be given for changes of the block, because this is
entirely the responsibility of the user. It is always recommended to make a backup of the block
before proceeding.

Interface between block C_SIMO_A and SIMOCODE Unit

Basic Type 2
Read Byte 0
Bit
SIMOCODE
Reference
Signal
[144]
Status On1
[199]
Thermistor fault (BasicType 2)
[146]
Status On2
[193]
Overload fault
[186]
Overload and asymmetry warning
[202]
Motor stalled
[150]
Status General fault
[151]
Status General warning
Read Byte 1
Bit
SIMOCODE
Reference
Signal
[152]
Status Ready
[147]
Status Overload warning
[192]
Earth fault
[194]
Overload fault
[003]
Basic Unit Input 4
[000]
Basic Unit Input 1
[002]
Basic Unit Input 3
[001]
Basic Unit Input 2
Read Byte 2 and 3 Motor current

Additional for Basic Type 1
Read Byte 11 and 12 Thermistor Value
Write Control Byte 0

Bit
SIMOCODE
Reference
Signal
On 1
Off
On 2
Not used
Emergency start
Automatic
Reset
CPU-OK
Write control byte 1, 2, 3 are not used

Operating principle
Hardware Inputs and Outputs
BASICTYP
Basic type
Basic state = 2
SIMOCODE Communication Type

Type 2:
4 byte read and 4 byte write (Standard)
Type 1:
12 byte read and 4 byte write.

CEMAT uses additionally byte 11 and 12 for the Thermistor Value.
processed and the output QPARF is set to 1-Signal (Parameter failure).
I_ADDR
Input start address
SIMOCODE Input start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)
O_ADDR
SIMOCODE Output start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)

Input interfaces
START1
START2
If START1=0 and START2=0, the drive will be stopped.
RESET
Reset SIMOCODE von extern
The SIMOCODE fault can be reset via Faceplate or using interface RESET.
With 1-Signal at interface RESET the Reset Signal will be sent to the SIMOCODE.
ACK
Acknowledge from extern
Used only with conventional control desks. If one has several separate control desks and wants
to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be
connected to this interface. Application in control desk engineering.
Caution: Using ACK the PLC-wide Acknowledgement at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
RES_PBFT
Automatic Reset after PROFIBUS fault
After PROFIBUS communication fault, all SIMOCODE have a General fault and need to be
reset.
If this parameter is connected with 1-Signal, after PROFIBUS communication fault the
SIMOCODE will automatically get a reset command.
Caution: All drives which are started without external start command (as for example
Positioners) should not have a 1-Signal at RES_PBFT.

Process values
I_N
Nominal Current in Ampere (Set Current)
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
At this parameter the nominal current must be entered. The value must be in accordance with
the SIMOCODE parameterization.
CUR_HIGH
Current high limit in %
Default: 400

The value must be in accordance with the SIMOCODE parameterization.
CUR_LOW
Current low limit in %
Default: 20

The value must be in accordance with the SIMOCODE parameterization.
HYSTERES
Hysteresis in %.
Default: 5
Hysteresis value for current limits.
OVWA_DLY
Delay for overload warning (s)
Default: 3

Value in seconds. The warning will be delayed by this time.
TERM_FAC
Factor for Thermistor value
Default: 5
Factor for the calculation of the temperature based on the thermistor value.

Output interfaces
I_PERC
Current value in %
This output has to be connected to input MV_PERC of the corresponding drive. See Example
CFC. The current value in % is shown in the drive faceplate.
READY
SIMOCODE Ready
1-Signal means the communication to the SIMOCODE is ok.
FAULT_SC
General Fault SIMOCODE
1-Signal means general fault at the SIMOCODE. After correction of the fault the Reset Button
must be pressed.
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
OV_FT
Overload fault
OVASY_FT
THER_FT
Thermistor fault
STALL_FT
Motor stalled
WARN_SC
Summarizing warning SIMOCODE
1-Signal general warning at the SIMOCODE.
OV_WA
Overload warning
1-Signal means overload warning
OVASY_WA
Overload + asymmetry warning
1-Signal means overload + asymmetry warning.

CUR_L_WA
Current low warning
This warning is initiated if the current value (I_PERC) is smaller than the value at parameter
CUR_LOW
CUR_H_WA
Current high warning
This warning is initiated if the current value (I_PERC) is bigger than the value at parameter
CUR_HIGH
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE
Format BYTE
This output has to be connected to input STAT_SC of the corresponding drive. See Example
CFC.
INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 1
INPUT1_0 corresponds to the Hardware-Input 1 at the SIMOCODE Basic Unit (e. g. ESB),
which has been transferred into the status word. The status of the HW Input is available at
INPUT1_O and can be connected to the CEMAT drive block.
INPUT2_O
Basic Unit Input 2
See INPUT1_O
INPUT3_O
Basic Unit Input 3
See INPUT1_O
INPUT4_O
Basic Unit Input 4
See INPUT1_O
FEED_ON1
For
C_DRV_2D
with
FEED_ON2
For
C_DRV_1D
with
Feedback ON
For
C_DRV_2D
with
PARAM_FT
Parameter Fault
1-Signal means, the value for BASICTYP is neither 1 nor 2, or I_ADDR, O_ADDR contain a
negative address.
10

Interfaces to OS
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word
Interface to OS
I_ABS
Current value Ampere
Interface to OS
THERMIST
Thermistor Temperature
Interface to OS

11
The run sequence can be chosen as desired for the selection module.
group

An annunciation release for each object insures that the communication and OS are not
The alarms will be generated according to the Status bytes 0 and 1.
In case of a warning only a summarizing alarm is generated.
Commands
12


All Parameter settings can be carried out with "Win-SIMOCODE DP Professional" for the unit
3UF50.
For the new unit SIMOCODE pro 3UF70 you need the SIMOCODE ES Professional software.
After the installation of CEMAT you will find under D:\Cemat_CS\ \SIMOCODE\C_SIMO_A
some Examples files. With this parameter settings the block C_SIMO_A was tested.

-
SIMOCODE Parameter settings:
For the 3UF50 unit

C_DRV_2D_BTYP1_SMC
Basic Type 1 with Thermistor
C_DRV_2D_BTYP2_SMC
Basic Type 2
For the new SIMOCODE pro 3UF70

C_DRV_2D_Typ2.SDP
Basic Type 2
For all further information refer to SIMOCODE Manual.

13
AS
The SIMOCODE Adapter block must have the same tagname as the corresponding drive plus
the appendix "_SC"
Example:
14
A motor has the following tagname:
312_SC/M01
The chart name is as follows:
312_SC1
The instance name for the motor is:
M01
The instance name for the SIMOCODE Adapter must be:
M01_SC

Example: C_DRV_2D with SIMOCODE

15
OS
The symbols for drives, dampers or valves are shown in the flow mimics only. In case of a fault
the symbol turns to red. In order to achieve the actualization of the Group display and to use the
Loop in Alarm function, you have to create a block icon for the SIMOCODE Adapter block. The
block icon of the C_SIMO_A consists of a group display only.
16

I/O-bar of C_SIMO_A
C_SIMO_A
Format
Default
Typ
e
Element
Meaning
BASICTYP
Basic type
(2 = standard, 1 = with temp.)
INT
I_ADDR
Input start address
INT
O_ADDR
INT
START1
ON1 to SIMOCODE
(Start direction 1)
BOOL
START2
ON2 to SIMOCODE
(Start Direction 2=
BOOL
RESET
Reset SIMOCODE from

external
BOOL
ACK
Acknowledge from external
BOOL
RES_PBFT
Auto-reset after Profibus fault

or PLC start
BOOL
I_N
Nominal Current in Ampere

(Set Current)
REAL
100.0
CUR_HIGH
Current high limit in %
INT
400
CUR_LOW
Current low limit in %
INT
20
HYSTERES
Hysteresis limit in %
INT
OVWA_DLY
Delay for overload warning (s)
INT
THER_FAC
Factor for thermistor value
REAL
0.0
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
STATUS
Status word
I_PERC
Current in %
I_ABS
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMIK
INT
Current in Ampere
REAL
0.0
THERMIST
Thermistor Temperature
REAL
0.0
READY
SIMOCODE ready
(Communication OK)
BOOL
FAULT_SC
BOOL
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
BOOL
OV_FT
Overload fault
BOOL

Permitted
Values
0-9
17
18

Typ
e
Attr.
BOOL
Motor stalled
BOOL
WARN_SC
General warning SIMOCODE
BOOL
OV_WA
Overload warning
BOOL
OVASY_WA
Overload + asymmetry
warning
BOOL
CUR_L_WA
Current low warning
BOOL
CUR_H_WA
Current high warning
BOOL
STAT_SC
Status SIMOCODE (for

connection to drive)
BYTE
B#16#0
INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 1
BOOL
INPUT2_O
Basic Unit Input 2
BOOL
INPUT3_O
Basic Unit Input 3
BOOL
INPUT4_O
Basic Unit Input 4
BOOL
FEED_ON1
BOOL
FEED_ON2
BOOL
PARAM_FT
Parameter failure
BOOL
Element
Meaning
Format
OVASY_FT
Overload + asymmetry
BOOL
THER_FT
Thermistor fault
STALL_FT
Default
HMIK
Permitted
Values

Ready
Overload warning
Earth fault
Basic unit Input4
Basic unit Input1
Basic unit Input3
Basic unit Input2
Status
Local automatic coder

Emergency start
Reset SIMOCODE
Command word
Designation English
Status
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ready
berlast Warnung
Erdschlu Strung
berlast + Unsymmetrie Strung
Grundgert Eingang4
Grundgert Eingang1
Grundgert Eingang3
Grundgert Eingang2
READY
OV_WA
EARTH_FT
OV+ASY_FT
BU_IN4
BU_IN1
BU_IN3
BU_IN2
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
StatusWord
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Automatic / Vorort
Notstart
Reset SIMOCODE
Auto_Loc
EM_ START
RESET
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Designation German
CommandWord
S7-Par-Name
Assignment.
OS variables table
OS-Var. No.
Output Level
S,O
Presentation
Number NK
Bit
Bit
Type
O
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
16Bit
19
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
SQT
EM_START
Auto
I>
I<
P_BUS
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
20
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
OV_ASY_WA
STALL_FT
GEN_FT
GEN_WA
STA_B34
ON1
THER_FT
ON2
OV_FT
Assignment.
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
S7-Par-Name
OS-Var. No.
16
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
13
14
15
12
8
9
10
11
Sequenz Test
Notstart
Betriebsart Automatik
Strom grer CUR_HIGH
Strom kleiner CUR_LOW
Keine Kommunikation
Ein Richtung 1
Thermistor Strung
Ein Richtung 2
berlast Strung
berlast + Unsymmetrie
Warnung
Block. motor Strung
Sammelstrung
Sammelwarnung
Designation German
Sequence test
Emergency Start
Automatic mode
Current > CUR_HIGH
Current < CUR_LOW
No Communication
Motor stalled fault

General fault
General warning
Overload+asymmetry warn.
On direction 1
Thermistor fault
On direction 2
Overload fault
Designation English
Output Level
Presentation
Number NK
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Value
Range
Type
Unit
Event Text
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OS-Var. No.
Assignment.
Designation German
Nennstrom
Strom in %
Strom in Ampere
Strom niedrig in %
Strom hoch in %
Hysterese in %
Thermistor Temperatur
Eingangs Startadresse
Ausgangs Startadresse
Basistyp
Alarm
Nominal current
Current in %
Current in Ampere
Current low in %
Current high in %
Hysteresis in %
Thermistor temperature
Input start address
Basic type
Alarm
Designation English
I_N
I_PERC
I_ABS
CURR_LOW
CURR_HIGH
HYSTERES
THERMIST
I_ADDR
O_ADDR
BASICTYPE
ALA_SIG1
ALA_SIG2
ALA_SIG3
ALA_SIG4
ALA_SIG5
ALA_SIG6
ALA_SIG7
ALA_SIG8
AlarmWord
S7-Par-Name
Presentation
Number NK
Output Level
Annun. Class
OM
OM
SEL
DESEL
21
Event Text
Fault Class
Value
Range
Type
Unit
Cemat V 7.0
Adapter C_ADAPT
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BAdapter C_ADAPT
ADAPTER C_ADAPT
Description from C_ADAPT
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operation principle
Input interfaces
Links
Output interfaces
Adaptations in the OS
Non CEMAT block with status word
Edit CFG file
Time behavior
Signal behavior
Commands
Display
I/O-bar of C_ADAPT

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_ADAPT_009.doc
4
4
4
5
5
5
7
8
8
9
12
12
12
12
13
0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Description from C_ADAPT

Type/Number
Module name:
Module number:
C_ADAPT
FC1018
Calling OBs
C_ADAPT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK)
Function
The C_ADAPT can connect non-CEMAT modules to CEMAT groups and routes.
In the case of faults of the non-CEMAT module, this is also displayed on the collective display
for group / route. When a status call is made, the TAG and the module comment from the nonCEMAT modules are displayed in the status messages window.
In the Group Instance list the non-CEMAT module is also displayed. With a double-click on the
non-CEMAT module the faceplate is opened.
If the non-CEMAT block has a status word with information for "drive stopped", drive running",
drive faulty", through parameterization of the configuration-file the status of the block is shown in
the group instance list.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Operation principle
Input interfaces
FAULT
Pointer
Initial state 0-signal
This input must be connected with an output of the non-CEMAT module. The output of the nonCEMAT module must have the 1-signal for a fault.
NOTE: Only FBs with an instance-DB can be interconnected.
FT_NACK
When the non-CEMAT module has an output that indicates 1-signal for a non-acknowledged
fault, you can connect this output with FT_NACK.
For 1-signal at FT_NACK, a red flashing light indicates a started group / route.
AMZS
Fault locking for the group
A 1-signal on EMZS locks the display of the fault on the group fault lamp (red).
Typical application
Refer to C_DRV_1D EMZS interface.
Links
The failure of the drive is represented as a collective fault in the status display of the associated
group / route. The Status Call function for group or route displays the fault details.
To ensure this function, each drive must at least be interconnected with a route or group to
which it belongs with regard to signaling.
GR_LINK1
or the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
If the drive belongs to more than two routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be connected
upstream. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the
groups/routes and an output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the
drive.
Note:
Under no circumstances can the MUX_IN interface be used for the direct
interconnection with group or route. It is used exclusively for interconnection with
the MUX module.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Example: Non-CEMAT module using C_ADAPT assigned to a CEMAT route module.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Output interfaces
P_ERROR
Parameterization error
The FAULT input must be connected with an output signal of the non-CEMAT module. The nonCEMAT module must be a FB that has an instance DB.
No inputs, outputs or flags may be switched to the FAULT input, otherwise P_ERROR indicates
-1.
INST_DB
Instance DB of the non-CEMAT module
You may only switch signals to the FAULT input from FBs that have an instance DB. The
C_ADAPT cannot recognize when you interconnect an FC. To allow you in the case of any
problems to test whether the correct module has been interconnected, the C_ADAPT displays
the number of the instance DB.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Adaptations in the OS
No additional parameterization is necessary to permit the display of "non-CEMAT" modules in
the group "status-call" and in the "object-list".
In this case, only the plant identifier and the comment are displayed (no fault type).
But the "non-CEMAT" module must have the attributes
parameter must have the attribute S7_m_c = true.
S7_m_c = true. And at least one
Non CEMAT block with status word

When a non CEMAT block has a status word with defined bits the group status-call can display
several faults in detail and the object list can display the status of the block with several colour
(white = not running, green =running, red = fault).
To get this feature you have to increase the config file C_Config.cfg and you have to provide a
new config file for each non CEMAT block.
The status word of the block must have the attribute S7_m_c = true.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Edit CFG file

The general configuration file C_CONFIG.cfg must be modified and for each non-CEMAT block
a cfg file has to be created.
After installing CEMAT at your PC an example of a non CEMAT block is provided. You will find
this d:\CEMAT_CS\CONFIG. The symbol of the block is "SIM_ADAP3 the parameter name of
the status word is " STA_MAR".
The common config file C_CONFIG.cfg is already extended with the symbol name and you will
find a SIM_ADAP3_009.cfg for English version and a SIM_ADAP3_007.cfg for German version.
Please open file C_CONFIG.cfg. You will find below CEMAT unknown Objects the line for
"SIM_ADAP3".
;unknown Objects
;Objectname=Filename without language code and without extension .cfg
SIM_ADAP3=SIM_ADAP3
On the left there is the symbol name on the right the name of the config file. Take for the config
file the same name like for the symbol!
For each non CEMAT module such a line is required in the C_CONFIG.cfg.

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Config file for the non CEMAT block

In order to display the non-CEMAT block in the same way as a normal CEMAT, it must have a
status word (16 Bit) or double word (32 Bit) which contains a bit for running, summarizing fault
and for each specific fault type.
Example for the definition of a status word in a non-CEMAT block:
Bit No.
10
description
Bit No. in Config file
running
General fault
fault 1
fault 2
10
10
fault 3
11
11
fault 4
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
Attention: The bits in the config file are counted from 1-32.
Example: Summarizing fault = FaultBit in Config file = 2

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Example of SIM_ADAP3_007.cfg:
; This is an example file for an SIMATIC block of an subcontractor

show this object in the CEMAT Group/Route-Status
to
[Control]
; The name of the variable, which is an equivalent
; to the CEMAT Status variable
StatusVariableName=STA_MAR
(parameter name for status word)
[Run]
; This section is only for the Group Instance List (GRINZ)
; Bit (1-32) from StatusVariableName for Status Run
RunBit=9
; Bit (1-32) from StatusVariableName for Status Fault
FaultBit=10
[Fault]
;Visible, Attribut,Comment,Bit,Fault Class
1,FT1, fault text 1,9,M
1,FT2, fault text 2,10,E
1,FT3, fault text 3,11,P
1,FT4, fault text 4,12,M
;End of List
Attention: Do not delete this line ";End of List"

11
0BAdapter C_ADAPT
Time behavior
The ADAPT module and the non-CEMAT module must be called before the associated route or
group.
Any called C_MUX modules must run prior to this module.
Signal behavior
The module does not issue any messages.
Commands
There are no commands.
Display
No user interface
12

0BAdapter C_ADAPT
I/O-bar of C_ADAPT
C_ADAPT
Element
Meaning
FAULT
Static Fault
FT_NACK
Default
Typ
POINTER
0/1
BOOL
0/1
AMZS
BOOL
0/1
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
P_ERROR
Parameter fault
INT
INST_DB
Instanz-DB from not CEMAT

Module
INT

Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
Format
13
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Annunciation Module C_ANNUNC
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BAnnunciation Module C_ANNUNC
ANNUNCIATION MODULE C_ANNUNC
Description of C_ANNUNC
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
8
10
11
12
13
13
14
14
I/O-bar of C_ANNUNC
15
OS variables table
17

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_ANNUNC_009.doc
Description of C_ANNUNC
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_ANNUNC
FB1004
Calling OBs
C_ANNUNC must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
With annunciation modules a signal can be displayed on the screen as an alarm message.
There are two basic applications for annunciation modules.
Drive faults
Annunciation of drive faults which cannot be signaled by the drive itself. These are the signals
which are connected to the protection interlock (e.g. belt drift, pull-rope, bearing temperature
etc.).
Process signal annunciations (interlocks)

Annunciation of process signals such as silo levels and other interlocks.

Operating principle
Input interfaces
MST0
Input Signal
When this interface changes its state unequal to OKS an alarm is generated. If a time delay is
set for response, then the output signal MAU and the alarm are delayed by this time. If a time
delay is set for dropout, then the output signal and the outgoing message are delayed by this
time.
OKS
Signal status for OK
MST0
Input signal
Alarm
MAU
Output signal
no
yes
no
yes
OKS
OK-Signal
Signal status for OK, look at the table above
MSIG
Process Signal
With this interface the annunciation block is able to show additionally to the fault also the actual
status of the process signal. 1-Signal at interface MSIG and no fault switches the OS Symbol to
green color.
Typical Application:
Pressure switches. The inverted signal oil pressure ok together with the delayed running signal
of the motor (EVS) is connected to MST0. The oil pressure signal itself is directly connected to
MSIG.
Display at the OS Symbol
no fault, no pressure
white
no fault, pressure ok
green
unacknowledged fault
red blinking
acknowledged fault
red
REL_SIM_ON
Simulation On
The enable for simulation can be switched on/off only from Diagnostic Picture. When using
drivers the output SIM_ON of the annunciation block has to be connected to input SIM_ON of
the driver block.
Caution:
REL_SIM_ON is no block parameter

MAMV
Alarm interlock
If a 0-signal is connected to this interface, the alarm, the horn and the blinking at the group fault
lamp are suppressed. In this case the group fault lamp indicates continuous red. When making
a status call this fault is indicated there.
If under stand still conditions of a group an affiliated annunciation module should not generate
an alarm, one can connect MAMV with GRE. If there is a fault it is indicated by a continuous red
at the group fault lamp. With the status call one can look for the cause. As soon as the group is
started the alarms become active.
MAAT
Alarm activation
The protection interlock (ESV, KSV, VSV) is not annunciated by the respective drive module.
For each signal (e.g. pull-rope, belt drift etc.) one has to program an annunciation module which
annunciates these events.
While starting a drive with a fault present (and already annunciated), the M-module would not
generate a new alarm message. A new alarm is triggered if EST (VST, KST) is connected to the
interface MAAT.
MMFR
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Caution: Module output
MAU and thus the signal for interlocking is still effective.
would be triggered for each sensor signal. To avoid this, one should connect the control voltage
signal to the annunciation release interface. This results in no alarm being produced. An
annunciation module must be configured to report the control voltage failure cause.
MMZS
A 1-signal on MMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. The GBE
is not effected by this fault when the group is started.
If one does not want to indicate a fault with the annunciation module but an interlock, then
MMZS must be connected with a 1-signal. The alarm in the annunciation line appears like a
fault but then indicates the interlock.
MLPZ
Caution: Using MLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.

MQIT
acknowledge on each separately, then one has to connect the corresponding acknowledge
signal (pulse) to this interface.
Caution: Using MQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
QUALITY
Quality Code of the driver
Basic state 99
Format Byte
If Driver blocks are used, the output QUALITY of the driver block must be connected to Interface
QUALITY of the annunciation block.
In the default state Quality Code = 99 the annunciation block knows that no driver block exists.

GFSO
Call.
If the Route Selection Function is used, only the drives which belong to active routes are used
for the Group Summarizing fault and for the Group Status list. In order to have the same
functionality for Annunciation blocks the interface GFSO must be connected with 1-Signal if it
does not belong to an active Route.
If the Annunciation block belongs to a normal drive function, the output RS_GFSO of the drive
block must be connected to GFSO of the Annunciation block.
If the Annunciation block is part of a Substation, the output RS_GFSO of the Substation must be
connected to GFSO of the Annunciation block.

Links
The fault of the annunciation module is represented as a group signal in the status display of
the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault.
To ensure this function, every annunciation module must be connected with at least one route
or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the annunciation module must be connected with the R_LINK
interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the annunciation module belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface
must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the annunciation module belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX
module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for
connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the
MUX_LINK interface of the annunciation module.

Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Meldung 1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_ANNUNC
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the
annunciation module. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the
annunciations, measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the
associated groups.

Process values
IN_DEL
Signal delay on activation
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
During signal change from 0 to 1 signal output MAU and the alarm message are delayed by
the set time.
Caution: Beside the configuration of the process value, parameter IN_DEL has an additional
function:
Via Object Property "Identifier" the fault text for status call can be entered (max. 16 characters).
After the OS compile this text string is available as an internal variable in the tag management
and it will be displayed as "fault text" in the status call.
See also description 06_AS_Engineering, connect and parameterize blocks.
OUT_DEL
Signal delay on dropout
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
During signal change from 1 to 0 the signal output MAU and the outgoing message are delayed
by the set time.
REP_TIM
Annunciation repetition time
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
If a value is entered here and if MST0 has a 1-signal, a going message and then an alarm
message is generated again after the time value has elapsed.
M_SIM
Simulation value of the driver
Default: 0
Format BOOL (0-1)

If driver blocks are used, connect the output Q of the driver block to interface S_SIM. If
simulation is switched on, the status of the simulation value will be displayed in the diagnostic
picture.
If you do not use drivers the given value from the parameter M_SIM is used as the input-signal
in simulation mode.
10

Output interfaces
MAU
Output signal
Always use this signal for the interlocking so that possible time delays are made effective.
SIM_ON
Simulation EIN
If you use drivers this output has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. The
simulation value is transmitted from the driver block via M_SIM.
Hardware outputs
MLA
Annunciation lamp
The MLA signal can be used to connect an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is
present). A flashing light indicates a dynamic annunciation (non-acknowledged) and a
continuous light indicates a static annunciation (already acknowledged). A 0-signal indicates
that no annunciation is present.

11
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
Test interface
12

group


13
Module states
Variable STATUS:
Icon Display
Text Presentation
No fault, no signal
White
Black, white
No fault, signal available
Green
Black, white
Blinking red
White, red
Fault acknowledged
Red
White, red
See also OS variable table
Commands
Refer to the OS variable table for the assignment of the command word.
14

I/O-bar of C_ANNUNC
C_ANNUNC
Format
Default
Typ
e
Signal input for fault
BOOL
OKS
OK-Signal
BOOL
MSIG
Process Signal
BOOL
MAMV
Alarm interlock
BOOL
MAAT
Alarm activation
BOOL
MMFR
BOOL
MMZS
BOOL
MLPZ
BOOL
MQIT
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
QUALITY
Quality code; 99 = no driver
BYTE
99
M_SIM
Simulation value display on

OS
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
IN_DEL
INT
OUT_DEL
Signal delay on dropout
INT
REP_TIM
Annunciation repetition time
INT
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
STATUS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
MAU
Output signal
MLA
SIM_ON
Element
Meaning
MST0
DWORD DW#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMI
W#16#0
BOOL
Annunciation lamp
BOOL
Simulation on
BOOL

Permitted
Values
15
16

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Simulation ON/OFF
Commandword
Designation English
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Simulation ON/OFF
SOO
Designation German
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
S7-Par-Name
CommandWord
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var.
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
17
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
MST0
MSIG
MAMV
MAAT
MMFR
MMZS
MLPZ
MQIT
OKS
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
18
DRV
LVV
SUB
SON
SIV
Strung
Prozesignal
Alarmverriegelung
Alarmaktivierung
Meldefreigabe
Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe
Quittieren (Zusatz)
24 OK-Signalzustand
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Verbunden mit Treiber

Letzter gltiger Wert
Ersatzwert
Simulation ON
Simulationswert
Ausgangssignal
MAU
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Status
Strung quittiert
Prozess Signal = 1
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FAULT
NQT
MSIG
StatusWord
Status
OK-signal
Fault
Process Signal
Alarm interlock
Alarm activation
Connected to a driver
Last valid value
Substitution value
Simulation ON
Simulation value
Outputsignal
Fault acknowledged
Process Signal = 1
S,O
16Bit

Bitmap
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALA_B10
ALA_B11
ALA_B12
ALA_B13
ALA_B14
ALA_B15
ALA_B16
ALA_B17
Signalverzgerung bei Ansprechen Delay for incoming faults

Signalverzgerung bei Abfallen
Delay after dropout
Meldewiederholzeit
Annunciation repeat time
Still faulty
IN_DEL
OUT_DEL
REP_TIM
Fault
ALA_MS0
ALA_B21
ALA_B22
ALA_B23
ALA_B24
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_REP
Alarm
Alarm
Strung
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AlarmWord
D
D
D
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
16Bit
sec.
sec.
sec.
I/O
I/O
I/O
0-999 OM
0-999 OM
0-9999 OM
PM
PM
Anw.
IN_DEL
OUT_DEL
REP_TIM
Anw.
19
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Annunciation 8 C_ANNUN8
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BAnnunciation 8 C_ANNUN8
ANNUNCIATION 8 C_ANNUN8
Description of C_ANNUN8
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces for test purposes
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
7
9
10
10
10
11
11
13
13
I/O-bar of C_ANNUN8
14
OS-Variablentabelle
17

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_ANNUN8_009.doc
Description of C_ANNUN8
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_ANNUN8
FB1005
Calling OBs
C_ANNUN8 must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
This block can generate 7 individual alarms. The 8th alarm is used for alarm repetition. With
annunciation modules, binary signals can be displayed on the screen as an alarm message.
There are two basic applications for annunciation modules:

Drive faults
Annunciation of drive faults which cannot be signalled by the drive itself. These are the signals
which are connected to the protection interlock (e.g. belt drift, pull-rope, bearing temperature
etc.).
Process signal annunciations (interlocks)
Annunciation of process signals such as silo levels and interlocks.

Operating principle
Input interfaces
FLS1 FLS7
Fault
When a signal changes its state from 0 to 1 at one of these interfaces, an alarm is generated. If
a signal delay (e.g. TFLS1) is set for response, the output signal F1 and the alarm are delayed
by this time. Corresponds to MST0 of the C_ANNUNC.
INH1 INH7
Fault interlock
With 1-signal at INH1 the input FLS1 is blocked. In this case the output F1 has 0-signal and no
alarm is generated even when the input FLS1 has 1-signal. With the edge from 1 to 0 at INH1
the input FLS1 will become active after the time TINH has elapsed.
When a drive is not started or it is during the starting phase and should not generate any alarm
(e.g. pump with pressure monitoring) the negated EVS-signal of the drive can be applied to the
INHx The activation of the fault can be specified via the delay TINH.
FAT1 FAT7
Alarm activation
If the Block is used together with drives, e.g. in order to give an alarm for Protection signals like
rope switch, belt drift etc. The EST (KST, VST) of the corresponding drive must be connected to
this interface.
With this connection the annunciation block generates an alarm every time the drive is stopped
by this fault or if the fault already exists and anybody tries to start the drive.
REL_SIM_ON
Simulation On
The enable for simulation can be switched on/off only from Diagnostic Picture. To enable the
Simulation value from the driver block, the output SIM_ON of the annunciation block has to be
connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block.
Caution:
REL_SIM_ON is no block parameter
SWK
Fault release
With 0-signal at this interface, the annunciation function as well as all outputs are blocked. Valid
for all eight fault inputs. Corresponds to MMFR with output block.
would be triggered for each sensor signal. To avoid this, one should connect the control voltage
signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This results in no alarm
being produced. The cause of the control voltage failure is reported by an annunciation
module configured for this.

FAIG
A 1-signal on FAIG prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. The GBE
is not effected by this fault when the group is started. Valid for all eight inputs.
If one does not want to indicate a fault with the annunciation module but an interlock, then FAIG
must be connected with 1-signal. The alarm in the annunciation line appears like a fault, but
then indicates the interlock. Corresponds to MMZS.
QUIT
acknowledge on each separately, then one has to connect the corresponding acknowledge
signal (pulse) to this interface. Corresponds to MQIT
Caution: When using the MQIT interface, the acknowledgement on all the AGs at the
C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
DSIG_BQ
the Faceplate of the annunciation block.

GFSO
Call.
functionality for Annunciation blocks the interface GFSO must be connected with 1-Signal if it
does not belong to an active Route.
If the Annunciation block belongs to a normal drive function, the output RS_GFSO of the drive
block must be connected to GFSO of the Annunciation block.
If the Annunciation block is part of a Substation, the output RS_GFSO of the Substation must be
connected to GFSO of the Annunciation block.

Links
The fault of the annunciation module is represented as a group fault in the status display of the
associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault.
To ensure this function, every annunciation module must be connected to at least one route or
group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the annunciation module must be connected to the R_LINK
interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the annunciation module belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface
must be connected to the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the annunciation module belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX
module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for
connection to the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection to the MUX_LINK
interface of the annunciation module.
Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for direct connection to
a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection to another MUX module.

Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
1/5
G_LINK
Meldung 1
MAIN_TASK
C_ANNUNC
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Observe the processing sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the
annunciation module. For the other modules, the run sequence is as follows: First the
annunciations, measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the
associated groups.

Process values
The process values can be set during configuration and they can be changed online from the
TFLS1 TFLS7
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
During signal change from FLS 0 to 1, the signal output F1 F8 and the alarm message are
delayed by the set time.
TINH1 TINH7
Signal delay of the fault interlock
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
During signal change from INH 1 to 0, the fault interlock is released again after the set time. The
output and the alarms are active again.

Output interfaces
F1 F7
Output signals, fault
Always use one of these signals for the control so that delays that have been configured can
take effect.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
This output has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. This enables to switch
on/off the simulation from the faceplate. Refer to Release functions.
FX
Output signal, all faults
If one of the output signals F1 F7 has 1-signal, FX also has 1-signal. If there are no faults on
the entire module, FX is 0.
Interfaces for test purposes

TEST_OSS
Test interface
The test interfaces are only for the module development and must not be changed!
ALARM
Alarm word for test
Test interface
Interfaces to OS
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
MODFL_OS
Module output status for OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS
10

Only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault
Secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically
The fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely.
group
No superfluous fault annunciations are created
The operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations.

11
See the following annunciation configuration for the "C_ANNUN8".
1. The annunciations SIG_1 to SIG_4 are configured as alarms.

2. The annunciations SIG_5 to SIG_8 are configured as warnings.
3. As standard, the fault abbreviation is F1 to F8. The abbreviation and annunciation text (4.)
appear in the annunciation line.
4. The annunciation text is entered here, maximum of 40 characters.
5. The fault types, P = process fault, M = mechanical fault, E = electrical fault, etc.
6. The alarm class is entered in the Attribute tab, annunciations 1-4 configured as alarms,
annunciations 5-8 configured as warnings.
12

Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "real" annunciations.

Module states
Variable STATUS:
Icon Display
Text Presentation
No fault
White
Black, white
Blinking red
White, red
Fault acknowledged
Red
White, red
Commands

13
I/O-bar of C_ANNUN8
C_ANNUN8
14
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
FLS1
Type Attr.
Signal input for fault 1
BOOL
INH1
Fault interlock 1
BOOL
FAT1
Alarm activation 1
BOOL
FLS2
BOOL
INH2
Fault interlock 2
BOOL
FAT2
Alarm activation 2
BOOL
FLS3
BOOL
INH3
Fault interlock 3
BOOL
FAT3
Alarm activation 3
BOOL
FLS4
BOOL
INH4
Fault interlock 4
BOOL
FAT4
Alarm activation 4
BOOL
FLS5
BOOL
INH5
Fault interlock 5
BOOL
FAT5
Alarm activation 5
BOOL
FLS6
BOOL
INH6
Fault interlock 6
BOOL
FAT6
Alarm activation 6
BOOL
FLS7
BOOL
INH7
Fault interlock 7
BOOL
FAT7
Alarm activation 7
BOOL
SWK
Fault release
BOOL
FAIG
BOOL
QUIT
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
HMI
Permitted
Values

Element
Meaning
Format
Default
DSIG_BQ
Driver Signal(s) bad quality
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
TFLS1
Signal delay on activation 1
INT
TINH1
Signal delay of the fault

interlock 1
INT
TFLS2
INT
TINH2

interlock 2
INT
TFLS3
INT
TINH3

interlock 3
INT
TFLS4
INT
TINH4

interlock 4
INT
TFLS5
INT
TINH5

interlock 5
INT
TFLS6
INT
TINH6

interlock 6
INT
TFLS7
INT
TINH7

interlock 7
INT
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
PAR_OS
Parameter status for OS
WORD
W#16#0
INTFC_OS
MODFL_OS
Module output status for OS
STATUS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
FX
Output signal, all
BOOL
F1
Output signal, fault 1
BOOL
DWORD DW#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0

Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
15
16
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
F2
Type Attr.
BOOL
F3
BOOL
F4
BOOL
F5
BOOL
F6
BOOL
F7
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation on
BOOL
HMI
Permitted
Values

S7 Par.
Name
SOO
Commandword
Designation
German
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 Simulation ON/OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Commandword
Designation
English
Simulation ON/OFF
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
CommandWord
Assignment
OS-Variablentabelle
OS Variable
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
17
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
FX
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
18
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
SIM
BQU
SIG7
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Ausgangssignal 1
Ausgangssignal 2
Ausgangssignal 3
Ausgangssignal 4
Ausgangssignal 5
Ausgangssignal 6
Ausgangssignal 7
Sammelstrung
8 Strung 7 quittiert
9
10
11
12
13
14 Simulation ON
15 Signal Strung

Strung 1 quittiert
Strung 2 quittiert
Strung 3 quittiert
Strung 4 quittiert
Strung 5 quittiert
Strung 6 quittiert
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
DYN
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
Status
StatusWord
Output signal 1
Output signal 2
Output signal 3
Output signal 4
Output signal 5
Output signal 6
Output signal 7
Output total fault
Simulation ON
Fault 7 acknowledged

Status
S,O
16Bit

Bitmap
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 3
Fault 4
Fault 5
Fault 6
Fault 7
Alarm
Signalverzgerung bei Ansprechen Delay for incoming faults

Signalverzgerung fr
Delay for fault interlocking
Strungsverriegelung
TINH1 TINH8
TFLS1 TFLS8
Alarm
Strung 1
Strung 2
Strung 3
Strung 4
Strung 5
Strung 6
Strung 7
ALA_MST1
ALA_MST2
ALA_MST3
ALA_MST4
ALA_MST5
ALA_MST6
ALA_MST7
ALA_res
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AlarmWord
D
xxxx
xxxx
16Bit
sec.
sec.
I/O
I/O
0-999
0-999
PM
OM
OM
Anw.
PM
TINH1-8
TFLS11-8
Anw.
19
QUIT
FAIG
SWK
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
20
INH6
FAT
FLS7
INH7
FAT
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
Strungsverrieglung 6
Alarmaktivierung 6
Strung 7
Alarmaktivierung 7
27 Strungsfreigabe
28
29
30
31
32
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Alarmaktivierung 3
Strung 4
Alarmaktivierung 4
Strung 5
Alarmaktivierung 5
Strung 6
FAT
FLS4
INH4
FAT
FLS5
INH5
FAT
FLS6
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Nahtstellenwort
Strung 1
Alarmaktivierung 1
Strung 2
Alarmaktivierung 2
Strung 3
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLS1
INH1
FAT
FLS2
INH2
FAT
FLS3
INH3
INTFC_OS
Fault release
Fault interlock 6
Alarm activation 6
Fault 7
Fault interlock 7
Alarm activation 7
Alarm activation 3
Fault 4
Fault interlock 4
Alarm activation 4
Fault 5
Fault interlock 5
Alarm activation 5
Fault 6
Fault 1
Fault interlock 1
Alarm activation 1
Fault 2
Fault interlock 2
Alarm activation 2
Fault 3
Fault interlock 3
Interfaceword
D
Bit
32Bit

Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Measured Value C_MEASUR
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BMeasured Value C_MEASUR
MEASURED VALUE C_MEASUR
Description of C_MEASUR
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware / measuring channel inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
4
11
11
12
16
18
21
24
25
25
26
26
I/O-bar of C_MEASUR
27
OS variables table
31

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_MEASUR_009.doc
Description of C_MEASUR
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_MEASUR
FB1006
Calling OBs
C_MEASUR must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The measured value module can be used to read and condition analog values from S7
peripheral cards or to feed existing physical values (e.g. from recipes or a simulation).
The following functions are performed:
An analogue value from the S7 peripheral card, or a physical value in REAL format can be
read and monitored.
Using driver block CH_AI, certain connections between driver block and measuring value
block are required.
ATTENTION: Using drivers no live zero monitoring is done. One can use the binary signal
QBAD from the driver block.
If no driver block is used: validation check of the read analogue value (QVZ, rated range,
overflow -> live zero)
The module live zero output is set to the 1-signal for an invalid measured value. A measured
value is invalid if the module does not exist (QVZ), or when the read measured value has
overshot or undershot (7FFF or 8000 hexadecimal).
The analogue value can be monitored at 8 limits. For 4 limits an alarm can be generated. All
limit value violations are available as module outputs for the user program.
A smoothing function can be enabled.
A gradient monitoring can be enabled. If the parameterisable gradient values are exceeded,
the corresponding module outputs for the user program are set to the 1-signal.
One can switch the measuring-block to the simulation mode, in this case the simulation
value is taken. During sequence-test mode all measure blocks are switched to the simulation
mode.
The simulation value can be modified from the faceplate.
Through bypass-function the measuring value can be blocked. There are 2 solutions of the
bypass-function.
If the measuring value is bypassed, it can not be switched into simulation mode.

Connection between Driver block CH_AI and C_MEASUR

To enable the selection and parameterization of substitution value and simulation value from the
Operator Station the Driver block CH_AI has to be connected to the Measuring value in the
following way:
-
The settings for scale beginning and scale end (SCB and SCE) can either be carried out at
the driver block or at C_MEASUR. In the following example the settings at the C_MEASUR
are used and transferred via SCB_OUT and SCE_OUT to the driver block.
Caution: For PT100 this connection has to be removed.
The selection of substitution value / last valid value for the driver block takes place via
SUBS_ON.
The substitution value is transferred via SUBS_V_O to the driver block.

Attention:
:KHQFRQILJXULQJD37LQWKH&)&RQWKH&+B$,EORFN\RXPXVWVSHFLI\WKHYDOXHIRU
WKHSDUDPHWHUV9+5$1*(DQG9/5$1*(

Limit value monitoring / spike suppression / hysteresis

FB-UM monitors the measured value for the overshoot and undershoot of 8 limit values. In the
following picture only 4 limits are shown:
HH
H
L
LL
Upper limit 2
Upper limit 1
Lower limit 1
Lower limit 2
As soon as there is an overshoot of an upper limit or an undershoot of a lower limit, an alarm

message is generated. The message can be released or blocked separately for each limit value.
The response to a limit value violation can take place after a time delay. This is useful to permit
the suppression of transient spikes. The time delay can be set from the OS.
LZ
O2
O1
TV2
TV2
ZW2:GO1
ZW2:GO2
TV2
Bausteinausgnge:
UO1
UO2
Time progression during the spike suppression:

Only after the Tv2 time delay has elapsed, is the overshoot or undershoot of a limit value
signalled and the module output set to the 1-signal. The delay applies to every limit value (HH,
H, L, LL).

To avoid constant coming and going of a limit value alarm message - if, e.g. the measured value
"varies" around a limit value - one can enter a hysteresis value from the OS. In this case, a
GEHT (GOING) signal is generated only when the
measured value is < upper limit - hysteresis
or
measured value is > lower limit + hysteresis
LZ
O2
O2 - HYS
O1
TV2
O1 - HYS
ZW2:GO1
ZW2:GO2
TV2
Module outputs:
UO1
UO2
Time progression during spike suppression with hysteresis being taken into
consideration:
In this diagram you can see that the delay time for the spike suppression is not re-triggered in
every case. The delay starts in the example after an overshoot of UL1. In the example, UL2 is
also exceeded shortly after UL1 but TV2 continues to run (no reset!). At the end of TV2 , UL1 and
UL2 are signaled simultaneously.

Arithmetic Operations
For further processing and conditioning each measured value can be "further processed"
through an arithmetic operation. The following arithmetic operations are possible:
XE * XE
s q a r in g
SK E - SKA
r o o t e x t r a c ti o n
X E * (S K E - S K A )
Smoothing
For each measured value you can set and release a smoothing according to the trapezoidal
formula:
XE XA =
EA
TA
2 * TG
+1
TA
2 * TG
XE + XEA
X EA =
TA
EA
TA
+1
2 * TG
+ XEA
TA = 1s is set as standard as the invocation time. This results - without taking the physical unit
[s] into account - in the following simplified formulas:
XE XA =
1
2 * TG
XE -
+1
1+
2 * TG
2 * TG
+ X EA
X EA =
XE + XEA
X EA
+ X EA
+ T
2 * ( XE -
EA
X EA =
1+
XE
XA
XEA
TG
TA
=
=
=
=
=
+ X EA
TG
+1
X EA =
1
EA
2 * TG
X EA
XA =
XE -
EA
2 * TG
)
+ XEA
New analog value

Smoothed analog value (result)
Old value for smoothing
Smoothing time
Invocation time (here always set to 1s)
With the smoothing time one can determine the degree of smoothing.

Gradient monitoring
Changes of the measured value can be monitored separately, i.e. in the positive as well as in
the negative direction (positive/negative gradient). When the monitoring is released one module
output is set to a 1 signal in each case if the maximum permitted positive or negative derivativeaction coefficient is exceeded. The monitoring can be delayed by setting a time in the OS.
The gradient monitoring does not generate any alarms, an alarm message line does not
appear on the OS. Should, however, this function be requested, then an annunciation module
must be programmed for this.
Time progression with the gradient monitoring:

E x a m p le :
-> 1 s tim e b a s e
-> 5 s tim e b a s e
T M= 3 s
T h e tim e b a s e is d e te rm in e d b y th e F B -U M its e lf:

d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t >- 1 % (= K F = + 4 0 ) -> 1 s
d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t <- 1 %
-> 5 s
<
p o s . d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t > 1 %

n e g . d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t < 1 %
A n n u n c ia tio n s u p p re s s io n tim e :
M e a s u re d v a lu e
Z W 2 -U M :
UGP
UGN
TM
TM
M o d u le o u tp u ts :
UGP
UGN
1s
5s
p o s . g ra d ie n t
1s
n e g . g ra d ie n t
p o s . g ra d ie n t
In this diagram you can see that the detection and changeover of "positive gradient" to
"negative gradient" and vice-versa happens only after the access to the measured value. This
means, changes between two access points are not detected immediately. The newly read
measured value is always compared with the measured value read during the last access. In
this context, the term "measured value" refers to a read-in analog value which has been,
smoothed and calculated, depending on the release functions. If the new measured value is
greater than or equal to the last read-in measured value the gradient is positive and the
difference is compared with the set "positive derivative-action coefficient". If the difference is
greater than the set value, then the module output UGP is set after the delay has elapsed. The
same applies to the negative gradient.
The variables "positive/negative derivative-action coefficient", necessary for the gradient
monitoring, must each be entered with a positive sign!
10

Operating principle
Hardware / measuring channel inputs
TYP
Type of the imported value
Default: 77
Format INTEGER
The type decides whether the measured value is read from the S7 peripheral card or is provided
as a physical value in REAL format.
TYPE 10: Import the measured value as REAL number
The physical value is passed as MV_PHYS parameter. It is also possible to pass the
quality code for the use of driver modules (QUALITY parameter).
TYPE 77: Import the measured value from the S7 peripheral card
The MV_CARD parameter must be interconnected with the analog input. The
CARD_SCB and CARD_SCE parameters are used to define the scale beginning
and scale end of the card.
MV_PHYS
Input for physical values
Format REAL
The MV_PHYS parameter is used to read a measured value as a physical value. The
MV_PHYS parameter is read only when the measured value type = 10.
QUALITY
The quality code when driver modules are used
Format BYTE
Pass the quality code to the measured value when driver modules are used.
MV_CARD
Direct input from the card
Format WORD
The MV_CARD parameter is used to import a measured value directly from the card. The
MV_CARD parameter is read only when the measured value type = 77.
CARD_SCB
Beginning value of the card
Default:0
Format INTEGER
This is the beginning value for the rated range of the analog input card.
CARD_SCE
End value of the card
Default: 27648
Format INTEGER
This is the end value for the rated range of the analog input card.

11
Input interfaces
RA_HH
Release of fault message Upper limit 2
If a 0-signal is applied at this interface, no alarm message is generated, no summarizing fault

indication for group and route, and no color change to the digital display at the control.
Application:
If these limits are to be used as a switching limit.
RA_H
Release of fault message Upper limit 1
Release of fault message Lower limit 1
Release of fault message Lower limit 2
Bypass-button active
See RA_HH
RA_L
See RA_HH
RA_LL
See RA_HH
BYPB_ACT
With 1-signal at this parameter the button "BYPASS" in the diagnosis faceplate is displayed.
With this button one can activate and deactivate the bypass-function.
12
Caution: If BYPB_ACT is set to 1-Signal the mode of action for interface UGWA is different.
The function is known as "SERVICE" too.

UGWA
block measuring channel / bypass
The way of working is depending from parameter BYPB_ACT.
if BYPB_ACT = 0
and with 1-signal at UGWA :
- the analogue value is no longer read
- the module flag USP has 1-signal
- monitoring for limit value and gradient, computation, smoothing, etc. are switched off
- the limit value bits are no longer updated
- no alarm message generated!
Typical case of application is the gas analysis:
During the gas analysis the measuring probe must be cleaned after certain intervals. For this
the measuring probe is retracted from the kiln. In order not to have faulty measuring the
measuring channel is blocked during the phase of cleaning. For this, a corresponding signal
must be connected to interface UGWA.
if BYPB_ACT = 1 (SERVICE)
and with 1-signal at UGWA :
- the analogue value is still read and displayed
- the module flag USP has 1-signal, all the other module flags are forced to 0-signal
- monitoring for limit values and gradient, computation, smoothing, etc. are switched off
- no alarm message generated!
Note: One can switch on the bypass-function from the diagnose faceplate too.
USCB
Measured value output at scale beginning
If a 1-signal is applied to this interface, then the value of the scale beginning is available at
output MV. This function can be used if, for example, a motor current is measured, and the
measurement still shows a low value although the motor is switched off.
UGWB
Release limit value calculation
If this interface is connected with 0-signal, the limit value monitoring is blocked. The Measuring
value module monitors and signals then only live-zero.
UAMV
Alarm interlock
No alarm message is generated at this interface for a 0-signal. The group fault lamp lights
continually red if a fault has occurred. The status call can be used to query the fault cause.
If, for example, a measured value module is not to produce any alarm when the group is
stationary, log '0' is applied to the UAMV. If the group is stationary, this fault is displayed as
GZS (red continuous light). UAMV can, for example, be connected with GRE; i.e. the alarms are
activated as soon as the group starts to run.

13
UMFR
No alarm messages are created and no group displays are triggered for group and route for a 0signal at this interface. This interface must be connected to avoid producing incorrect signals.
Example:
If the control voltage fails for MCC or field signals, every sensor signal would initiate an alarm
message (surge of messages). To avoid this, one should connect the 'control voltage' signal to
the UMFR interface. This results in no alarm being produced if the control voltage fails. An
annunciation module must be configured to report the "control voltage failure" cause.
UMZS
A 1-signal on UMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the
UQIT
Used with the control desk technology. If one has several independent control desks that are to
be individually acknowledged, the appropriate acknowledge signal (pulse) can be connected to
this interface.
Caution: Using UQIT the acknowledgment interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
Squaring, Root extraction, Smoothing (Filter), Gradient Supervision and Spike Suppression
must be enabled in the CFC. Otherwise the process parameters do not effect:
REL_SQAR
Release squaring
A 1-signal at the REL_SQAR interface releases the Squaring function.
REL_ROOT
Release root extraction
A 1-signal at the REL_ROOT interface releases the root extraction function.
REL_SMOO
Release smoothing
A 1-signal at the REL_SMOO interface releases the smoothing. The parameter SMOO_TIM is
used to set the process value for the smoothing time.
REL_GRAD
Release gradient monitoring
A 1-signal at the REL_GRAD interface releases the gradient monitoring. The parameters
GRAD_POS, GRAD_NEG and GRAD_TIM are used to set the process values of the gradient
monitoring.
REL_SPIK
Release spike suppression
A 1-signal at the REL_SPIK interface releases the spike suppression. The parameter SPIK_TIM
is used to set the process value of the spike suppression time.
14

Substitution value and Simulation value:

REL_SUBS
Release Substitution value
Interface REL_SUBS is used in order to parameterize the channel driver block behavior in case
of a fault. Same as for the driver block 1-Signal means "Substitution value" in case of a card
failure and 0-Signal means "last valid value".
The Information on REL_SUBS is displayed in the diagnostic picture of the measuring value and
also available at output SUBS_ON, which can then be connected to parameter SUBS_ON of
the Driver block CH_AI.
REL_SIM
Simulation-function
Via Diagnosis Picture of the Measure the Simulation can be enabled and disabled. REL_SIM
can not be used for connection in the CFC. When switching the AS into sequence test mode all
C_MEASURE are automatically switched to simulation.
After the Simulation is activated the value at Parameter SIM_VAL is used as input value.
The Simulation can always be used, independent of whether driver blocks are used or not. The
Simulation input SIM_ON at the driver block itself can not be used anymore. This would lead to
a wrong indication.
Caution: Simulation-function has the highest priority, which means it is active irrespective of the
quality code of the measure (except if Bypass function is enabled).

STA2_B10


GFSO
Call.
functionality for measuring value blocks the interface GFSO must be connected with 1-Signal if
it does not belong to an active Route.
If the measuring value block belongs to a normal drive function, the output RS_GFSO of the
drive block must be connected to GFSO of the measuring value block.
If the measuring value block is part of a Substation, the output RS_GFSO of the Substation
must be connected to GFSO of the measuring value block.

15
Links
The fault of the measured value is represented as a group fault in the status display of the
associated group/ route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault.
To ensure this function, every measured value must be connected with at least one route or a
group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the measured value must be connected with the R_LINK interface
of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the measured value belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must
be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the measured value belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module
must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with
the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of
the measured value.
16

Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Mewert1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_MEASUR
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the
measured value. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the annunciations,
measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.

17
Process values
VAL_HH
Upper limit 2
Default: 100.0
Format REAL.
This is the value of upper limit 2. If this limit value is overshot, then the module generates an
alarm message and sets module output HH.
VAL_H
Upper limit 1
Default: 100.0
Format REAL.
This is the value of upper limit 1. If this limit value is overshot, then the module generates an
alarm message and sets module output H.
If the measure is connected to the drive block in order to display the motor current in the drive
faceplate, upper limit 1 corresponds to 100% of the current value.
VAL_L
Lower limit 1
Default: 0.0
Format REAL.
This is the value of the lower limit 1. If this limit value is undershot, then the module generates
an alarm message and sets module output L.
VAL_LL
Lower limit 2
Default: 0.0
Format REAL.
This is the value of lower limit 2. If this limit value is undershot, then the module generates an
alarm message and sets module output LL.
LZ_TIM
Delay Live Zero
Default: 3

Value in seconds.
When a live-zero fault occurs, the corresponding alarm message and the module output ULZ is
delayed by the set time value.
TV = 0s means: no delay
18

SPIK_TIM
Spike suppression time
Default: 3

Value in seconds.
If the spike suppression is released (release functions), then, with the occurrence of a limit
violation, the corresponding annunciation is delayed by the set time value.
HYSTERES
Hysteresis
Default: 0.0

Value in %.
This contains the hysteresis value. If a limit value is undershot or overshot (value < Lower limit
1/2 or value > Upper limit 1/2), a fault is reported if the appropriate connection is available. This
fault is corrected only when the limit value (including hysteresis) is once again overshot or
undershot (value > Lower limit 1/2 + hysteresis, or value < Upper limit 1/2 - hysteresis).
GRAD_POS
Gradient positive
Default: 0.0

Value in %.
If the gradient monitoring has been released (release functions), the measured value will be
monitored to ensure that an increase of the measured value (positive gradient y) does not
exceed the value specified here. However, the UGP module output is set if y is larger than the
positive gradient specified here.
GRAD_NEG
Gradient negative
Default: 0.0
Format REAL (0.0- 99.9)

Value in %.
If the gradient monitoring has been released (release functions), the measured value will be
monitored to ensure that a decrease of the measured value (negative gradient y) does not
exceed the value specified here. However, the UGN module output is set if y is larger than the
negative gradient specified here.
GRAD_TIM
Gradient delay
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
If the gradient monitoring is released (release functions), then, with the occurrence of a positive
or negative gradient overshoot, the corresponding module output (UGN/UGP) is delayed by the
set time value.
SMOO_TIM
Smoothing time
Default: 0

Value in seconds.
If the smoothing is released (release functions), then the smoothing time, set here, is the degree
of smoothing. The longer the smoothing time the stronger the smoothing.
TG = 0s means: no smoothing
Variable "invocation time TA, appearing in the trapezoidal formula, is set in the standard with TA
= 1s.

19
VAL_SHH
Upper switching limit 2
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
This is the value of the upper switching limit 2. If this limit value is overshot, then the module
sets module output SHH.
VAL_SH
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
This is the value of the upper switching limit 1. If this limit value is overshot, then the module
sets module output SH.
VAL_SL
Lower switching limit 1
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
This is the value of the lower switching limit 1. If this limit value is undershot, then the module
sets module output SL.
VAL_SLL
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
This is the value of the lower switching limit 2. If this limit value is undershot, then the module
sets module output SLL.
SUBS_VAL
Substitution value
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
Therefore one has to connected the output SUBS_V_O of the C_MEASUR with the parameter
SUBS_V of the driver block.
SIM_VAL
Simulation value from OS
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
The simulation value can be entered from the Operating System.
SCB
Scale beginning
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
Physical value (start of measuring range).
SCE
Scale end
Default: 100.0
Format REAL
Physical value (end of measuring range).
UNIT
Unit
Default: %
Format STRING (8 characters)

Unit of the measured value.
20

Output interfaces
MV
Measured value
Format REAL
Output of the physical measured value.
QC
Quality code
Format BYTE
Output of the measured value quality code when driver modules are used.
SCB_OUT
Scale beginning
Format REAL
Physical value (start of measuring range).
SCE_OUT
Scale end
Format REAL
Physical value (end of measuring range).
SUBS_V_O
Substitute value (to driver)
Format REAL
If driver block CH_AI is used, this parameter can be connected to parameter SUBS_V of the
driver block. This enables to enter the substitute value from the Operating System.
MV_PERC
Measured value in %
Format INTEGER
The percentage value of the motor current can be displayed in the faceplate of the motor.
Therefore the output MV_PERC of the C_MEASUR has to be connected to interface MV_PERC
of the motor. The 100 % Output value is equal to Upper limit 1.
HH
Upper limit 2
Format BOOL
If the measured value overshoots the upper limit 2, the HH bit is set when the spike suppression
time has expired.
Upper limit 1
Format BOOL
If the measured value overshoots the upper limit 1, the H bit is set when the spike suppression
time has expired.

21
Lower limit 1
Format BOOL
If the measured value undershoots the lower limit 1, the L bit is set when the spike suppression
time has expired.
LL
Lower limit 2
Format BOOL
If the measured value undershoots the lower limit 2, the LL bit is set when the spike suppression
time has expired.
ULZ
Live Zero
Format BOOL
If QVZ is detected during reading of the analog value or if the peripheral card indicates
overshoot/undershoot, then the measured value is interpreted as being faulty and bit ULZ is set
after the end of the live-zero delay time.
UST
Format BOOL
UST=1 when the limits will be undershoot / overshoot an due to that an alarm or a warning is
generated. UST=0 after the acknowledge button has been pressed.
UGN
Negative Gradient Overshot
Format BOOL
If the permitted negative gradient is overshot during the reduction of the measured value, then
"negative gradient has been overshot", the UGN bit is set when the delay expires.
UGP
Positive Gradient Overshot
Format BOOL
If the permitted positive gradient is overshot during the increase of the measured value, then
"positive gradient has been overshot", the UGP bit is set when the delay expires.
USP
Measuring channel blocked / bypassed
Format BOOL
The measuring channel is blocked if interface bit UWFR has 0-signal. In this case bit USP is set
to 1-signal.
22

SHH
Upper Switching Limit 2
Format BOOL
If the measured value overshoots the upper switching limit 2, the SHH bit is set when the spike
suppression time has expired.
SH
Upper Switching Limit 1
Format BOOL
If the measured value overshoots the upper switching limit 1, the SH bit is set when the spike
SL
Lower Switching Limit 1
Format BOOL
If the measured value undershoots the lower switching limit 1, the SL bit is set when the spike
SLL
Lower Switching Limit 2
Format BOOL
If the measured value undershoots the lower switching limit 2, the SLL bit is set when the spike
SUBS_ON
Substitution value active (driver)
Format BOOL
Using driver block CH_AI this signal can be connected to input SUBS_ON of the driver block.
This allows the selection from the Operator station whether in case of a failure the substitution
value SUBS_VAL or the last valid value is used as measuring value.
Refer to Release function REL_SUBS.
SIM_ON
Simulation value active
Format BOOL
Indicates that the input value is taken from parameter SIM_VAL
Refer to Release function REL_SIM.

23
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Status word for OS
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status word 2 for OS
Interface to OS
VSTATUS
Status word for Display
Interface to OS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
Test interface
24

The module uses the ALARM_8P module to generate annunciations.
group


25
Module states
Variable STATUS:
Digital display
Icon Display
Measured value OK
black, gray
Measured value > UL2
white, red
black, yellow
Measured value < LL1
black, yellow
white, red
Measured value faulty (LZ)
yellow , black
Gradient overshot
white , violet
Measuring channel blocked
white ,blue
Bar display
Status
Display
Measured value OK
green
red
yellow
yellow
red
Measured value faulty (LZ)
black
Gradient overshot
green
green
Commands
26

I/O-bar of C_MEASUR
C_MEASUR
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
RA_HH
Release fault message HH
BOOL
RA_H
Release fault message H
BOOL
RA_L
Release fault message L
BOOL
RA_LL
Release fault message LL
BOOL
UGWA
Interlock measuring channel /

measured value
BOOL
USCB
Measured value ouput at

scale beginning
BOOL
UGWB
Release limit value

calculation
BOOL
UAMV
Alarm interlock
BOOL
UMFR
BOOL
UMZS
BOOL
UQIT
BOOL
GFSO
BOOL
STA2_B10

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B11

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B12

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B13

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B14

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B15

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B16

STATUS 2
BOOL
STA2_B17

STATUS 2
BOOL
REL_SQAR
Release squaring
BOOL
REL_ROOT
BOOL
REL_SMOO
Release smoothing
BOOL
REL_GRAD
BOOL

Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
27
28
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
REL_SPIK
BOOL
REL_SUBS
Release substitution value
BOOL
BYPB_ACT
Bypass button active
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
W#16#0
VAL_HH
Upper limit HH
REAL
0.000000e
+002
VAL_H
Upper limit H
REAL
0.000000e
+002
VAL_L
Lower limit L
REAL
0.000000e
+000
VAL_LL
Lower limit LL
REAL
0.000000e
+000
LZ_TIM
Delay Live Zero
INT
SPIK_TIM
Spike suppression time
INT
HYSTERES
Hysteresis
REAL
0.000000e
+000
GRAD_POS
Gradient positive
REAL
0.000000e
+000
GRAD_NEG
Gradient negative
REAL
0.000000e
+000
GRAD_TIM
Gradient delay
INT
SMOO_TIM
Smoothing time
INT
VAL_SHH
Upper switching limit HH
REAL
0.000000e
+002
VAL_SH
Upper switching limit H
REAL
0.000000e
+002
VAL_SL
Lower switching limit L
REAL
0.000000e
+000
VAL_SLL
Lower switching limit LL
REAL
0.000000e
+000
SUBS_VAL
Substitute value from OS
REAL
0.000000e
+000
SIM_VAL
Simulation value from OS
REAL
0.000000e
+000
SCB
Scale beginning
REAL
0.000000e
+000
SCE
Scale end
REAL
0.000000e
+002
UNIT
Unit
STRING
[8]
TYP
Type of the imported value
INT
77
DWORD DW#16#0
Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values


Element
Meaning
MV_PHYS
Format
Default
Type Attr.
REAL
0.000000e
+000
QUALITY
The quality code if drivers are

used
BYTE
B#16#0
MV_CARD
Direct input from the card
WORD
W#16#0
CARD_SCB
Beginning value of the card
INT
CARD_SCE
End value of the card
INT
27648
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
INTFC_OS
MV
Measured value
QC
DWORD DW#16#0
REAL
0.000000e
+000
Quality code
BYTE
B#16#0
SCB_OUT
Scale begin
REAL
0.000000e
+000
SCE_OUT
Scale end
REAL
0.000000e
+002
SUBS_V_O
Substitute value (to driver)
REAL
0.000000e
+000
MV_PERC
Measured value in %
INT
STATUS
Status word 1
DWORD DW#16#0
STATUS2
Status word 2
DWORD DW#16#0
VSTATUS
Status for Display
DWORD DW#16#0
ALARM
Test display alarm word
WORD
W#16#0
HH
Limit HH overshot
BOOL
Limit H overshot
BOOL
Limit L undershot
BOOL
LL
Limit LL undershot
BOOL
ULZ
Live zero
BOOL
UST
BOOL
UGN
Gradient negative
BOOL
UGP
Gradient positive
BOOL

HMI
Permitted
Values
+
+
29
30
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
USP
Type Attr.
BOOL
SHH
Switching limit HH overshot
BOOL
SH
Switching limit H overshot
BOOL
SL
Switching limit L undershot
BOOL
SLL
Switching limit LL undershot
BOOL
SUBS_ON
Substitute value active

(driver)
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation value active

(driver)
BOOL
HMI
Permitted
Values

8
9
10
11
12
SQAR
RADI
SMOO
GRAD
SPIKE
SUBS
SOO
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Quadrieren ein/aus
Radizieren ein/aus
Gltten ein/aus
Gradientenberwachung ein/aus
Strspitzenunterdrckung ein/aus
Commandword
Designation German
squaring on/off
root extraction on/off
smoothing on/off
gradient monitoring on/off
spike suppression on/off
Substitution value/last valid
value
Simulation ON/OFF
Commandword
Designation English
14 Simulation ON/OFF
15
13 Ersatzwert/ltzter gltiger Wert
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
CommandWord
S7-Par-Name
Assignment
OS variables table
OS Variabl No.
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
Textfeld
Textfeld
Textfeld
Textfeld
Textfeld
Textfeld
Textfeld
31
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
32
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
DRV
LVV
SUB
SIM
BYP_A
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Verbunden mit Treiber

Letzter gltiger Wert
Ersatzwert
Simulation ON
Taster Bypass aktiv
Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze 2

Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze 1
Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze 1
Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze 2
SHH
SH
SL
SLL
UST
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Status
Mewert > Obergrenze 2

Mewert < Untergrenze 1
Live Zero
Gradient negativ berschritten
Gradient positiv berschritten
Mekanal gesperrt
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HH
H
L
LL
ULZ
UGN
UGP
USP
StatusWord
Status
Connected to a driver
Last valid value
Substitution value
Simulation ON
Switch Bypass activ
MV > upper switching limit 2

MV < lower switching limit 1
MV > upper limit 2

MV > upper limit 1
MV < lower limit 1
MV < lower limit 2
Live Zero
Negative gradient overshot
Positive gradient overshot
S,O
Bit
16Bit

SQAR
RADI
SMOO
GRAD
SPIKE
SUBS
SIM
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
Freigabe Quadrieren
Freigabe Radizieren
Freigabe Gltten
Freigabe Gradientenberwachung
Freigabe Strspitzenunterdrckung
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
22 Freigabe Simulation
23
21 Freigabe Ersatzwert
16
17
18
19
20
Release squaring
Release smoothing
Release substitution value
active
Release simulation value active

Fault dynamic
MV > upper limit 2

MV > upper limit 1
MV < lower limit 1
MV < lower limit 2
Live Zero
Negative gradient overshot
Positive gradient overshot
Moduleflags
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
SHH
SH
SL
SLL
UST
STA2_B30
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze HH

Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze H
Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze L
Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze LL
Strung dynamisch
Mewert > Obergrenze HH

Mewert > Obergrenze H
Mewert < Untergrenze L
Mewert < Untergrenze LL
Live Zero
Gradient negativ berschritten
Gradient positiv berschritten
Mekanal gesperrt
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bausteinausgnge
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HH
H
L
LL
ULZ
UGN
UGP
USP
STATUS2
D
Bit
16Bit
33

Live Zero
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALA_HH
ALA_H
ALA_L
ALA_LL
ALA_LZ
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_B27
ALA_B10
ALA_B11
ALA_B12
ALA_B13
ALA_B14
ALA_B15
ALA_B16
ALA_REP
34
Alarm
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AlarmWord
Alarm
MV > upper limit 2
MV > upper limit 1
MV < lower limit 1
MV < lower limit 2
Live Zero
HH
HH
L
LL
LZ
P
P
P
P
E
AH
WH
WL
AL
ALF
Measured value type
Measured Value
Unit
Typ des eingelesenen Werts
Simulationswert von OS
Mewert
Substitute value
Simulation value
Ersatzwert von OS
MV
TYP
Untere Schaltgrenze 2
Dimension
Untere Schaltgrenze 1
UNIT
Obere Schaltgrenze 1
End of scale
Obere Schaltgrenze 2
Start of scale
Smoothing time (s)
Glttungszeit (s)
Skalenende
Gradient delay (s)
Gradientenverzgerung (s)
Skalenanfang
Gradient negative
Gradient negativ
Hysteresis
Strspitzenunterdrckung (s)
Gradient positive
Delay Live Zero (s)

Spike suppression (s)
Verzgerung Live Zero (s)
Hysterese
Lower limit 2
Untegrenze 2
Gradient positiv
Lower limit 1
Untegrenze 1
D
S,O;
D
D
Upper limit 1
Obergrenze 1
Upper limit 2
Obergrenze 2
SCB
SCE
VAL_HH
VAL_H
VAL_L
VAL_LL
LZ_TIM
SPIK_TIM
HYSTERES
GRAD_POS
GRAD_NEG
GRAD_TIM
SMOO_TIM
VAL_SHH
VAL_SH
VAL_SL
VAL_SLL
SUBS_VAL
SIM_VAL
xxx.yy
String
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx
xxx
xx.y
xx.y
x.y
xxx
xxx
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
xxx.yy
CFC
CFC
CFC
CFC
CFC
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
CFC
CFC
CFC
CFC
IO
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
1-255
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
real
0-999
0-999
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
0.0-99.9 OM
0.0-99.9 OM
0.0-9.9
0-999
0-999
real
real
real
real
SCE
SCB
SIM_VAL
SUBS_VAL
VAL_SLL
VAL_SL
VAL_SH
VAL_SHH
SMOO_TIM
GRAD_TIM
GRAD_NEG
GRAD_POS
HYSTERES
SPIK_TIM
LZ_TIM
VAL_LL
VAL_L
VAL_H
VAL_HH
35
UWFR
USCB
UGWB
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
5
6
7
Mekanal/Mewert freigeben
Mewert-Ausgang auf SKA
Freigabe Grenzwertberechnung
Freigabe Strmeldung Live zero
36
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
UQIT
UMFR
UMZS
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
16 Alarmverriegelung
17
18
19 Meldefreigabe
21
22
23
RA_LZ
OS_IF_B44
UAMV
RA_LL
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
RA_L
OS_IF_B42
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RA_H
OS_IF_B41
Alarm interlock
Interfaceword
Release of fault indication for
Upper limit 2
Upper limit 1
lower limit 1
lower limit 2
live zero
Rel. Meas. channel/MV
Set MV Output to SCB
Rel. Limit value calculation
Nahtstellenwort
D
Bit
Freigabe Strmeldung Obergrenze

2
Freigabe Strmeldung Obergrenze
1
Freigabe Strmeldung Untergrenze
1
Freigabe Strmeldung Untergrenze
2
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
RA_HH
OS_IF_B40
INTFC_OS
32Bit

37
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Meas. Val. Integrator C_MEAS_I
0BMeas. Val. Integrator C_MEAS_I
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
MEAS. VAL. INTEGRATOR C_MEAS_I
Description of C_MEAS_I
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating Principle
Input interfaces
Process values
Time Characteristics
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
I/O-bar of C_MEAS_I
N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_MEAS_I_009.doc
Description of C_MEAS_I
Type/Number
Function block name:
C_MEAS_I
Function block number: FC1026
Calling OBs
The C_MEAS_I must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
This function block (FB) integrates a measured value and forms the interface. First the
measured value is normalized (0% = 0 and 100% = 4095). The time grid of the integration is 60
seconds.
If the connected measured value is 100%, then the result of the integration after 60 seconds is
4095, after 120 seconds 8190, after 180 seconds 12285 etc.
The FB has 2 outputs for integration values. Integration value 1 is updated every 5 seconds.
Integration value 2 is updated every hour. These values are not reset by the FB but continue to
run.
CEMAT MIS can evaluate the result of the integration. For recalculation to physical values, MIS
uses the scaling parameters SCB and SCE and the dimensioning factor PULS_VAL. An
integration corresponds to the multiplication of the measured value dimension with a time unit. If
this time unit is 1 hour (e.g. kW -> kWh or t/h -> t), PULS_VAL must have the value 1. In all
other cases, PULS_VAL must have the ratio of 1 hour to the time unit of the measured value.
Example:
Measured value = l / s, integration value should be l: PULS_VAL = 1h / 1s = 3600s / 1 s = 3600
A conversion of the measured value to physical units of the same value can also be carried out
via PULS_VAL.
Example:
Measured value = l / h, integration value should be hl: PULS_VAL = 1 l / 1 hl = 1 / 100.
Measured value = kg / s, integration value should be t: PULS_VAL = (1 h / 1 s) * (1 kg / 1 t) =
3600 * (1 / 1000) = 3.6.

Operating Principle
Input interfaces
MV_IN
Measured value
Initial state 0
REAL format
Input for a physical measured value. Can be connected to the MV output of C_MEASURE.
REL_INT
Integrator release
Initial state 1 signal
The integrate function is released with the 1 signal at the REL_INT interface.
QC
Quality Code from C_MEASURE
Initial state 80H
BYTE format
Transfer of the Quality Code from the upstream measured value FB. Can be connected to the
QC of C_MEASURE.
SCB
Start of scale
Default: 0.0
REAL format
Physical value (start of measuring range). Can be connected to the SCB_OUT output of
C_MEASURE.
SCE
End of scale
Default: 100.0
REAL format
Physical value (end of measuring range). Can be connected to the SCE_OUT output of
C_MEASURE.
PULS_VAL
Dimensioning factor
Default: 1.0
REAL format
Factor for the weighting of the integration time / dimensions conversion; see Function.

Process values
The process values can be set during configuration and can be changed from the control room.
The process values should not be switched in the CFC, as they cannot then be operated from
the faceplates.
UNIT
Dimension
Default: %
STRING format (8 characters)

Dimension of the count value.
RT_MIS
Integration value (update every 5 seconds)
Interface to MIS
RT_MIH
Integration value (update every hour)
Interface to MIS
MIH_OK
Integration value MIH has no invalid values
Interface to MIS. There were no invalid measured values during the past hour with the 1 signal
at MIH_OK.

Time Characteristics
None
The FB has no messages.
Commands
There are no commands.

I/O-bar of C_MEAS_I
C_MEAS_I
Element
Meaning
Type
Default
Type Attr.
HMI
MV_IN
Measured value
REAL
QC
Quality code
BYTE
80H
SCB
Start of scale
REAL
SCE
End of scale
REAL
100.0
RT_MIS
Integration value 1 (5 s update)
DINT
RT_MIH
Integration value 2 (hourly update)
DINT
MIH_OK
Integration value 2 OK
BOOL
PULS_VAL
Dimensioning factor
REAL
1.0
UNIT
Unit
STRING
[8]
Permissible
values

Cemat V 7.0
Silo pilot C_SILOP
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BSilo pilot C_SILOP
SILO PILOT C_SILOP
Description of C_SILOP
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Pulse acquisition
Reading an analog value
Calibration:
Relationship between signals during a silopilot measurement:
Sequence of a silopilot measurement:
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
15
15
I/O-bar of C_SILOP
16
OS variables table
19

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_SILOP_009.doc
Description of C_SILOP
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_SILOP
FB1011
Calling OBs
C_SILOP must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

Function
With the silopilot module one can determinate silo levels by means of silopilots according to an
electromechanical plummet system.
The silopilot can be started via command from the control room or via the interface bit SBFE.
The silopilot unwinds a measuring tape which is weighed down with a sensing weight. When the
weight reaches the material surface, the tractive power at the measuring tape falls. The motor
reverses and the sensing weight returns to its start position. The silopilot supplies pulses during
the retraction and insertion.
Pulse acquisition
The pulses are acquired and summated directly in the PLC. For this, one must parameterize for
this silopilot in the 100 ms program a pulse acquisition function module C_SPCNT.
For software reasons one must make sure that the pulses of the silopilot have a pulse duration
as well as an interpulse period of >100 s each:
t > 100ms
t > 100ms
If a measurement is completed without any fault, then module C_SILOP calculates the physical
silo filling level from the sum of the accrued pulses.
If a measurement is aborted with a fault, the last valid measurement is displayed. A faulty
measurement can be due to a hardware fault of the silopilot (motor overload, belt-break alarm,
time-out, etc.).
The silopilot module monitors the run-time of the silopilot from the time of start to the return to
the start position. To determine the start position of the silopilot it is necessary to have the input
signal upper limit position of the sensing weight (interface SOEF). Should this signal not be
available from the hardware, then one must release the simulation at module C_SILOP.
Reading an analog value

As an alternative to the pulse acquisition, a physical measured value of the silo pilot can also be
processed.

Calibration:
The values for the maximum run-time and maximum number of pulses can be parameterized at
module C_SILOP or be determined with a calibration run.
Caution: A calibration run can only be performed if signal SOEF is available as hardware! If
SOEF has to be simulated by the silopilot module, then a calibration run is not possible!
Settings necessary for the monitoring:
maximum number of pulses with an empty silo
maximum permissive run-time with an empty silo.
The calibration run can be started from the control room. This requires an empty silo. The
sensing weight is let down to the lower limit of the measurement (tape max. or min. safety
SMIN). Afterwards the silopilot retracts the sensing weight to its upper limit position.
The run-time (plus 15 % tolerance) required for this is then stored as max. permissive runtime.
The sum of the accrued pulses is also stored, it serves for the calculation of the normalized silo
filling level and silo empty level value during pulse acquisition.

Relationship between signals during a silopilot measurement:

TE: Duration of the starting process
The silopilot is started either via command or via interface SBFE.
The module output SBE remains set until the signal Upper limit position SOEF has a 0-signal,
or until the first count pulse. If these conditions are not fulfilled after 10 seconds, then output
SBE is reset and an alarm annunciation is output.
TL: Run-time of the silopilot

It is monitored by the silopilot module. If this time exceeds the set value max. run-time, then
the silopilot is regarded as being faulty, and an alarm annunciation is output.
If SOEF is simulated, the silopilot reaches again its start position after the max. run-time has
elapsed.
Sequence of a silopilot measurement:
SBE
SOEF
Pos. 100 % VR
Pos.
Calibration run
(with empty silo)
Measurement
of silo level
0 % VR
SMIN
TL
max. run time
TL
(max. run time)
with calibration run max. run time = actual run time + 15 %

Operating principle
Input interfaces
SEVG
Start interlock
A 0-signal at interface SEVG means that the silopilot cannot be started.

Apart from being used as an interlock during the filling of a silo (danger of spilling or tear-off of
the sensing weight), this signal can also be used, amongst other things, to guarantee a
minimum starting cycle, i.e. the minimum period between two silopilot starts. If the silopilot
manufacturer lays down, for example, for single-phase motors such a waiting time, this must be
taken into consideration in the user program by connecting interface SEVG! Disregard of this
manufacturers specification can cause damage at the silopilot drive!.
SMUE
Motor overload
A 1-signal at interface SMUE means that the silopilot drive has signalled overload (bimetal).
SBRA
Belt-break alarm
A 1-signal at interface SBRA means that the silopilot has signalled a belt-break alarm (tear-off of
the sensing weight).
SVOS
Local switch
A 0-signal at interface SVOS means that the silopilot operates in local mode.
SOEF
Upper limit position of sensing weight
A 1-signal at interface SOEF means that the silopilot is at the upper limit position.
SBFE
Command ON
A 1-signal at interface SBFE means that the silopilot is to be started.
Caution:
REL_SIM
Interface SBFE should not be connected to a continuous signal!
Release simulation of SOEF
A 1-signal at the REL_SIM interface simulates the upper limit-position sensing weight (SOEF
signal) from the silo pilot module.
MODE_P
Pulse acquisition operating mode
The MODE_P interface is used to select the operating mode of the silo pilot.
1-signal = pulse acquisition.
0-signal = import a physical measured value after finishing the measurement.
PULS_IN
Input Pulse
In mode "pulse acquisition" the silo pilot counts + 1 with each edge from 0 to 1-signal.

REL_ANNU
Release operational annunciations
A 1-signal at the REL_ANNU interface issues an operational annunciation when the silo pilot
starts.
Links
The fault of the silo pilot is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated
To ensure this function, every silo pilot must be connected with a route or a group to which it
belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the silo pilot must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the
route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the silo pilot belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be
MUX_LINK
If the silo pilot belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be
silo pilot.

Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
1/5
G_LINK
Silopilot1
MAIN_TASK
C_SILOP
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
I
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
10
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the silo
pilot. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the silo pilot, then the

Process values
MAXR_TIM
Max. permitted run-time
Default: 11

Value in seconds.
This is the time which the silopilot may max. use for a complete run (retraction and insertion),
i.e. from leaving its upper limit position after having received the START command to the
renewed reaching of its upper limit position.
If this time is exceeded without reaching the limit switch upper limit position of sensing weight
(interface SOEF), then the silopilot is regarded as being faulty, the measurement is aborted
with fault. The silopilot is no longer faulty from the moment when the interface upper limit
position of sensing weight has a 1-signal and the fault is acknowledged.
If signal SOEF does not exist as hardware and thus has to be simulated, one cannot determine
in this case a run-time error. The measurement is then generally terminated after the end of the
max. run-time.
The maximum permitted run-time must never be set shorter than 11 seconds.
MAX_PULS
Max. number of pulses (with empty silo)
Default: 1

You must set the maximum number of pulses which are received when the silo is completely
empty.
PULS_VAL
Pulse value
Default: 1
Format REAL
The number of counted pulses is multiplied by this value.
UNIT
Unit
Default: %

Unit of the measured value.
MV_PHYS
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
Parameter MV_PHYS is used to read the silo filling level as a physical value. Parameter
MV_PHYS is only read if parameter MODE_P is connected with a 0-signal (no pulse
acquisition).
QUALITY
Quality code when using driver modules
Default: 80
Format BYTE
The quality code is transferred to the measured value when using driver modules.

11
Output interfaces
MV
Measured value
Format REAL
Output of the physical silo filling level value.
SPL
Silo pilot running
When the silopilot module has been started and runs in automatic mode (= measurement runs)
then bit silopilot running is set. It has a 1-signal until the measurement is completed (upper
limit position reached) or a fault has occurred.
SPS
Silo pilot faulty
Bit silopilot faulty has a 1-signal if

- a not-acknowledged fault is present or
- fault motor overload is present or
- fault belt-break alarm is present.
The bit has again a 0-signal after the above-mentioned conditions do not apply any more.
SEL
Bit Limit position fault has a 1-signal if

- the silopilot should have been started while it was not in upper limit position,
- the silopilot does not leave the upper limit position (10s after the start) or
- the silopilot has not reached the upper limit position at the end of the max. run-time.
The bit has again a 0-signal after the fault has been acknowledged, after a renewed start
command or (depending on the fault type) after the upper limit position has been reached again.
SSW
Faulty silo value
Bit SSW has a 1-signal, if after ending the measuring procedure (depending on the
parameterisation)
- more pulses have accrued than been parameterized (-> max. No. of pulses),
- QVZ has been detected during reading of the analog value,
- the read analog value has overshot or undershot its nominal range.
As soon as the silopilot is restarted SSW has a 0-signal again.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver block.
Hardware outputs
SBE
Command ON to silo pilot
The SBE signal is used to trigger the silo pilot.
12

Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
MSTIM_OS
Time of last valid measurement
Interface to OS
VISU_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS
CNT_PULS
Counted pulses
Test interface
RUN_TIM
Run-time in seconds
Test interface

13
group

14

Module states
Variable VISU_OS:
No.
Symbol Display
Text Presentation
Pilot in start position, ready to

run
White
Black, white
Pilot in start position +

interlocked
White
Black, white
Pilot in start position + fault
Red
Black, white
Pilot in Start position + fault

not acknowledged
Blinking red
Black, white
Pilot not in start position +

fault
Red
Black, white
Pilot not in start position +

Blinking red
Black, white
Pilot running
Green
Black, white
Local
Yellow
Black, white
Commands
Refer to OS variables table for the assignment of the command word.

15
I/O-bar of C_SILOP
C_SILOP
16
Format
Default
Typ
e
Start interlock
BOOL
SMUE
Motor overload
BOOL
SBRA
Belt-break alarm
BOOL
SVOS
Local switch
BOOL
SOEF
Upper limit position of sensing

weight
BOOL
SBFE
Command ON
BOOL
REL_SIM
Release simulation of SEOF
BOOL
MODE_P
Pulse acquisition mode
BOOL
PULS_IN
Input Pulse
BOOL
REL_ANNU
Release operational
annunciations
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
MAXR_TIM
Element
Meaning
SEVG
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMI
WORD
W#16#0
Maximum permitted run-time
INT
11
MAX_PULS
Maximum number of pulses

(with empty silo)
INT
PULS_VAL
Pulse value
REAL
1.000000e
+000
UNIT
Unit
STRING
[8]
MV_PHYS
REAL
0.000000e
+000
QUALITY
Quality code when using

driver modules
BYTE
B#16#80
GR_LINK1
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
MUX_LINK
INT
MSTIM_OS
Time of last valid

measurement
VISU_OS
BYTE
MV
Measured value
REAL
DWORD DW#16#0
Permitted
Values
B#16#0
0.000000e
+000

Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
STATUS
DWORD
W#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
CNT_PULS
Counted pulses
INT
RUN_TIM
Run-time in sec.
INT
SPL
Silo pilot running
BOOL
SPS
Silo pilot faulty
BOOL
SEL
BOOL
SSW
Faulty silo
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
BOOL
SBE
Command ON to silo pilot
BOOL

Permitted
Values
17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start
Start Kalibrierlauf
START
ST_CAL
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Designation German
CommandWord
S7 Par. Name
Assignment
OS variables table
OS Variabl No.
Start
Start calibration run
Commandword
Designation English
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
Start
Kalibr.
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
19
20
VISU_OS
7
8
2
3
Status for symbol and text

SP in start position + ready to
Pilot in Startposition, laufbereit
run
Pilot in Startposition + verriegelt SP in start position + interlocked
Pilot in Startposition + Strung SP in start position + fault
Pilot in Startposition + Strung SP in start position + fault not
nicht QT
acknowledged
Pilot nicht in Startposition +
SP not in start position + fault
Strung
Pilot nicht in Startposition +
SP not in start position + fault
Strung nicht QT
not acknowledged
Pilot luft
SP running
Vorort
SP in local mode
Zustand fr Symbol und Text
S,O
Bitmap
SOEF
SBFE
REL_SIM
REL_ANNU
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
29
30
31
28
24
25
26
27
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Silo pilot runs

Silo pilot faulty
Faulty silo value
Start interlock
Drive overload
Belt-break-alarm
Local Switch
Upper limit position of sensing
Obere Endlage Fllgewicht
weight
Befehl Ein
Start
Freig. Simulation obere Endlage rel. simulation of upper limit
Freigabe Betriebsmeldungen
rel. operator annunciation
Motorberlast
Bandrissalarm
Vorortschalter
Silopilot luft
Silopilot gestrt
Endlagenfehler
Fehler Mewert
Sequence Test
Bad Quality
Last measurement quit without

fault
Letzte Messung ohne Fehler

beendet
Start Silo pilot

Fault
11
12
13
14 Sequenz Test
15 Bad Quality
10
Status
Local mode
Pilot in start position (upper limit)
Pilot interlocked
Pilot is running
Strung
SEVG
SMUE
SBRA
SVOS
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
SQT
BQU
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
SPL
SPS
SEL
SSW
MESS_OK
STA_B32
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
FAULT
NQT
STA_B30
STA_B31
8
9
SBE
Start Silopilot
Status
Betriebsart Vorot
Silopilot in oberer Endlage
Silopilot verriegelt
Silopilot luft
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
LOCAL
SOE
SVG
RUN
StatusWord
S,O
Bit
16Bit
21
6
7
ALA_SLU
ALA_SSP
ALA_B06
ALA_START
22
VSTATUS
MSTIM_OS
MAXR_TIM
MAX_PULS
PULS_VAL
UNIT
MV
ALA_SMU
ALA_SBA
ALA_SVO
ALA_SOE
Maximal zulssige Laufzeit (sek)

Maximale Pulse bei leerem Silo
Pulwertigkeit
Dimension
Silo Fllstand
Zeitpunkt der letzten gltigen
Messung
Status fr erweiterte
Aanaloganzeige
Start
Keine Startposition
(nicht in Endlage)
Max Laufzeit berschritten
Alarm
Motor berlast
Bandriss
Vorort
Obere Endlage nicht verlassen
0
1
2
3
AlarmWord
Alarm
Status forAnalogdisplay
extended
Time for last valid measurement
Max. permitted running time

Max. pulses with empty silo
Valency of one Pulse
Dimension
Silo level
start
Motor overload
Belt-break
Local operation
Upper limit position not left
Time-out (upper limit not
reached)
Limit position fault (not in start
position)
D
D
D
O
O
O
xxxx.y
Datum/Uhr
I/O
I/O
I/O
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxx.y
real
0-999
0-000
OM
OM
OM
OM
Start
SSP
SLU
berlast
Bandriss
Vorort
SOE
ALF M
ALF M
ALF M
ALF M
ALF S
ALF M
Cemat V 7.0
Group C_GROUP
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BGroup C_GROUP
GROUP C_GROUP
Description of C_GROUP
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
7
7
8
12
14
15
18
19
19
19
20
I/O-bar of C_GROUP
21
OS variables table
25
Description of C_MUX
31
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Output interfaces
I/O-bar of C_MUX

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_GROUP_009.doc
31
31
31
32
32
32
33
0BGroup C_GROUP
Description of C_GROUP
Type/Number
Main module:
Module name:
Module no.:
C_GROUP
FB1010
Supplementary module:
Module name:
Module no.:
C_MUX
FC1017
Calling OBs
C_GROUP must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

0BGroup C_GROUP
Function
The group is a superordinated module for starting and stopping and for monitoring of
technologically grouped plant sections.
The group module enables the visualization of the operational conditions of a plant section,
displayed as a status display, and a detailed fault diagnosis (status call). For this, one must
assign to a group the drives, annunciations and measured values which are part of this plant
section.
The group can be started or stopped via the OS, or via conventional control desk pushbuttons,
or via the program.
A start-up warning is triggered when a group is started, the times for the start-up warning (horn
time/waiting time) can be set as process valuesAfter the start-up warning has elapsed, the
group generates the ON-command to start the drives. The ON-command is limited by the
release time, i.e. the start process is aborted after the set release time has elapsed.
There are 3 operating modes:

Automatic
One starts and stops a technological a plant section with this group. During the start the group
generates a start-up warning. After the start of the group all affiliated objects (drives, measured
values and process signals (annunciation modules)) are monitored. An alarm message is
generated automatically in the case of a fault.
Single-start enabled (interlocked)

In this mode one can start and stop the drives belonging to a group separately. All interlocks are
effective. This means, one can start the drives only in the order set by the interlocking
sequence. An alarm message is generated automatically in the case of a fault. In this mode no
Group start is possible.
Local operation enabled

In this mode only the protection interlock for the safety switches is effective. The drives can be
controlled with locally installed switches/pushbuttons. No alarm message is generated in the
case of a fault. The start and operating interlock as well as the protection interlock of automatic
mode (e.g. belt drift) are not effective. No EVS signal is generated either.
In this mode no Group start is possible.
The operating mode changeover for the drives is carried out group-wise, i.e. the group
generates the release signals for operating modes local and single-start which must be
connected to the interfaces of the corresponding drives.

0BGroup C_GROUP
Changeover between automatic <--> local mode at the group:

Open the faceplate of the group and press the button Local. Running drives continue to run.
Changeover between automatic <--> single-start mode at the group:

Open the faceplate of the group and press the button Single. Already running drives continue to
run. All interlock conditions are active.
A changeover between local mode and single-start mode is not possible.
The following states are displayed in the block icon of the group:
Fault:
Interlocked:
Operation:
Mode:
Fault in any object that is assigned to the group

Interlocking of the group or interlocking of the pre-selected route
Operational condition of the route (running, stopped, start-up etc.)
Automatic, local or single-start mode.
The group generates operation annunciations when starting and stopping.
With a status call of the group, all the present faults and interlocks of the affiliated drives,
measured values and process signals in this plant section can be queried at anytime. For a
group with routes, the status call effects only the pre-selected routes of the group.

0BGroup C_GROUP
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
GTA
Group push button OFF
If the group is to be started/stopped using conventional control desk pushbuttons, the GTA
parameter must be connected with the input signal of the Stop pushbutton. A 0-signal
deactivates the group. Two-handed operation is necessary to switch off the group using control
desk pushbuttons. GTA and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously.
Caution: The control desk pushbuttons take effect only when the GPTS (release control desk
pushbuttons) interface has been connected with a 1-signal.
GTE
Group push button ON
If the group is to be started/stopped using conventional control desk pushbuttons, the GTE
parameter must be connected with the input signal of the Start pushbutton. A 1-signal activates
the group. Two-handed operation is necessary to switch on the group using control desk
pushbuttons. GTE and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously.
Caution: The control desk pushbuttons take effect only when the GPTS (release control desk
pushbuttons) interface has been connected with a 1-signal.

0BGroup C_GROUP
Input interfaces
GEVG
Start interlock
A 0-signal at interface GEVG prevents the starting of the group.

Interface GEVG must be connected with all interlock conditions which are necessary to start the
group (e.g. the route must be pre-selected or another group must be running). This ensures that
the group does not generate a start-up warning when starting conditions are missing.
The start interlock is visualized in the group status display. If one wants to see the reason for
the interlock in the status call of the group, one must program an annunciation module and
assign it to the group (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
GBVG
Operating interlock
A 0-signal at interface GBVG prevents the start of the group or switches off a running group.
The switching off of a group through this interlock must be acknowledged, otherwise the group
cannot be started again!
The operating interlock is visualized in the group status display. If one wants to see the reason
for the interlock in the status call of the group, one must program an annunciation module and
assign it to the group (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
GAVG
Switch-off interlock
When interface GAVG is connected with a 0-signal it is not possible to switch off the group with
the normal Stop-button, but the Quick-stop-button and the interface GABG are still active.
GAFS
Start-up warning external trigger
External start of the start-up warning. Therefore the interface GUMS must be set to 0-signal.
The start-up warning is not given with the group start, but with 1-signal at GAFS. After start-upwarning and the waiting time has elapsed the group can be started by pressing the start button.
GUMS
Enable internal start up warning
With 1-signal at GUMS the start-up-warning is given by pressing the start button.
A 0-signal at the interface GUMS inhibits the normal start-up warning. The start-up warning
must be started from extern via interface GAFS.
GASL
Delete selection memory
With a 1-signal at interface GASL the group status OFF (GRAZ has a 1-signal) is pretended.
Application with groups with very long overtravel times. When switching off the group, the group
status display would blink until the last drive is stopped. One can forestall the GRAZ by
connecting the OFF Feedback of all drives to interface GASL, except for those that have a long
overtravel time.

GSAZ
Supplementary fault (dynamic)
0BGroup C_GROUP
A possibility for connecting dynamic faults which cannot be automatically acquired via drives
and annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface GSAZ the group indicates dynamic
faults.
Caution: If the interface is to behave exactly like a drive fault, one must ensure that the
interface becomes 0 after acknowledgement.
GSTZ
Supplementary fault (static)
A possibility for connecting static faults which cannot be automatically acquired via drives and
annunciation modules. With 1-signal at interface GSTZ the group indicates static faults.
GFGS
Release signal
Application with control desk engineering. If there are several control desks with several release
pushbuttons, then one must connect the corresponding release pushbuttons to this interface.
Caution: Using GFGS the release interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
GFTR
Enable start re-trigger
When the start-up-procedure of a group has been interrupted by a fault and one restarts the
group within the release-time, no start-up-warning will be given and the Command ON (GBE)
becomes 1-signal at once. The release time will be reset to the start value.
With 0-signal at GFTR a start-up-warning will be given for each start.
GQSP
Quick stop
stop delay). The so-called quick stop is possible via the OS or via 1-Signal at interface GQSP.
For this, one must connect signal GQS of the group to interface QSTP of the drives (E and V).
Separate interlocking is also possible with dampers (e.g. forced close).
GPTS
Release of control desk pushbuttons
In the basic state, operation via the OS is released and the control desk pushbuttons are
inhibited. By connecting this interface with a 1-signal, the control desk pushbuttons are released
and operation through OS is inhibited.

0BGroup C_GROUP
GREZ
Feedback ON
This interface must be connected with a 1-signal if all drives in this group are running. It can be,
for example, the last drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives if they are triggered in
parallel. The group feedback ON limits the start command of the group (reset of GBE signal)
and is necessary for the visualization (group runs completely).
Depending on whether or not the group has routes, one must use for the connection the logic
signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit position of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2) or
the feedback of the routes WRE.
Caution: Please observe the connection examples in the engineering manual, because with
sporadically running drives one must also interlock the start conditions!
Starting the group is only possible if there is a 0-signal at interface GREZ! This is important
when additional routes shall be started while a group is already running.
GRAZ
Feedback OFF
This interface must be connected with a 1-signal if all drives in this group are stopped. It can, for
example, be the first drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives if they are triggered in
parallel. The group feedback OFF limits the switch-off command of the group (reset of GDA
signal) and is necessary for the visualization (group status off).
Depending on whether or not the group has routes, one must use the negated logic signal of the
drives (EVS) or the limit position of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2) or the negated
feedback of the routes WRA. For connection examples refer to the engineering manual.
GLPZ
Caution: Using GLZP the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
GQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If there are several control desks and one wants to
acknowledge separately from each, one connects the corresponding acknowledge signal
(pulse) to this interface.
10
Caution: Using GQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.

GEBG
Command ON
0BGroup C_GROUP
Interface to start the group via the program. The group is switched on with a positive edge at
interface GEBG (signal change from 0 to 1).
GABG
Command OFF
Interface for automatic switch off of the group through the program. With a 1-signal at interface
GABG the group is switched off.
DSIG_BQ
the Faceplate of the group.
REL_A_ST
Release start/stop operating message
A 1-signal at the REL_A_ST interface produces an operating message to be issued as soon as

the group is started and stopped.
REL_A_OP
Release running/stopped operat. Message
A 1-signal at the REL_A_OP interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as

the group runs completely or stops completely.

11
0BGroup C_GROUP
Links
group/route. The status call function for group or route is used to display the details of the fault.
To guarantee this function, every group must be connected with the routes or the objects
(drives, annunciation modules and measured values) that belong to this group from an
annunciation viewpoint.
G_LINK
Associated routes/objects
The G_LINK interface of the group must be connected with the G_LINK interface of the route or
with the GR_LINK interface of the drives, annunciation modules and measured values.
If objects belong to more than 2 routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be called before the
associated object (drive, annunciation module, measured value). C_MUX has five inputs
(GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT)
for the connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive.
This facility permits the objects to be assigned to a maximum of 7 groups/routes. If this also
does not suffice, further C_MUX modules must be switched in sequence.
12

0BGroup C_GROUP
Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Motor1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_DRV_1D
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO

13
0BGroup C_GROUP
Process values
HORN_TIM
Horn time
Default: 10

Value in seconds.
During the start of the group, the GHA signal is set for the duration of the horn time to give an
audible warning.
WAIT_TIM
Waiting time
Default: 15

Value in seconds.
The waiting time is the time between the start of the group and the starting of the drives. The
waiting time must be set long enough to enable people to leave the danger zone.
RELS_TIM
Release time
Default: 300

Value in seconds.
The ON-command of the group required to start the drives is limited to this set release time. The
release time starts when the waiting time elapses and ends
- after the set period of time
- when the group runs completely (GREZ has 1-signal)
- when the group detects a fault
- when the group is switched off.
14

0BGroup C_GROUP
Output interfaces
GBE
Command ON
After a group is started and the waiting time has elapsed the GBE signal is set and it has status
1 until
- the release time has elapsed
- the group runs completely
- the group recognizes a fault
- the group is switched off during the start-up.
Signal GBE is used mainly to start the drives.
GBA
Command OFF
Signal GBA is generated with the group stop. GBA is only a switch-off impulse (1-signal is only
present as long as the OFF-pushbutton is pressed or as long as the OFF-command of the group
is present).
GBA is normally not used for switching off the drives (impulse is too short), however it is used to
reset stored start conditions, e.g. with sporadically operating drives.
GDE
Continuous command ON
Signal GDE is set together with signal GBE and has status 1 until a stop command is given.
Most common application: switching off of the drives through the negated signal GDE.
GDA
Continuous command OFF
Signal GDA is set together with signal GBA and has status 1 until the group is completely
stopped.
One can use signal GDA to switch off the drives. However it is better to use the negated GDE
signal, especially if the drive is to be started/stopped by several groups.
GRE
Feedback ON
Signal GRE has status 1 when the group runs completely, i.e. when interface GREZ of the
group has a 1-signal.
GRA
Feedback OFF
Signal GRA has status 1 when the group is completely switched off, i.e. when interface GRAZ
has a 1-signal.

15
0BGroup C_GROUP
GLO
Local mode
A 1-signal means the group is in local mode.

Connecting Signal GLO to the local release xLOC of all affiliated drives, the local mode of the
drives will be enabled group-wise (by switching the group into local mode).
The local release xLOC of the affiliated drives is connected with signal GLO of the group, i.e.
only if the group is in local mode, is the local mode released by the PLC.
GES
Single-start mode
A 1-signal means the group is in single-start mode.

Connecting Signal GES to the Single start release xEIZ of all affiliated drives, the single start
mode of the drives will be enabled group-wise (by switching the group into single-start mode).
GVG
Selection memory
Signal GVG is set during the start of the group and has status 1 until the group is stopped
completely (interface GRAZ has a 1-signal).
Signal GVG is used for general interlocks. One can, for example, OR the negated signal GVG
with the GRE signal. With this, one has a signal which has status 0 only during the start-up time
and the shut-down time of a group, otherwise it has status 1. This signal could, for example, be
connected to the manual interlock WHVR of the route. Hence, the route changeover is inhibited
for the duration of the start-up and shut-down.
GQS
Quick stop
Signal GQS has status 1 when the pushbutton quick stop on the OS is activated or when
interface GQSP is connected with a 1-signal. This function is meant for suppressing the stop
delay of the drives and for the immediate stopping of the group.
If quick stop is required, one must connect interface QSTP of drives E and V with signal GQS of
the corresponding group.
GST
Fault
Signal GST has status 1 if there are dynamic or static faults in the group.
GSD
Fault dynamic
If there is a dynamic fault (alarm) GSD has 1-signal. After quit the GSD becomes 0-signal.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
ACK
Acknowledge group-wise
By pressing the button AS-Ack in the faceplate of the group this output becomes 1-signal for
one cycle. In order to permit group-wise acknowledgement one has to connect this output to the
acknowledgement interface xQIT of all objects belonging to the group (e. g. EQIT for
C_DRV_1D).
16

0BGroup C_GROUP
Hardware outputs
GZV
Group interlocked lamp
Signal GZV can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available).
A 0-signal means that no interlock is present. A blinking light means a dynamic (not
acknowledged) interlock and a continuous light means a static (already acknowledged) interlock
of the group.
GZS
Group fault lamp
Signal GZS can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available).
A 0-signal means that no fault is present. A blinking light means a dynamic (not acknowledged)
fault and a continuous light means a static (already acknowledged) fault of the group.
GZB
Group operation lamp
Signal GZB can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available).
A 0-signal means that the group is not running. A continuous light means that the group is
running completely and a blinking light means the start-up or shut-down of the group.
GLA
Start-up warning lamp
With the start of the group (setting of signal GVG) signal GLA is also set. It has status 1 until the
start-up process is completed, i.e.
- the group runs completely (GREZ has 1-signal) or
- the release time has elapsed or
- the group recognizes a fault or
- the group is switched off.
Signal GLA of the group can be allocated to an output in order to switch on a warning lamp.
GHA
Start-up warning horn
Signal GHA is set during the start of the group. It has status 1 until the set horn time has
elapsed (process value).
Signal GHA of the group can be allocated to an output to switch on the horn.

17
0BGroup C_GROUP
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS
STA2_OS
Status display interlocked for OS
Interface to OS
NO_OF_FT
Number in status call buffer for OS
Interface to OS
FT1
Cell in status call buffer for OS
FT2
.
.
FT30
Interface to OS
18

0BGroup C_GROUP
The module must be called after the associated objects and routes.
group

Module states
Status display of the group:
1st column: A (white) = automatic
L (yellow) = local
S (blue)
= single mode
2nd column: O (green) = operation (white if incomplete; arrows for start-up /shutdown)
3rd column: F (red)
= fault
4th column: I (yellow)
= interlock

19
0BGroup C_GROUP
Variable STATUS:
Status/Text Display Operating Mode
Display
Symbol
Automatic
Black, white
Local
Black, yellow
Single-start
Black, blue
Status/Text Display Operation
Display
Symbol
Text
Presentation
Group not in operation
Gray, gray
start-up in automatic mode
Black, green
blinking
Black, white
shut-down in automatic mode
Black, green
blinking
Black, white
running
Black, green
not completely started
Black, white
blinking
Black, white
does not run completely anymore
Black, green
blinking
Black, white
start command ON
Black, green
blinking
Black, white
Status/Text Display Fault
Display
Gray, gray
In STOP + fault
White, red
Not in STOP + fault not acknowledged
White, red
Not in STOP + fault acknowledged
White, red
No interlock
Display
Black, white
Symbol
No fault
Status/Text Display Interlocked
Black, white
blinking
Symbol
Gray, gray
Interlocked
Interlock resulted in switch-off
Black, yellow
blinking
Commands
20

0BGroup C_GROUP
I/O-bar of C_GROUP
C_GROUP
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
Group pushbutton OFF
BOOL
GTE
Group pushbutton ON
BOOL
GEVG
Start interlock
BOOL
GBVG
Operating interlock
BOOL
GAVG
BOOL
GAFS
Start-up warning
external trigger
BOOL
GUMS
Changeover signal start-up

warning
BOOL
GASL
Delete selection memory
BOOL
GSAZ
Supplementary fault
(dynamic)
BOOL
GSTZ
BOOL
GFGS
Release signal (additional)
BOOL
GFTR
enable start re-trigger
BOOL
GQSP
Quick stop
BOOL
GPTS
Release of control desk

pushbuttons
BOOL
GREZ
Feedback ON
BOOL
GRAZ
Feedback OFF
BOOL
GLPZ
BOOL
GQIT
BOOL
GEBG
Command ON
BOOL
GABG
Command OFF
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
BOOL
REL_A_ST
Release operating message

start/stop
BOOL
REL_A_OP

running/stopped
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Element
Meaning
GTA
DWORD DW#16#0

HMI
Permitted
Values
21
0BGroup C_GROUP
22
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
W#16#0
HORN_TIM
Horn time
INT
WAIT_TIM
Waiting time
INT
15
RELS_TIM
Release time
INT
300
INTFC_OS
DWORD DW#16#0
STATUS
DWORD DW#16#0
STA2_OS
Status display interlocked for

OS
DWORD DW#16#0
ALARM
Alarm word for test
NO_OF_FT
WORD
W#16#0
Number in status call buffer
INT
FT1
Cell in status call buffer
INT
FT2
INT
FT3
INT
FT4
INT
FT5
INT
FT6
INT
FT7
INT
FT8
INT
FT9
INT
FT10
INT
FT11
INT
FT12
INT
FT13
INT
FT14
INT
FT15
INT
FT16
INT
FT17
INT
FT18
INT
Permitted
Values

0BGroup C_GROUP
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
INT
FT20
INT
FT21
INT
FT22
INT
FT23
INT
FT24
INT
FT25
INT
FT26
INT
FT27
INT
FT28
INT
FT29
INT
FT30
INT
GBE
Command ON
BOOL
GBA
Command OFF
BOOL
GDE
BOOL
GDA
Continuous command OFF
BOOL
GRE
Feedback ON
BOOL
GRA
Feedback OFF
BOOL
GLO
Local mode
BOOL
GES
Single start mode
BOOL
GVG
Selection memory
BOOL
GQS
Quick stop
BOOL
GST
Fault
BOOL
GSD
Fault dynamic
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
BOOL
ACK
BOOL
GZV
Group interlocked lamp
BOOL
Element
Meaning
FT19

Permitted
Values
23
0BGroup C_GROUP
24

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
Group fault lamp
BOOL
GZB
Group operation lamp
BOOL
GLA
Start-up warning lamp
BOOL
GHA
Start-up warning horn
BOOL
G_LINK
Associated groups/objects
INT
Element
Meaning
GZS
HMI
Permitted
Values

Schnellstop
Quick stop
Fault acknowledgement
OFF
ON
single-start mode
Automatic ON
local mode
Group status call-up
Commandword
Designation English
QSTP
ACK
STP
STA
RSON
AUTON
RLON
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Strung Quittieren
AUS
EIN
Einzelbetrieb EIN
Automatik EIN
Vorortbetrieb EIN
Gruppen-Zustandsaufruf
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Commandword
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GRUZU
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Designation German
Commandword
S7-Par-Name
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
QSTP
RS ON
AUT ON
RL ON
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
25
0BGroup C_GROUP
F_FAULT
F_NQT
VIS_OP13
VIS_OP14
VIS_OP15
GBE
GBA
GDE
GDA
GRE
GRA
GLO
GES
GVG
GLA
GHA
GST
GSD
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
26
O_DOWN
STA_B46
STA_B47
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
6
7
Anwahlspeicher
Lampe Anfahrwarnung
Hupe Anfahrwarnung
Strung
Strung dynamisch
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Dauerbefehl Ein
Dauerbefehl Aus
Rckmeldung Ein
Rckmeldung Aus
Betriebsart Vorort
Betriebsart Einzelstart
Visu-SS for operation

Strung
Auslauf im Automatikbetrieb
luft nicht mehr vollstndig
O_NIOANY
STA_B45
Status
Gruppe steht
Start im Automatikbetrieb
Startbefehl ein
luft vollstnding
nicht vollstndig angelaufen
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
0
1
2
3
4
O_NIO
O_START
O_GBE
O_IOP
O_NFUSTA
StatusWord
0BGroup C_GROUP
Status
Pre-selection flag
Start-up-warning lamp
Start-up-warning horn
Fault
Fault dynamic
Command On
Command Off
Continuous Command On
Continuous Command Off
Feedback On
Feedback Off
Local mode
Single-start mode

Fault acknowledged
Group not in operation

Start-up in automatic mode
Start command ON
Completely running
not completely started
does not run completely
anymore
shut-down in automatic mode
S,O
Bit
16Bit

I_INT
I_NQT
STA2_B30
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
REL_A_ST
REL_A_OP
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
Gruppentaste AUS
Gruppentaste EIN
Gruppenzustand verriegelt
Gruppenzustand Strung
Gruppenzustand Betrieb
Sequenz Test
Bad Quality
verriegelt
verriegelung fhrt zum Stop
Automatic
Vorort
Einzelbetrieb
24 Start/Stop
25 luft/steht
26
27
28
29
30
31 Quittieren gruppenweise
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start/stop
On/off
Group key OFF

Group key ON
Group status interlocked
Group status Fault
Group status Operation
Sequence Test
Bad Quality
interlocking
Stopped by interlocking
Automatic mode
Local mode
Single mode
ACK_GR
GTA
GTE
GZV
GZS
GZB
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
SQT
BQU
M_AUTO
M_LOCAL
M_SINGLE
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
STATUS2
D
Bit
16Bit
27
0BGroup C_GROUP
ALA_B10
ALA_B11
ALA_B12
ALA_B13
ALA_B14
ALA_B15
ALA_B16
ALA_B17
28
Hupzeit
Wartezeit
Freigabezeit
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALA_STOP
ALA_START
ALA_IOP
ALA_NIO
ALA_B24
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_B27
HORN_TIM
WAIT_TIM
RELS_TIM
Alarm
Gruppe Stop
Gruppe Start
Gruppe luft
Gruppe steht
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AlarmWord
0BGroup C_GROUP
Alarm
Start up warning time

Waiting time
Release time
Group Stop
Group Start
Group is running
Group stopped
D
D
D
xxx
xxx
xxxx
I/O
I/O
I/O
0-999
0-999
0-9999
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
OM
HORN_TIM
WAIT_TIM
RELS_TIM
STOP
START
luft
steht
sec.
sec.
sec.
GSAZ
GSTZ
GFGS
GFTR
GQSP
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
GEBG
GABG
GQIT
GLPZ
GREZ
GRAZ
Freigabe Pulttasten
Strungszusatz (dynamisch)
Strungszusatz (statisch)
Freigabesignal
Freigabe-Triggerung
Schnellstop
Anfahrsignal
Umschaltung Signal
Anfahrwarnung
Anwahlspeicher lschen
(GVG)
Anzahl gestrter Objekte
24 Quittierung (Zusatz)
25
26
27 Befehl Ein
28 Befehl Aus
29
30
31
16
17 Rckmeldung Ein
18 Rckmeldung Aus
19
20
21
22
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Number of faulty objects
Command ON
Command OFF
Acknowledgement (additional)
Feedback ON
Feedback OFF
Release of pushbuttons

Release signal (additional)
Release - triggering
Quick stop
Delete Group selection (GVG)
Start-up signal
Signal start-up warning
method
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Interfaceflags
NO_OF_FT
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
GASL
OS_IF_B47
GPTS
GAFS
GUMS
OS_IF_B46
Ausschaltverriegelung
0
1
2
3
4
5
Nahtstellen-Zustand
GEVG
GBVG
GAVG
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
INTFC_OS
GZ
Bit
32Bit
29
0BGroup C_GROUP
30
FT1
FT2
FT3
FT4
FT5
FT6
FT7
FT8
FT9
FT10
FT11
FT12
FT13
FT14
FT15
FT16
FT17
FT18
FT19
FT20
FT21
FT22
FT23
FT24
FT25
FT26
FT27
FT28
FT29
FT30
0BGroup C_GROUP
Fehlerhaftes Objekt 1
Faulty object 1
Faulty object 2
Faulty object 3
Faulty object 4
Faulty object 5
Faulty object 6
Faulty object 7
Faulty object 8
Faulty object 9
Faulty object 10
Faulty object 11
Faulty object 12
Faulty object 13
Faulty object 14
Faulty object 15
Faulty object 16
Faulty object 17
Faulty object 18
Faulty object 19
Faulty object 20
Faulty object 21
Faulty object 22
Faulty object 23
Faulty object 24
Faulty object 25
Faulty object 26
Faulty object 27
Faulty object 28
Faulty object 29
Faulty object 30
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0BGroup C_GROUP
Description of C_MUX
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_MUX
FC1017
Calling OBs
OB1 (MAIN-TASK)
Function
The C_MUX module is used when an object for the status call is assigned to more than 2
groups and/or routes.
Each object can be directly assigned to a maximum of 2 groups and/or routes. If more
groups/routes are needed, one or, if necessary, more C_MUX must be connected up-stream.
The C_MUX must lie before the Object-FB in the call sequence.
31
0BGroup C_GROUP
Operating principle
Input interfaces
MUX_IN
To connect several C_MUX modules
To connect several C_MUX modules, the MUX_OUT output of a C_MUX must be connected
with the MUX_IN input of the next C_MUX.
Caution: The MUX_IN interface may only be connected with a MUX_OUT signal of another
C_MUX module! Note that the upstream C_MUX must also run beforehand in the processing
sequence!
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
Output interfaces
MUX_OUT
Connection with the objects
The MUX_OUT interface must be connected with the MUX_LINK interface of the objects.
32
Caution:
The C_MUX must be called before the object FB!
0BGroup C_GROUP
I/O-bar of C_MUX
C_MUX
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Type
MUX_IN
To connect several C_MUX

modules
INT
GR_LINK1
Associated route/group
INT
GR_LINK2
INT
GR_LINK3
INT
GR_LINK4
INT
GR_LINK5
INT
MUX_OUT
Connection with the objects
INT
Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
33
Cemat V 7.0
Route C_ROUTE
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BRoute C_ROUTE
ROUTE C_ROUTE
Description of C_ROUTE
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Links
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
6
6
7
10
12
12
14
15
15
15
17
I/O-bar of C_ROUTE
18
OS variables table
21

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_ROUTE_009.doc
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Description of C_ROUTE
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_ROUTE
FB1009
Calling OBs
C_ROUTE must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Function
The route is a module for the selection of transport directions within a group.
The route module allows the visualization of the operational conditions for a transport direction
within a plant section, displayed as a status display, and a detailed fault diagnosis (status call).
Depending on the selected transport direction, only certain drives of the group are triggered. For
the visualization of the operational conditions of the group as well, only those drives which
belong to the selected transport direction are analysed. For this, one must assign to a route all
the drives, messages and measured values, which belong to that transport direction.
The route can be selected and deselected with conventional control desk pushbuttons, via the
OS or through the program.
The group start/stop is passed on to the drives through the selected route. The feedback of the
drives is transferred to the group through the selected route. The display of the faults and
interlocks of the group refers to the selected routes.
Following states are displayed in the block icon of the route:
Fault:
Interlocked:
Operation:
Locked
:
Fault in an object that is assigned to the route

Interlock of the route
Operational condition of the route (deselected, pre-selected, etc.)
Selection changeover released or locked (manual interlocking).
The route generates operation annunciations for pre-selection and de-selection.

With a status call of the route, all present drive faults/interlocks, measured values and process
signals of a transport direction can be queried. At a group with routes, the group status call
effects only the selected routes of the group.

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
WVT
Pre-selection ON/OFF Pushbutton
If the route is to be selected/deselected using a conventional control desk key, the WVT
parameter must be connected with the input signal of the pushbutton. A 1-signal at WVT
parameter results in selection when the route has been deselected and in de-selection when the
route has been pre-selected. Two-handed operation is needed to pre-select/deselect the route
using control desk pushbuttons. WVT and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed
simultaneously.
Caution: The control desk pushbutton can be used only when the GPTS interface (control
desk pushbutton release) is connected with a 1-signal and in the system chard "SYSPLCxx" the
parameter "FGS" of the block C_PUSHBT is connected with a signal (release button).

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Input interfaces
WEVG
Start interlock
A 0-signal at interface WEVG prevents the setting of route selection WVW. Via interface WEVG
one can interlock mutually several routes.
The start interlock is visualized in the status display of the routes. If one wants to see the reason
for the interlock in the status call of the route, one must program an annunciation module and
assign it to the route (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
WBVG
Operating interlock
A 0-signal at interface WBVG prevents the setting of route selection WVW. An already operating
route is switched off if the operating interlock is missing.
The operating interlock is visualized in the status display of the routes. If one wants to see the
reason for the interlock in the status call of the route, one must program an annunciation module
and assign it to the route (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
WHVR
Manual interlock
A 0-signal at interface WHVR locks the route changeover via pushbutton or through the OS.
E.g., with this one can prevent a route from being deselected while a group is running or prevent
a route changeover from being possible during start-up and slow-down.
WPTS
Release of control desk pushbuttons
In the basic state, the route changeover is released via the OS. The control desk pushbuttons
are locked. By connecting this interface with a 1-signal the control desk pushbuttons are
released and operation via OS is blocked.
WUUS
Release Pre-selection OFF WVWL
The delete pre-selection function (interface WVWL) and the setting of the changeover flag WUM
is possible only if interface WUUS is connected with a 1-signal.
For details of the application of the interface for an uninterrupted route changeover refer to the
engineering manual.
WSAZ
A possibility for connecting with dynamic faults which cannot automatically be acquired via
drives and annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface WSAZ and selected route the
group indicates dynamic faults.
Caution: If the interface is to behave exactly like a drive fault one must ensure that the
interface becomes 0 after the acknowledgement.
WSTZ
A possibility for connecting with static faults which cannot automatically be acquired drives and
annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface WSTZ of the selected route the group
indicates static faults.

0BRoute C_ROUTE
WREZ
Feedback ON
The WREZ interface must have status 1-signal if all drives of the route are running. It can be, for
example, the last drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives which are triggered in
parallel.
The connection is made through the logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit positions of the
dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2).
Caution: Please observe the connection examples in the engineering manual because one
must also interlock the starting condition for sporadically operating drives!
WRAZ
Feedback OFF
The WRAZ interface must have status 1-signal if all drives of the route are stopped. It can be,
for example, the first drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives which are triggered in
parallel.
The connection is made through the negated logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit
positions of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2).
WVWT
Pre-selection ON/OFF
Interface WVWT is synonymous with module parameter WVT. Signal change from 0 to 1 at
WVWT or WVT effects a route changeover, i.e. the pre-selected route is deselected and the
deselected route is pre-selected.
Attention: The parameter is effective only when in the system chard "SYSPLCxx" the parameter
"FGS" of the block C_PUSHBT is connected with a signal (release button)
WVWE
Pre-selection ON
Via a 1-signal at interface WVWE one can pre-select a route through the program (e.g. through
a process signal). This function is required for automatic route changeovers.
WVWA
Selection OFF
WVWA has a similar effect as signal GASL of the group. (With a 1-signal at the interface
WVWA, an OFF feedback is simulated to the route.) For this the route must already be
deselected and switched off. (WVE and WDE must have a 0-signal).
Application with uninterrupted route changeover:
Route selection WVW is normally cancelled only if the complete route is stationary. Since for an
uninterrupted changeover there are always some drives continuing to operate, this is actually
never the case. The cancelling of the route selection must be done artificially with WVWA.
(See also uninterrupted route changeover in the engineering manual!)
WVWL
Pre-selection OFF
A 1-Signal at interface WVWL deletes the route pre-selection (WVE). With a running route,
signal WBA is set for switching off the drives. By means of interface WVWL the route can be
deselected via program (e.g. through pre-selection of another route or through a process
signal).
For this function the parameter WUUS must have 1-signal.

WLPZ
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Caution: Using WLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be
connected.
WEBW
Command ON
Interface WEBW must be connected with the GBE-signal of the associated group. During the
start of the group (1-signal at interface WEBW) the selected route sets the ON command WBE
to start the drives.
WGWA
Command OFF
Interface WGWA must be connected with the GDA-signal or the negated GDE-signal of the
associated group. During the stop of the group (1-signal at interface WGWA) the selected route
sets the OFF command WBA to stop the drives.
DSIG_BQ
the Faceplate of the motor.
REL_A_SL
Release select/deselect operating message
A 1-signal at the REL_A_SL interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as

the route gets selected or deselected.
REL_A_OP
Release running/stopped operating message Basic state 0-signal
A 1-signal at the REL_A_OP interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as

the route runs completely or stops completely.

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Links
group/route. The status call function for group or route is used to display the details of the fault.
To guarantee this function, every group must be connected with the routes or the objects
(drives, annunciation modules and measured values) that belong to this group from an
annunciation viewpoint.
G_LINK
Associated groups
The G_LINK interface of the group must be connected with the G_LINK interface of the route.
R_LINK
Associated objects
The R_LINK interface of the route must be connected with the GR_LINK interface of the drives,
annunciation modules and measured values.
If objects belong to more than 2 routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be called before the
associated object (drive, annunciation module, measured value). C_MUX has five inputs
(GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT)
for the connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive.
This facility permits the objects to be assigned to a maximum of 7 groups/routes. If this also
does not suffice, further C_MUX modules must be switched in sequence.
10

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Group1
C_Group
Route1
MAIN_TASK
C_Route
Motor1
MAIN_TASK
1/5
G_LINK
C_DRV_1D
1/3
R_LINK
I
MAIN_TASK
1/2
G_LINK
Route2
C_Route
MAIN_TASK
1/4
Group2
C_Group
R_LINK
MAIN_TASK
G_LINK
1/6
G_LINK
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
Group3
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
MUX1
1/7
C_MUX
G_LINK
Group4
C_Group
MAIN_TASK
1/8
G_LINK
MAIN_TASK
1/1
BO
EN
MUX_IN
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
ENO
BO
MUX_OUT
BO
Caution: Observe the processing sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the
drive. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated
routes and finally the associated groups.

11
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Process values
There are no process values for the route.
Output interfaces
WBE
Command ON
With a 1-signal at interface WEBW the route generates signal WBE.

For this, the route must be selected (WVW and WVE be set) and operating interlock WBVG
must have a 1-signal.
Signal WBE is mainly used for starting the drives.
WBA
Command OFF
WBA is the signal of the route to stop the drives. WBA depends on pre-selection memory WVW
and has status 1
- if the selected route is switched off (group stop or route changeover),
- during de-selection of the route,
- if the operating interlock is not present anymore.
WDE
Signal WDE is set together with signal WBE and has status 1 until the route is switched off.
Most common application: Switch-off of the drives through negated signal WDE instead of WBA.
WRE
Feedback ON
Signal WRE has status 1 if the route runs completely i.e. if interface WREZ of the route is
connected with 1-signal.
The WRE-signal is applied to connect to the group feedback ON.
WRA
Feedback OFF
Signal WRA has status 0 if the route is completely at stop or if the route is not selected (WVW
has 0-signal).
The negated WRA-signal is applied to connect to the group feedback OFF.
WVE
Route pre-selected
Signal WVE has status 1 if the route is pre-selected. The following have an effect on signal
WVE:
- the route pre-selection key (WVT)
- a programmed route changeover via interfaces (WVWE, WVWL, WVWT)
- the commands from the OS (Pre-selection ON, Pre-selection OFF, Changeover).
12

WVW
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Route selected
Signal WVW stores pre-selection WVE depending on the operational condition of the route.
With a switched off route and when all interlocks are OK, signal WVW corresponds to signal
WVE, that means, both have exactly the same status.
Set condition: The route sets signal WVW if, together with the 1-signal of WVE, the operating
interlock and the start interlock (WBVG and WEVG) also have 1-signal.
Reset condition: To reset WVW one must deselect the route (WVE and WDE must have a 0signal) and the route must be completely switched off (connecting interface WRAZ or WVWA
with 1-signal).
WVW and WVE can both be used for interlocking purposes. WVE expresses the pre-selection
of the route (route pre-selected) and WVW the status of the route selection (route selected).
WUM
Route changeover flag
Signal WUM is present for the duration of the route changeover.

Set condition: Signal WUM is set with the route pre-selection (interface WVWE or WVWT, OS
command or route pre-selection key WVT).
Reset condition is the route feedback ON (WREZ) or the de-selection of the route (negated
WVE signal).
The route module sets the changeover flag only if one connects interface WUUS (uninterrupted
changeover) with a 1-signal.
You will find an example of the application of signal WUM in the uninterrupted route changeover
in the engineering manual).
WST
Fault
Signal WST has status 1 if the route has a dynamic or static fault.
GSD
Fault dynamic
If there is a dynamic fault (alarm) GSD has 1-signal. After quit the GSD becomes 0-signal.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
Hardware outputs
WVL
Route pre-selection lamp
The WVL signal can be applied to connect a control desk lamp (when no visualization system is
present). A continuous light indicates the pre-selection of the route. A flashing light indicates an
interlock or a fault. A 0-signal indicates that the route has been deselected.

13
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
INTFC_OS
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS
STATUS2
Status 2
Interface to OS
NO_OF_FT
Number in status call buffer for OS
Interface to OS
FT1
FT2
.
.
FT30
Interface to OS
14

0BRoute C_ROUTE
The module must be called after the associated objects and before the associated group.
group

Module states
Status display of the route:
1st column: L (blue)
= locked
2nd column: D (white)

P (green)
S (green)
O (green)
= deselected
= pre-selected
= selected
= operation (all drives are running, dampers in limit position)
3rd column: F (red)
= fault
= interlock

15
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Variable STATUS:
Display
Text Presentation
deselected
Black, white
locked + deselected
Black, white
deselected + fault
Black, white
locked + deselected + fault
Black, white
Pre-selected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
locked + pre-selected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
Pre-selected + interlocked
Black, white
locked + pre-selected + interlocked
Black, white
selected
Black, white
10
locked + selected
Black, white
11
selected + fault
Black, white
12
locked + selected + fault
Black, white
13
selected + fault not acknowledged
Black, white
S
14
Black, white
locked + selected + fault not acknowledged

S
15
selected + interlocked
Black, white
16
locked + selected + interlocked
Black, white
17
completely running
Black, white
18
locked + completely running
Black, white
19
completely running + fault
Black, white
20
locked + completely running + fault
Black, white
21
completely running + fault not ackn.
Black, white
S
22
Black, white
locked + completely running + fault not ack.

S
23
deselected + interlocked
Black, white
24
locked + deselected + interlocked
Black, white
25
deselected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
26
locked + deselected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
27
selected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
28
locked + selected + fault + interlocked
Black, white
29
selected + fault not ack. + interlocked
30
locked + selected + fault not ack. + interlocked
31
deselected + fault not ack.
S
S
Black, white
Black, white
Black, white
S= blinking
16

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Remark :
The indication "selected" will be still displayed even after deselecting the route until all drives
are stopped. To distinguish this, the symbol will be shown with the colours black/white.
Commands

17
0BRoute C_ROUTE
I/O-bar of C_ROUTE
C_ROUTE
18
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
Route pre-selection
pushbutton
BOOL
WEVG
Start interlock
BOOL
WBVG
Operating interlock
BOOL
WHVR
Manual interlock
BOOL
WPTS
Release of control desk

pushbuttons
BOOL
WUUS
Uninterrupted route
changeover
BOOL
WSAZ
Supplementary fault
(dynamic)
BOOL
WSTZ
BOOL
WREZ
Feedback ON
BOOL
WRAZ
Feedback OFF
BOOL
WVWT
Pre-selection ON/OFF
BOOL
WVWE
Pre-selection ON
BOOL
WVWA
Selection OFF
BOOL
WVWL
Pre-selection OFF
BOOL
WLPZ
BOOL
WEBW
Command ON
BOOL
WGWA
Command OFF
BOOL
DSIG_BQ
BOOL
REL_A_SL

select/deselect
BOOL
REL_A_OP

running/stopped
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
G_LINK
Association to the group
INTFC_OS
Element
Meaning
WVT
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
INT
DWORD DW#16#0
HMI
Permitted
Values

0BRoute C_ROUTE
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
STATUS
WORD
W#16#0
STATUS2
Block output status for OS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
NO_OF_FT
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
Number in status call buffer
INT
FT1
INT
FT2
INT
FT3
INT
FT4
INT
FT5
INT
FT6
INT
FT7
INT
FT8
INT
FT9
INT
FT10
INT
FT11
INT
FT12
INT
FT13
INT
FT14
INT
FT15
INT
FT16
INT
FT17
INT
FT18
INT
FT19
INT
FT20
INT
FT21
INT
FT22
INT
FT23
INT

Permitted
Values
19
0BRoute C_ROUTE
20

Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMI
INT
FT25
INT
FT26
INT
FT27
INT
FT28
INT
FT29
INT
FT30
INT
WBE
Command ON
BOOL
WBA
Command OFF
BOOL
WDE
BOOL
WRE
Feedback ON
BOOL
WRA
Feedback OFF
BOOL
WVE
Route pre-selected
BOOL
WVW
Route selected
BOOL
WUM
BOOL
WST
Fault
BOOL
WSD
BOOL
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
BOOL
WVL
BOOL
R_LINK
Associated objects
INT
Element
Meaning
FT24
Permitted
Values

SEL_OFF
SEL_ON
8
9 Vorwahl AUS
10 Vorwahl EIN
11
12
13
14
15
Selection OFF
Selection ON
Route status call-up
Commandword
Designation English
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
Wege-Zustandsaufruf
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Commandword
WEGZU
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Designation German
Commandword
S7-Par-Name
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var
Output Level
O
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
Presentation
Number/NK
21
0BRoute C_ROUTE
FAULT
NQT
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
22
Alarm
Weg Abwahl
Weg Anwahl
Weg luft
Weg steht
ALA_DSEL
ALA_SEL
ALA_IOP
ALA_NIO
ALA_B24
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_B27
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AlarmWord
8 Strung
9 Strung nicht quittiert
10
11
12
13
14
15
Status
Abgewhlt
Vorgewhlt
Gewhlt
luft vollstndig
Verriegelt
Gesperrt
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESEL
PRESEL
SEL
IOP
INT
LOCK
StatusWord
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Status
Route deselection
Route pre-selection
Route running
Route stopped
Alarm
Fault acknowledged
Deselected
Pre-selected
Selected
Completely running
Interlocked
Locked
S,O
16Bit
OM
OM
OM
OM
Abwahl
Anwahl
luft
steht
Bit
WVT
WVL
REL_A_SL
REL_A_OP
Wegvorwahltaste
Wegvorwahllampe
Freigabe Meldung (Start/Stop)
Freigabe Meldung (luft/Steht)
Sequenz Test
Bad Quality
Moduleflags
Route pre-selection key

Release annunciation (Start/Stop)
Release annunciation (run/stop)
Sequence Test
Bad Quality
Fault
Fault dynamic
Command On
Command Off
Continuous Command On
Feedback On
Feedback Off
Pre-selection ON
Route selected
STA2_B10
STA2_B11
STA2_B12
STA2_B13
STA2_B14
STA2_B15
STA2_B16
STA2_B17
STA2_B20
STA2_B21
STA2_B22
STA2_B23
STA2_B24
STA2_B25
STA2_B26
STA2_B27
SQT
BQU
Strung
Strung dynamisch
WST
WSD
STA2_B30
STA2_B31
STA2_B32
STA2_B33
STA2_B34
STA2_B35
STA2_B36
STA2_B37
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bausteinausgnge
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Dauerbefehl Ein
Rckmeldung Ein
Rckmeldung Aus
Vorwahl Ein
Weg gewhlt
Wegeumschaltmerker
STA2_B40
STA2_B41
STA2_B42
STA2_B43
STA2_B44
STA2_B45
STA2_B46
STA2_B47
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WBE
WBA
WDE
WRE
WRA
WVE
WVW
WUM
STATUS2
D
Bit
16Bit
23
0BRoute C_ROUTE
24
OS_IF_B10
OS_IF_B11
OS_IF_B12
OS_IF_B13
OS_IF_B14
OS_IF_B15
OS_IF_B16
OS_IF_B17
OS_IF_B20
OS_IF_B21
OS_IF_B22
OS_IF_B23
OS_IF_B24
OS_IF_B25
OS_IF_B26
OS_IF_B27
OS_IF_B30
OS_IF_B31
OS_IF_B32
OS_IF_B33
OS_IF_B34
OS_IF_B35
OS_IF_B36
OS_IF_B37
WEBW
WGWA
WVWL
WLPZ
WVWT
WVWE
WVWA
WREZ
WRAZ
WSAZ
WSTZ
WUUS
Release of Pushbuttons
Start interlock
Operating interlock
Manual interlock
Interfaceflags
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Befehl Ein
Befehl Aus
Vorwahl lschen
Vorwahl-Taste
Vorwahl Ein
Vorwahl Aus
Rckmeldung Ein
Rckmeldung Aus
Command ON
Command OFF
De-selection
Pre-selection key
Pre-selection ON
Pre-selection OFF
Feedback ON
Feedback OFF
8 Unterbrechungsfreie Umschaltung Uninterrupted Route changeover

9
10
11
12
13 Strungszusatz (dynamisch)
14 Strungszusatz (statisch)
15
Freigabe Pulttasten
Handverriegelung
WPTS
Nahtstellen-Zustand
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OS_IF_B40
OS_IF_B41
OS_IF_B42
OS_IF_B43
OS_IF_B44
OS_IF_B45
OS_IF_B46
OS_IF_B47
WEVG
WBVG
WHVR
INTFC_OS
0BRoute C_ROUTE
32Bit

Bit
FT1
FT2
FT3
FT4
FT5
FT6
FT7
FT8
FT9
FT10
FT11
FT12
FT13
FT14
FT15
FT16
FT17
FT18
FT19
FT20
FT21
FT22
FT23
FT24
FT25
FT26
FT27
FT28
FT29
FT30
Faulty object 1
Faulty object 2
Faulty object 3
Faulty object 4
Faulty object 5
Faulty object 6
Faulty object 7
Faulty object 8
Faulty object 9
Faulty object 10
Faulty object 11
Faulty object 12
Faulty object 13
Faulty object 14
Faulty object 15
Faulty object 16
Faulty object 17
Faulty object 18
Faulty object 19
Faulty object 20
Faulty object 21
Faulty object 22
Faulty object 23
Faulty object 24
Faulty object 25
Faulty object 26
Faulty object 27
Faulty object 28
Faulty object 29
Faulty object 30
Number of faulty objects
Anzahl gestrter Objekte
NO_OF_FT
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
GZ
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
25
0BRoute C_ROUTE
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Selection C_SELECT
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BSelection C_SELECT
SELECTION C_SELECT
Description of C_SELECT
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
Input interfaces
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
8
8
9
9
I/O-bar of C_SELECT
10
OS variables table
11

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_SELECT_009.doc
Description of C_SELECT
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_SELECT
FB1013
Calling OBs
C_SELECT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The selection module can be used for any kind of selection function. In contrast to the route, it
does not provide detailed fault analysis (status call). But, on the other hand, the selection is
relatively simple to handle and can be easily used for the selection of individual drives.
Selection and de-selection can be done via the OS or through the program. During selection
signal AZE is set, which may be used, e.g. to interlock drives.
The status of the selection module (ON, OFF, interlocked) can be visualized.
The selection module generates operating messages for selection and de-selection.

Operating principle
Hardware inputs
The selection module does not have any parameters for hardware inputs.
Input interfaces
AAUS
Selection OFF
With a 1-signal at interface AAUS and a 1-signal at interface AAVG the selection memory AZE
is reset by the program.
AAVG
De-selection interlock
A 0-signal at interface AAVG prevents the resetting of the selection memory. The de-selection
interlock is visualized in the status display.
AEIN
Selection ON
With a 1-signal at interface AEIN and a 1-signal at interface AEVG the selection memory AZE
is set by the program.
AEVG
Selection interlock
A 0-signal at interface AEVG prevents the setting of the selection memory. The selection
interlock is visualized in the status display.
REL_ANNU
Release operating message Select/deselect
A 1-signal at the REL_ANNU interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as a

selection or de-selection is carried out.

Process values
There are no process values for the selection module.
Output interfaces
AZE
Selection memory
Signal AZE has status 1 with selection ON, status 0 means selection OFF.
Selection memory AZE is used to evaluate selection, e.g. to select sporadically operating drives.
Hardware outputs
There are no hardware module outputs for the selection module.

Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS
Test interface
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
Interface to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
STATUS
Interface to OS

The run sequence can be chosen as desired for the selection module.
group


Module states
Status display of the selection module:
2nd column: D (white) = deselected
S (green) = selected
= interlocked
Variable STATUS:
Display
Text Presentation
deselected
Black, white
deselected + interlocked
Black, white
selected
Black, white
selected + interlocked
Black, white
Commands

I/O-bar of C_SELECT
C_SELECT
10
Format
Default
Typ
e
Start interlock
BOOL
AAVG
BOOL
AEIN
Selection
BOOL
AAUS
De-selection
BOOL
REL_ANNU
Release operational
annunciations
BOOL
TEST_OSS
Must not be changed
INT
MSG8_EVID
Message ID
COMMAND
Command word
STATUS
ALARM
Alarm word for test
WORD
W#16#0
AZE
Selected
BOOL
Element
Meaning
AEVG
DWORD DW#16#0
WORD
W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values

S7-Par-Name
8
9 Abwahl
10 Anwahl
11
12
13
14
15
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
DESEL
SEL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Commandword
Designation German
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
CommandWord
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var.
Deselect
Select
Commandword
Designation English
Output Level
O
Presentation
Number/NK
Bit
Type
I/O
Value
Range
16Bit
Annun. Class
OM
OM
De Sel
SEL
Event Text
Fault Class
Unit
11
12
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
AEVG
AAVG
AEIN
AAUS
REL_ANNU
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
STA_B30
STA_B31
STA_B32
STA_B33
STA_B34
STA_B35
STA_B36
STA_B37
Ausschaltverriegelung
Anwahl
Abwahl
Freigabe Meldung
Status
Gewhlt
Verriegelt
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STA_B40
STA_B41
STA_B42
STA_B43
STA_B44
STA_B45
STA_B46
STA_B47
SELECTED
INT
StatusWord
Status
Selection interlock
Deselection interlock
Select
Deselect
Release Annunciation
Selected
Interlocked
S,O
Bit
16Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALA_SEL
ALA_DSEL
ALA_B22
ALA_B23
ALA_B24
ALA_B25
ALA_B26
ALA_B27
ALA_B10
ALA_B11
ALA_B12
ALA_B13
ALA_B14
ALA_B15
ALA_B16
ALA_B17
Abgewhlt
Alarm
Angewhlt
AlarmWord
Alarm
Deselected
Selected
OM
OM
SEL
DESE
L
13
Cemat V 7.0
Interlock C_INTERL
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BInterlock C_INTERL
INTERLOCK C_INTERL
Description of C_INTERL
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input Interfaces
Output Interfaces
Engineering
Error handling
Time response
Assignment of the 32-bit status word VSTATUS
Monitoring of process variables
I/O-bar of C_INTERL
VSTATUS for C_INTERL
Operator control and monitoring

Display
Operator Control:

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_INTERL_009.doc
4
4
4
5
5
7
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
12
13
13
13
Description of C_INTERL
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_INTERL
FB1075
Calling OBs
In the same OB with and after the last block whose signals are to be displayed on the
C_INTERL.
Function
The C_INTERL block is used to implement a standardized interlock display which can be called
on the OS. The block can be assigned a maximum of 10 input signals, which can each be
inverted as required.
The first five inputs I1_1 to I1_5 form a group. Each signal can be linked logically either directly
or inverted by setting the corresponding inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5.
Important: The modification of the negation inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5 in runtime (download
for changes) can lead to a loss of the RLO for one CPU Cycle.
Therefore we recommend inverting directly at the Inputs I1_1 to I1_5.
The same applies to the second group of five inputs.

The type of logic operation of the first group is set at the AND_OR1 parameter. NEGRES_1 = 1
inverts the result of Q1 used to form Q via AND_OR3. Output Q1, however is not inverted.
The two group results can be operated linked logically by an AND/OR operation.
The logic result LOG1 is represented by green color.

Operating principle
Input Interfaces
I1_1
Input Signal 1, first group
The status of this interface is displayed in the interlock faceplate. The display is grey if the signal
is ok and red if the signal is missing.
The display text must be entered under Object Properties under Text1 (only one text can be
defined per interface). The maximum length of the text string is 16 characters.
At input I1_1 a direct connection of a negation can be used. The indicated status is the status
after the negation. The negation itself is not shown in the faceplate.
NEG1_1
I1_1 will be inverted
1-Signal at the interface NEG1_1 leads to a negation at input I1_1. In this case the negation is
visible at the Interlock Faceplate.
Note: The modification of the negation input NEG1_1 in runtime (download for changes) can
lead to a loss of the RLO for one CPU Cycle.
Therefore we recommend inverting directly at Input I1_1.
I1_2
See I1_1
NEG1_2
See NEG1_1
I1_3
See I1_1
NEG1_3
See NEG1_1
I1_4
See I1_1
NEG1_4
See NEG1_1
I1_5
See I1_1
NEG1_5
See NEG1_1
AND_OR1 1= AND, 0= OR first group
1-Signal at the interface AND_OR1 connects the inputs of the first signal group with an AND
function.
0-Signal at the interface AND_OR1 connects the inputs of the first signal group with an OR
function.

I2_1
Input Signal 1, second group
See I1_1
NEG2_1
See NEG1_1
I2_2
See I1_1
NEG2_2
See NEG1_1
I2_3
See I1_1
NEG2_3
See NEG1_1
I2_4
See I1_1
NEG2_4
See NEG1_1
I2_5
See I1_1
NEG2_5
See NEG1_1
AND_OR2 1= AND, 0= OR second group
1-Signal at the interface AND_OR2 connects the inputs of the second signal group with an AND
function.
0-Signal at the interface AND_OR2 connects the inputs of the second signal group with an OR
function.
AND_OR3 1= AND, 0= OR both groups
With 1-Signal at the interface AND_OR3 both signal groups are connected with an AND
function.
With 0-Signal at the interface AND_OR3 both signal groups are connected with an OR function.

Output Interfaces
Q
Output signal
The result of the complete interlock function is shown at output Q. This output is used for the
connection to the interface of the CEMAT block.
Q1
Interim result, first group
Output Q1 shows the interim result of the first AND/OR function.
Q2
Interim result, second group
Output Q1 shows the interim result of the second AND/OR function.

Engineering
AS:
CFC Plan editing example:
The assignment of instance names is particularly important when the Interlock module is used.
Depending on the "main object", the name is formed as follows.
For example, C_DRV_1D motor with plant identifier "FK11/E001" should be given an interlock
protective circuit on the input interface "ESVG".
The name of the interlock module instances consists of:
FK11/E001
_ESVG
1-3
= main object
= interface description
= number of the interlock modules, max . 3 units
i.e. FK11/E001_ESVG1 is the name of the first interlock module.
Please note:
- Correctly select the interconnection logic (red background means error)
- Assign the signal designations for the control room operator with understandable text.
- Only Text_1 is displayed in the Faceplate
- on one Interface it could only connect one of the Interlock module Type
(Interlock or Interlock5)
On
OS:
No further parameterisation is necessary.
However, an OS compile must be carried out (in order to generate the tags in the tag
management).

Error handling
Only by means of the operating system.
No special measures taken.
Time response
The block does not have a time response.

see VSTATUS for C_INTERL
Does not exist.

Does not exist.

I/O-bar of C_INTERL
C_INTERL
10
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Type Attr.
HMI
AND_OR1
1= AND, 0= OR first group
BOOL
AND_OR2
1= AND, 0= OR second group BOOL
AND_OR3
1= AND, 0= OR both groups
BOOL
I1_1
Input signal 1, first group
BOOL
I1_2
BOOL
I1_3
BOOL
I1_4
BOOL
I1_5
BOOL
I2_1
Input signal 1, second group
BOOL
I2_2
BOOL
I2_3
BOOL
I2_4
BOOL
I2_5
BOOL
NEG1_1
1 = I1_1 will be inverted
BOOL
NEG1_2
BOOL
NEG1_3
BOOL
NEG1_4
BOOL
NEG1_5
BOOL
NEG2_1
BOOL
NEG2_2
BOOL
NEG2_3
BOOL
NEG2_4
BOOL
NEG2_5
BOOL
Output signal
BOOL
Permitted
Values

Element
Meaning
Format
Q1
BOOL
Q2
BOOL
QC_Q
Quality Code for Q
BYTE
16#80
QC_Q_I
Quality Code for output Q
BYTE
16#80
VSTATUS
Extended status display in

block icons
DWORD DW#16#0

Default
Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
11
I1_1
I1_2
I1_3
I1_4
I1_5
I2_1
I2_2
I2_3
I2_4
I2_5
NEG1_1
NEG1_2
NEG1_3
NEG1_4
NEG1_5
NEG2_1
NEG2_2
NEG2_3
NEG2_4
NEG2_5
spare
spare
AND_OR1
AND_OR2
AND_OR3
spare
Q
Q1
Q2
spare
spare
spare
12
Bit
Comment
Variable
Name
VSTATUS for C_INTERL


1= AND, 0= OR second group
1= AND, 0= OR both groups
Output signal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31


Display
When an interlock protective circuit is present, the corresponding interface is indicated with a
blue point in the diagnostic dialog of the associated module type.
The interlock dialog displays the input parameter name of its logical state and the subsequent
interconnection.
In an error situation, the input signal is displayed with a red background.
For the control room operator meaningful designations should be chosen for the input
parameters.
Operator Control:
A single click on the corresponding interface designation opens the Interlock dialog.
The interlock dialog can be closed using the Close Button.
Further functions are not enabled.

13
Cemat V 7.0
Interlock C_INTER5
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BInterlock C_INTER5
INTERLOCK C_INTER5
Description of C_INTER5
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input Interfaces
Output Interfaces
Configuring
Error handling
Time response
I/O-bar of C_INTER5
VSTATUS for C_INTER5

Display
Operator Control

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_INTER5_009.doc
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
10
11
11
11
Description of C_INTER5
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_INTER5
FB1076
Calling OBs
In the same OB with and after the last block whose signals are to be displayed on the
C_INTER5.
Function
The C_INTER5 block is used to implement a standardized interlock display which can be called
on the OS. The block can be assigned a maximum of 5 input signals, which can each be
inverted as required.
The main object of the C_INTER5 block was developed in order to save much as possible OS
variables. Therefore the signal designations are not entered at the input signals, but in the string
variable S_TEXT.
The designations of all 5 input signals must be entered in this string variable S_TEXT,
separated by a semicolon ;. The string length for each signal designation is 16 characters.
The five inputs I1_1 to I1_5 form a group. Each signal can be linked logically either directly or
inverted by setting the corresponding inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5.
Important: The modification of the negation inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5 in runtime (download
for changes) can lead to a loss of the RLO for one CPU Cycle.
Therefore we recommend inverting directly at the Inputs I1_1 to I1_5.
The type of logic operation of the group is set at the AND_OR1 parameter.
The logic result LOG1 is represented by green color.

Operating principle
Input Interfaces
I1_1
Input Signal 1
The status of this interface is displayed in the interlock faceplate. The display is grey if the signal
is ok and red if the signal is missing.
The display text must be entered under Object Properties under Text1 (only one text can be
defined per interface). The maximum length of the text string is 16 characters.
At input I1_1 a direct connection of a negation can be used. The indicated status is the status
after the negation. The negation itself is not shown in the faceplate.
NEG1_1
1-Signal at the interface NEG1_1 leads to a negation at input I1_1. In this case the negation is
visible at the Interlock Faceplate.
Note: The modification of the negation input NEG1_1 in runtime (download for changes) can
lead to a loss of the RLO for one CPU Cycle.
Therefore we recommend inverting directly at Input I1_1.
I1_2
Input Signal 2
See I1_1
NEG1_2
See NEG1_1
I1_3
Input Signal 3
See I1_1
NEG1_3
See NEG1_1
I1_4
Input Signal 4
See I1_1
NEG1_4
See NEG1_1
I1_5
Input Signal 5
See I1_1
NEG1_5
See NEG1_1
AND_OR1 1= AND, 0= OR
1-Signal at the interface AND_OR1 connects the inputs with an AND function.
0-Signal at the interface AND_OR1 connects the inputs with an OR function.

S_TEXT
Texts for Input Signals 1 to 5
String variable S_TEXT contains the text definition for signal 1-5. Each partial string must be
separated by semicolon.
Each partial string is limited to 16 characters.
Output Interfaces
Q
Output signal
The result of the interlock function is shown at output Q. This output is used for the connection
to the interface of the CEMAT block.

Configuring
AS:
CFC Plan editing example:
The assignment of instance names is particularly important when the Interlock module is used.
Depending on the "main object", the name is formed as follows.
For example, C_DRV_1D motor with plant identifier "FK11/E001" should be given an interlock
protective circuit on the input interface "ESVG".
The name of the interlock module instances consists of:
FK11/E001
_ESVG
1-3
= main object
= interface description
= number of the interlock modules, max. 3 units
i.e. FK11/E001_ESVG1 is the name of the first interlock module.
Please note:
- Correctly select the interconnection logic (red background means error)
- Assign the signal designations for the control room operator with understandable text.
- Enter the signal designations in S_TEXT.
- on one Interface it could only connect one of the Interlock module Type
(Interlock or Interlock5)
OS:
No further parameterization is necessary.
However, an OS compile must be carried out (in order to generate the tags in the tag
management).

Error handling
Only by means of the operating system.
No special measures taken.
Time response
The block does not have a time response.

see VSTATUS for C_INTER5
Does not exist.

Does not exist.

I/O-bar of C_INTER5
C_INTER5
Element
Meaning
Format
AND_OR1
BOOL
I1_1
BOOL
I1_2
BOOL
I1_3
BOOL
I1_4
BOOL
I1_5
BOOL
NEG1_1
BOOL
NEG1_2
BOOL
NEG1_3
BOOL
NEG1_4
BOOL
NEG1_5
BOOL
S_TEXT
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa;
bbbbbbbb
bbbbbbbb;
Signal designations for the
STRING ccccccccc
input signals 1 to 5, separated
[86]
ccccccc;
by a semicolon.
dddddddd
dddddddd;
eeeeeeee
eeeeeeee
Output signal
BOOL
QC_Q
Quality Code for Q
BYTE
16#80
QC_Q_I
Quality Code for output Q
BYTE
16#80
VSTATUS
Extended status display in

block icons
DWORD DW#16#0

Default
Type Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
I1_1
I1_2
I1_3
I1_4
I1_5
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
NEG1_1
NEG1_2
NEG1_3
NEG1_4
NEG1_5
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
AND_OR1
spare
spare
spare
Q
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
10
Bit
Comment
Variable
Name
VSTATUS for C_INTER5


Output signal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31


Display
When an interlock protective circuit is present, the corresponding interface is indicated with a
blue point in the diagnostic dialog of the associated module type.
The interlock dialog displays the input parameter name of its logical state and the subsequent
interconnection.
In an error situation, the input signal is displayed with a red background.
For the control room operator meaningful designations should be chosen for the input
parameters.
Operator Control
A single click on the corresponding interface designation opens the Interlock dialog.
Further functions are not enabled.

11

! "#$
%

&

!"#$%

&&$%
'&()
*&+,)-
*

((
&.)/(+

0(
1
*2
&+(30
0
,

(++

4
$
((
&
)&

0'+5(,)-
*+
*
+
.
6(.6
&(0&'
*

*),+5
(*
-*
*

5,"6#'4
%&
5
+&
+
'
*1 78#$93
+
5&
(+5
*
*1+,
:
3

*,
*)5&)
+&(51+,
:
*3
%(
(1
,,(3
,*

,
+
0
*
((55
0-,,

(
(((

(5(&
+

((55

,)('+,4
;+
*+

*)%
(
' (
!,-,(*
&+;
-,,&
,'1)/+; <34$

(
; 1&+,34

'

!,'+1(((55
3$%
4$++

,-
-0-,
*)&

(
*,+:(&4

69
69#@6
=$9>!8
!6#=? 6#!2
=$9
"13>=$9
=$9
!9
69#6
$
+&C&+"137 D
)B
)A

)
!,
+&+69"#$9(+(
,)+1+(+3,

+&(54$),
+
)('5),+0
&

,
+&(5&+&69-,69"#$9

((+,
+&(5
,+(+4

*
+' ' ,

- ,
+ '

!,+

(),())
&0-,,(
5,
+& #!"E#;9
( F! #;
(
-,,)-
*
.

+. )

5

+/0+/

+1
+
#;
$

+

#F!
/
+

8#$9>>
!'(+

>>

&(
-,
G6;97

!,

+
#;
(5;##$6;##"H 1
*
#6 #@634
/2 +
!,/
+
#F!

(
((,
*
1 F!60 F!@634
,
*
,

/
+
(/&*(

1 %"60 G"630+5((,+
+,
1 "6;734

$) #!"E#;970,+58#$9&(,+
4'
*)
,+
,+5
(

&(1)

+

(-,
G6;9730
(+&(+5(
(I&
+
-,
-,
*)
&&(4
/ ' '

$(
,))5+
5&
(,+58#$9
(
5,&+&"),((
(%% #J,/+(4

/ ' '

!,*
"
()1"#60"@#63-,

,1"#@L 34"&(+(,+
(
*&+&
1M"#60M"@#634
- '

!,+58#$9
()-

*
(18#60
8#J"98@#J"908@#63-,
,1@L 34"&
(+(,+
(
*&+&1M8#60M8#J"90M8@#J"90
M8@#634
,# 3

!,*
"
:(),+,&
*
*),
+5196#8@"096#8"3+
*4
(5QRUPLHUW
(5

10 39+5 10 39/5
),$%*,,

/&(0,
+&(5
(
:()+
*5&,+,&
*
*),

+&(5&196#69@"096#69"34
/01

10 /01+5 10 /01/5

$

/
+
0+5-,+
(
*
+
(
,+,&
*
*),+54
!,
&5&0'
*5&),
+&(50)()-(

-,+
(
*+
(
,+,&
*

*),
+&(54
!,
=$9+)(

:(1(

3)4

K

4 5,

-
!,
+&(569
(5(),())
&0-,,
(5,
+&69# 0$;#69# 0G!#
(G!#;9#;
,-

,-.
)+/ 6)+/ 6767 ) )1

F

69#;1(3

F

69#;1(3

F

F
&($%
*,
69#;1(3

F
69#;1(3

F

F
F
F
&($%
*,
69#!"E
+
6
&(05,
;
6
&(05,
;
&(05,;
6
&(0-,

G!#7
6
&(0-,

G!#7
&(0-,

G!#7
6
+&(5
'(
/7

!,,
*5)
&&((&,;
*
,+G!#;9#;0)$;#69# 74
!,,
*)
&&(&
)

,
*,+G!#0)$;#69# 74
!'
*(

(

)

5,
+69# 4!'
*'+5
&
(&(4
$
&(0,
:(
+&(5*
((
*,
)-
**,.

79 V
(5QRUPLHUW

/01 QRUPLHUW *$,1
71 V 70 /$* V

(&I&
(
:(4). +/
&

-
$
&(0,(&
5%$ 8(((,&+&),$%
*,4!,&(,
*69#669#@64

8

9
'

!,
+&(5,+; 5,
+&69#;4$
+(
((
);##$6;##"H 1
*69#@6N
69#634!,&+&5&)M8@
(M8);##$6;##"H
+(,&+&M69#@6
(M69#64
6

!,$%*,&,
+&(54!,
+
=$90!90!8
(!6#=

(()&4$),&

()/+
++
&,*
,(&
*0,
+
(
*&#
'&()(49,+
,
*(&
*&+
&&*),
+&(
54
!,
(
)

5(1
**
&
)
*
+&(53
*
*5++
=$94!,
++

((
*# 70
(,
*

*!974$),
+&(569()&
(0,
*,(1
-
(&+34!,(
)
),

*5(
5
*,*
+!94
;+
*+
1
+&69#;3. ,+
*+
,
+&
69#;4$
&(0,5&+,((
*
),
$%*,4!,+
*+

(
,&
*
*),

+&(54
!,(55
(*
((
*(55)&

4$

((
*!874!,(
)
),())
5(

5
*,*
),5&+!84
!,(

!6#=,&(,5

*)&,(55

!84!,)(,O(55*
O1/&
),&
++
),(55+

34$5&&&
-,
,
*B!82!6#=B4

*++

)('+,.J,
% # 7!"G0,
++

,)('4@
0
+(
))
,++

0,5,
(&(5((-,
,
+
5&,
*0-,&,
*
*,'
*,4$
&
(0% # -&
/,*,&*),

+&(5044,(,&(,
*(

&(4

*(55

)('+,.!,(55

,
)('
*%% # 7!"G4
+,)(

)),(55
4!,,
*5)%% #
&+4

'

$
,169# 73,
+&(5),(),

('(5&69#!"E

(,&+&4!,&+&
M69#@6
(M69#6 4O!'
*O('+
5,(0-,,
,,
+&
&(
)*&

*
))&),4
-- ,5,

;5,),+5)+
+
(&(5((

*
(%

,)('
,4$
,(0+
+
,)),
(%

(**+),
+&(
54G% # 7,

(%% # 7,%

,)('&4
' -

!,
+&(569),

(
+&
#F!),5
4'&,

'
*(-,
,(&4$
&,0,5

*
,*
M # G!0-,,

(,
+&69# )
,
4&
&(
&'
*(0+

,
*
+&(5'
*),5
4
M # G!79;!1M69#G!3;"69# ;" #!"E#;9;"9;!1
M F!#;93
!,'
*
+&69#!"E),

(,
&+& ),5
0
(5(C&+-,
,(
(*
4
(
'),
*,&((**(
,

-,
,5
,,)
+&(54
!,
&(

*1-,
+

+5(
3

+&$9!#@; $9!#@9=),
,&+&M69#@6
M69#6),5
4

:

, ' ' '
, '5, '

,
)+
5

(
+&4
/2 ;

!,,
*5(&; +
),
+& F! #;

) F;9#4L&&,+
(
*

+&
$9!#90 F!#9,

+&$;#$9!#
,
,
*54
$) G6;970,))5+
'
5,

+

(-&+,
*5)/
'
*(

(4
/ ',, '-5 <=>2

M F!97!"G.
F! #;
)
1

+
3!"G1/
+
34
M $9!97!"G.
F! #;
)!"G
1/
+
3 1

+
34
F! #;'(I&(4
/ ' -,

M# #;7!"G.
#;
4
#;'(I&(4

;

!,++),
*5,;
*
+&G!#;9#;

*G!#4L&&,+
(
*

+&
69;#90G!;#9,

+&$;#69#
(

,,
*54

<

/ ',, '-

<=>

MG!;7!"G.G!#;9#;
) 1
&(3!"G
1&(34
M69;7!"G.G!#;9#;
)!"G1&(3
1
&(34
$)+++0G!#;9#;'(4
/ ' -,

M69;7!"G.69#;
4
69#;'(I&(4
+&'
),((-
(
&
&+,
*5.
/
+
2 +
'
*.-,
G6;97!"G0,

+
#;I&,))51/
'(3+
4
&(.!,
&5&69#;'(,))5
+&(
54
!'
*(.!,
&5&69#;'(,))5

+&(54
6
&'
*(.!,
*'(-&+
,
*5&(4
$
*+

7
+&(51+
*3
&,++

+

&,(&
51+
*3
&
.J,
,)&++(0,
*((-,/
,*,
&5&),),
*5,)(5&5,044

/,*,++
+

,(5+(4((
&,5

+
()84-)/
*),
*+

4
!,(55+

((
(+
(4

?
/, '
/, '

!,'*,,
(,)-
*5
.

M;#""7)
+&(&
*,+
)

),+ F! #;0G!#;9#;0 #;69#;4
;,-0M;#""74
+,(
),(&
)

4
*

96#8@"B7
96#8@".
!,*
":
(9;7M""74
96#69@"B7
96#69@".
$
&(0,(&
5-&+&
(9;7M""74
&5&1!93B
6#!2.
J,
!9A0,&)!97 6#!2),&

(
0

(-,
!9B0!97 6#!2&(4J,
!970,
*
((
(,+
*+
69#;4
&5&1!83B
6#!.
J,
!8A0,&)!87 6#!),&

(
0

(-,
!8B0!97 6#!&(4J,
!870,())

((4
!6#=B
6#!2.
J,
!6#=B 6#!20!6#=B 6#!2&()
&
4$
,,(55+

,5
(
())
4

@
+
9 ',
+
,
%&
* G&+0,

+
), !"#$%

&(4
!,'&(),&+; (
*4$

*

*,
,
((, 4G
*, !0&&
,
,
&+; 4
)&+0,*-&++(),(&
),

"G9G L 4

!,'&(
-,(*
&+; 4!,+
*),
'
(
,+ 6#!4
6 ' 5,*

AB+67+
!"#$%.8 !!G
',

!, !"#$%'&,"6#')*

**4
6***(
!,)&

*,)+5
(,*
0
!, *
-,,)
(

4
6***(&),5
)
&++(

(5(&5,+
(
*6# G#//
+&4*1
,

*P3
+'(
*6 =#; E4
M6 =# G),"G9G L ,5
/+(
,
-,
6 =#; E7!"G6 =# !!74
!,-*/), !"#$%'
(,*

,'+4

6 ' 5 '2 ' ,

'(
)

5
'2

'
#

8.QQ '

QQ,*,
@
M8@#6
6# G#@06 =#; E

M8@#J"9
8.QQ '

QQ,*,
J@
6# G#J@06 =#; E
<
M8#J"9
8.QQ '

QQ-
J
6# G#J06 =#; E

M8#6
8.QQ '

QQ-

6# G#06 =#; E

/

M"@#6
".QQ '

QQ,*,
@
6# G#"06 =#; E

M"#6
".QQ '

QQ-

6# G#"06 =#; E

!,),),&/+5&),*'*
(
$6!$ ! @(0,)&,5()8#$90-,,

*5&
1GF#"/3
&+)4
6 ' 5
2# -
,

B

<

K

(
#9
!#9;
#$%
8#$9
GF#"
GF#"
GF#"
GF#"
GF#"K
GF#"
'5 -
44
C
('

)
$
(+
&,'(*0
(+)
,O
O(*
/4!,(*,
+
(
-+*0-,,&
C
)I&(4

+

+
+
B)

/

"

46)

B)

#

=

) &&

!

+B

)

6)

D
;
;
"%
'

67
$

+&)
692G!;..6
&0.&
;+
+&.
.6
&0.&
.&(
(
&/+5&/
! @
(
&
,
&
! @

G!#;9#
;
G!;#9
GF#"/
#9
#$%
#9
+&
/6(E
%% #

#

;;

$
;;

;;
9L
;;
%J;"%
!"$9=
R<S
;;
"
;;
5
# 6
B
-

M
$;
?

TT
$
$;
$
$
$
M
M
M
M
M

?
?
?

$
$
$
M

M

?

A7
"
"
"

4
$
;
$
M

?
?

A7
"

$
?
"

$
?
A
%% J
B
%% J
"
"
;;

$
$
$

M
?
?

A7
;;

$
M
;;

$
M
;;

$
M
"
"

;
$

M

?
)
+/
6)
+/
)
)F

)&
%(
(-(,
%

)('17

(3
%&
5&
*

@)

*,
*

*
.
@*,
*
.
-
+
*

@
7):
*+

1
*5(
3
7):
*+

1+5(
3
.

(
.+

(
.

5
.+
+&
(
6
+&(5&+&
@*,
+&(5
)
-

+&(5
"

$
M
?
) &&
)+/
;+
*+

"
7/

+&(
;;
5
(
/

+&(5
"
7
+
)
;;

+&(569#;

)(')(+
"
;
7*&++

;;
@*,0+
5
7*&++

;;
-0+5
6*&++
.
;;
*

$
$
M
M
?

$
$
M
M

$
M

$
?

$
?

$
?
+B
/
"#@L
"@#6
"#6
46)
@L
$9!#@9=
$9!#@;
).
69;#;9
))
6# G#@
6# G#
6# G#"

69#@6A
69#6
69#6B
69#@6
K

;
"%
6# G#J@
'

#

;;
76*&++
.
@*,-

*0+5
6# G#J
76*&++
.
;;
--

*0+5
69#@6
@*,)
&
"

+&(5
69#6
-)
&
"

+&(5
69#;
;+
+&.
"
6
+&(5
69;#9
7

&(
;;
6;#8@"
@*,)(+
"
1&

*3
6;#8"
-)(+
"
1&

*3
6 =# E
'
-(**
J;"%
6 =#8$%
6*
&
%J;"%
6 =#; E
7*'(
;;
6 =# !!
*&
J;"%
))F
@*,.
"
:
)
+&(
51&

*3
))
-.
"
:
)
+&(
51&

*3
)BF
@*,.
"
:
)+
51&

*3
)B
-
:
)
"
+51&

*3
; G$%
;&+( ! @
;;
;;
"5
;;
;!$#9
7
&

*;907
;;
;
#
7+

;;
% #
7+

)(' ;;
B)
5&
"
8@#6
5&.
"
@*,
8@#J"9
5&.
"
@*,-

*
8#6
5&.
"
-
8#J"9
5&.
"
--

*
M# #;
7
+
+&)
;;
+

MG!#;
&.7;+-,
;;
OG!;O
G)
M& ()69
L!
G)
M& ()&+&69
L!
G)) M& ()69"#$9
L!
GB)
M& ()8#$9
L!
G6+7
1

(

5
# 6
B
-

$
?

$
?

$
?

$
?

$;
?

$
$
M

?

$
?

;
$
$
;
$

6
M

?

$

$

$

$
$
$
M

?
?
?

$
$
$;
$
M
M
M

?
?

K
$
?

$
?

$
?

;
?

;
?
U
U
U
U

;
$
$
$

8@#6A
8#6
8@#J"9A
8#J"9
8#6B
8@#6
8#J"9B
8@#J"9

;
"%
'

#

;;
M%9"6
"G9G L
6#!
+
+/0
#@6
7
*5+
+
(
*
.7,*,
*
.7-
7&+&1
5(9;3
7,*,
*)

+&(5&+&
7-
*)

+&(5&+&
&.7;+
+&

+&(5&69#;
76
&07&
7

&(
7*
7*&++

7*&+*
7,*,
7,*,-

*
7-
7--

*
7,*,)+

&+&
7-)+

&+&
7
/
+

7$

07/

7

+

7+5+
+

9&)&
&+
+
*
RS
5+

/
+

+
,*,

;
;;
;;
;;
;;

;
;
;
;

?
?
?

;;

;
;;

;
?
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;
;;

;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;

?
?

?

;;

;
;;
;;
;;
;;

;
;
;
;

?
?
?

$9!
"
"
"
"
<

$
$
;
$
$

M

?

?

A74

#6
+
-
"

$
?
#;
#;#;9

$;
$

M
?

$
$
$

?
?
?

$
M

$
M
+/0F
;+
+&)+

"

.7;+
+& ;;
#;
7'+
#;
;;
7&++

;;
/4
*5+
+
"
R2S
$

+&
;;

2/

17

27/
3
7
+
;;
/
+

@*,)/
+

"

$
M
+/0
-)/

+

$
M
F!@6A
F!6
F!6B
F!@6
M"@#6
M"#6
M""
G)F
G)
M69;
G6)67
M69;
M6 =#""
M6 =# G
M;#""
M8@#6
M8@#J"9
M8#6
M8#J"9
M #@6
M #6
M F!9
G+/0 )
M $9!9
MG"6
+. )
G6;9
%"6
+/0 )
F!#9

"
5
# 6
B
-

#@6A
#6
#6B
#@6

;
"%
'

F! #; 6(.

7

7/

$9!#9
7
+

+

"6;
7+
+
*;
G"6
/4+5+
)+
R2S
!#9;
! @+
&
64
!*)%

RS
)
!'
*
RS
B
%55

RS

#

;;
5
# 6
?
$
M
$
$

?
?

%J;"%
"

$
$
M
?
?
"
$
?
6#
!2
!970
?
6#
!2
!870
;;
;;
"
"

$;

B
-

$
6#
!
G !!G
&-(
8 !!G 0

&+)
J;"%

8 !!G
/
((&(+
' %J;"%

$
;

)

5
&().
=

)

,'(+

0 B+67+
!,<&-(/
(,&(+
,'

()+4
!,-13&(,')-.

4.

<

M F!;9 M69#G! 6 =#; E

#9 ; G$%

4.

;;

<

K

M6 =# G
69#

!,
+&G !!G 1(+J;"%3&,,*,1<34!,
&
&,)4

1.3.1.11 Bedienen und Beobachten

Standardview
All analog displays are created by means of the "AdvancedAnalogDisplay". The number format is set via the
block icon ("Format_InputValue" and "Format_OutputValue" properties).
The View has 2 "Permission" as objects for the input of setpoints and manipulated variables, since operator
authorizations for these variables depend upon various factors
The "Permission_Setpoint" object evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the
"Q_SP_OP = TRUE" parameter..
The "Permission_Manual" object evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the
"QLMNOP = TRUE" parameter.
The PID tuner is operated in the parameter view (Tuning On/Off).
When tuning is active, all other operations of the controller are locked .
Order and assignment of direct connections to operator controlled objects

@Level5

btAuto

btManual

btExtern

btIntern

Permission_Setpoint

Permission_Manual
Permission_Setpoint
Setpoint_AnalogValue
Permission_Manual
Manual_AnalogValue
Format

Setpoint_AnalogValue
ProcessValue_AnalogValue
Format

Manual_AnalogValue

Output_AnalogValue
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Authorization
Authorization
Authorization
Authorization
Operator control enable
Level_Source
D
Level_Target
Level_Source
Target_ Operator control enable
Format_InputValue
Format
Format
Format_OutputValue
Format
Format
Technological Blocks
ParameterView
The objects "Permission_SP_Bumpless", "Permission_Gain" and "Permission_AlarmHigh_AnalogValue"
evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the "OPTI_EN = FALSE" parameter.
The process value "Error signal_AnalogValue" is set via the "AdvancedAnalogDisplay", the number format is
set via the block icon ("Format_InputValue" property).
All other analog displays show the conventional "Floating-point format" I/O field.
This setpoint bar graph shows the setpoint control limits, with reference to the bar graph limits.
Reihenfolge und Rangierung von Direktverbindungen auf die bedienbaren Objekte

@Level6

Permission_SP_Bumpless D
Bumbless_CHECKBOX_L D
SP_TRK_ON_CHECKBOX_L
D
SPRAMP_OFF_CHECKBOX_L D
SPHighLimit_AnalogValue D
SPLowLimit_AnalogValue D
ManHighLimit_AnalogValue D
ManLowLimit_AnalogValue D
SPURLM_AnalogValue
D
SPDRLM_AnalogValue
D
MO_PVHR_AnalogValue
D
MO_PVLR_AnalogValue
D
SPHighLimit_AnalogValue D
SPLowLimit_AnalogValue D
ManHighLimit_AnalogValue D
ManLowLimit_AnalogValue D
SPURLM_AnalogValue
D
SPDRLM_AnalogValue
D
MO_PVHR_AnalogValue
D
MO_PVLR_AnalogValue
D
14-2

Level_Source
Target_ BackgroundColor
Background color value

@Level6

D
Permission_Gain
D
OPTI_EN_CHECKBOX_L D
Permission_Gain
D
Gain_AnalogValue
D
TN_AnalogValue
D
TV_AnalogValue
D
DEADB_W_AnalogValue
D
TM_LAG_AnalogValue
D
ERH_ALM_AnalogValue
D
ERL_ALM_AnalogValue
D
ER_HYS_AnalogValue3
D
M_SUP_ER_CHECKBOX_L D

Level_Source
Permission_Gain

D
Gain_AnalogValue
D
TN_AnalogValue
D
TV_AnalogValue
D
DEADB_W_AnalogValue
D
TM_LAG_AnalogValue
D
ERH_ALM_AnalogValue

ERL_ALM_AnalogValue
D
ER_HYS_AnalogValue3
D
Format

D
Manual_AnalogValue

D
Output_AnalogValue

D
Regeldifferenz_AnalogValuem
D
Target_ BackgroundColor
Format_InputValue
Format
Format
Format
Diagnosis View
Diagnosis view shows in addition the Interface description and-status .
The Parametervalues are not changeable.
14-4
Alarmview
The PID Controller-related Operation and alarm reports are shown in the Alarmview.
Informationview
Description of the Informationview see Systemdescription CEMAT.
14-6
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
PID with 3 Parameter sets C_PID3
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BPID with 3 Parameter sets C_PID3
PID WITH 3 PARAMETER SETS C_PID3
Description of C_PID3
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Input interfaces
Process values
Interfaces to OS
4
4
4
6
6
8
OS-Variablentabelle
Edition: 02.05.2006
N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_PID3_009.doc
Description of C_PID3
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_PID3
FB1018
Calling OBs
C_PID3 must be called in a Time-OB e.g. OB35.
Function
The C_PID3 calls inside the standard controller FB61 CTRL_PID. The improved block C_PID3
can handle 3 several sets of controller settings for (GAIN, TI, TD). With 3 binary inputs one can
enable one set of controller settings (1-3).
The presetting is parameter set 1. If there are more than one set are enabled, the set with the
lower number is active. If there are no set enabled then the parameter set 1 is active.
At the diagnosis faceplate the active parameter set is marked with a green frame. Look at the
following picture.
Recommendation:
If there is no need for a controller with 3 several settings use the standard controller
FB61 CTRL_PID because the FB1018 needs more performance.

Edition: 02.05.2006

Edition: 02.05.2006
Input interfaces
The additional parameters are described only.
EN_CS1
Enable controller settings 1
1-signal at this interface enables the first set of the controller settings
(GAIN_1, TI_1, TD_1) active.
EN_CS2
1-signal at this interface enables the second set of the controller settings
EN_CS3
1-signal at this interface enables the third set of the controller settings
Process values
GAIN_1
Proportional gain 1
Default: 1.0
Tracking time 1
Default: 1.0
Derivative time 1
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
TN_1
Format REAL
Value in seconds
TV_1
Format REAL
Value in seconds

Edition: 02.05.2006
GAIN_2
Proportional gain 2
Default: 1.0
Tracking time 2
Default: 1.0
Derivative time 2
Default: 0.0
Proportional gain 3
Default: 1.0
Tracking time 3
Default: 1.0
Derivative time 3
Default: 0.0
Format REAL
TN_2
Format REAL
Value in seconds
TV_2
Format REAL
Value in seconds
GAIN_3
Format REAL
TN_3
Format REAL
Value in seconds
TV_3
Format REAL
Value in seconds

Edition: 02.05.2006
Interfaces to OS
STATUS
Statusword to OS
Interface to OS

Edition: 02.05.2006
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Controller settings 1 active

Enable contr. Settings 1
Status
Bezeichnung englisch
Ausgabe: 15.09.2004
STA_B10
STA_B11
STA_B12
STA_B13
STA_B14
STA_B15
STA_B16
STA_B17
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Parameter Satz 1 aktiv

Freigabe Parameter Satz 1
SET1
SET2
SET3
EN_CS1
EN_CS2
EN_CS3
STA_B20
STA_B21
STA_B22
STA_B23
STA_B24
STA_B25
STA_B26
STA_B27
Bezeichnung deutsch
Status
S7-Par-Name
StatusWord
Belegung
OS-Variablentabelle
OS-VariablenNr.
Ausgabeebene
S,O
Darstellung
Anz./NK
Bit
Typ
O
Werte
bereich
16Bit
Ereignistext
Strungsklasse
Meldeklasse
Dimension
Cemat V 7.0
Counter C_COUNT
Edition 01 / 07
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BCounter C_COUNT
COUNTER C_COUNT
Description of C_COUNT
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Process values
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
I/O-bar of C_COUNT
OS variables table

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_COUNT_009.doc
9
11
0BCounter C_COUNT
Description of C_COUNT
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_COUNT
FB1015
Calling OBs
C_COUNT must be called in every cycle (e.g. OB35 (100MS_TASK)).

0BCounter C_COUNT
Function
With the pulse counter module C_COUNT one can acquire and summate pulses. It increments
at each detected pulse +1. In addition there is the possibility to read values that have already
been summated and to make them available for archiving.
Pulse acquisition:
Parameter MODE_V = 0.
For pulse acquisition one must call the module in a cyclic-interruptOB (e.g. the 100ms task).
The input signals must be so structured that the pulse duration and the pulse pause are each
longer than the cycle-time of the time-task.
t > cycle-time of time-task
t > cycle-time of time-task
Read summation value:

Parameter MODE_V = 1.
Parameter VAL_CNT must be connected with the summation value which is to be processed.
An accumulated value can be accepted in two ways:
x A difference value is read and added to the existing old counter value. In this case,
parameter NEW_VAL must have a 0-signal. After reading, the difference value is deleted in
the source data area.
x A sum of pulses is read and overwrites the old counter value. Parameter NEW_VAL must
be set to 1-signal to do this.

0BCounter C_COUNT
Operating principle
Input interfaces
CNZS
Input for pulse signal
Format Pointer
The pulse signal which is to be acquired has to be connected to the interface CNZS. With each
positive edge the pulse counter value is incremented by 1.
REL_PULS
Release pulse acquisition
A release condition for pulse acquisition can be connected to interface REL_PULS. If a 0-signal
is connected to REL_PULS, then no pulses are acquired.
MODE_V
Import pulse acquisition / import value
The MODE_V interface can be used to set whether the counter is to count pulses or import
counter values.
MODE_V = 0-signal indicates that the counter acquires pulses.
MODE_V = 1-signal indicates that the counter imports a counter value.
NEW_VAL
New value overwrites old value
The NEW_VAL interface has significance only when the counter is used to import an
accumulated value (not for pulse acquisition). When a 1-signal is applied, the old value is
overwritten with the new counter value. For a 0-signal, the new value is added to the old value.
VAL_CNT
Accumulated value
Default: 0
Format ANY
Interface to import the accumulated value.
Type of data:
WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT is allowed,
otherwise ENG_ERR=1
Area:
DB, Memory
otherwise ENG_ERR=2
Attention: When NEW_VAL=0 , the data-source will be deleted.
PULS_VAL
Value of one pulse
Default: 1.0
Format REAL
This is the value of one pulse

0BCounter C_COUNT
Process values
UNIT
Unit
Default: %

Unit of the counter value.
Output interfaces
ENG_ERR
Engineering Error
0 = no error
1 = wrong data type with parameter VAL_CNT, look to VAL_CNT
2 = wrong area of data with parameter VAL_CNT, look at VAL_CNT
Interfaces to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Counted pulses * value for one pulse
Interface to OS
RT_H
Counted pulses * value for one pulse (refreshed every hour)
Interface to OS
RT_MIS
Counted pulses (32 bit long)
prepared as interface to OS
RT_MIH
Counted pulses (refreshed every hour) (32 bit long)

0BCounter C_COUNT
The run sequence for the counter can be chosen as desired.
The C_COUNT has no Messages.
Commands

0BCounter C_COUNT
I/O-bar of C_COUNT
C_COUNT
Element
Meaning
Format
Default
Type
CNZS
Input for pulse signal
REL_PULS
POINTER
Release pulse acquisition
BOOL
MODE_V
Mode: 0 = Pulse / 1 = value
BOOL
NEW_VAL
New value overwrites old value
BOOL
VAL_CNT
Accumulated value
ANY
DW#16#0
PULS_VAL
Value of one pulse
REAL
1.0
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
W#16#0
UNIT
Unit
STRING
[8]
RES_RTOS Reset time of the run-time
REAL
0.0
IO
RT_OS
counts for OS
REAL
DW#16#0
IO
RT_H
counts for OS
REAL
DW#16#0
IO
RT_MIS
counts
DWORD
DW#16#0
IO
RT_MIH
counts
refresh every hour
DWORD
DW#16#0
IO
ENG_ERR
Engineering Error
BYTE
B#16'0

Attr.
HMI
Permitted
Values
I
U
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Unit
Reset time of the run-time
Counts for OS
Counts for OS
Counts for MIS
refreshed every 5s
Counts for MIS
Refreshed every hour
Dimension
Impulse fr OS
Impulse fr OS
Impulse fr MIS, aktualisiert alle
5s
Impulse t fr MIS aktualisiert
jede Stunde
Delete counter
Command word
Value of one pulse
Designation English
Zhler lschen
RT_MIH
RT_MIS
UNIT
RES_RTOS
RT_OS
RT_H
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
R_RTOS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Command word
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Command word
Designation German
Pulswertigkeit
S7-Par-Name
PULS_VAL
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var.
Output Level
D
Presentation
Number/NK
xxxxx
xxxxx
Date/time
Anw.
Bit
xx.yyy
Unit
h
Type
O
I/O
Value
Range
DWORD
DWORD
Real
Real
Date/time
16 bit
Real
Annun. Class
OM
RTOS
Event Text
Fault Class
11
0BCounter C_COUNT
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Running time C_RUNNT
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BRunning time C_RUNNT
RUNNING TIME C_RUNNT
Description of C_RUNNT
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
I/O-bar of C_RUNNT
OS variables table
Edition: 02.05.2006
N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_RUNNT_009.doc
Description of C_RUNNT
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_RUNNT
FB1016
Calling OBs
C_RUNNT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
With the run-time module one can acquire running times and operating times.

Edition: 02.05.2006
Operating principle
Input interfaces
RTLS
Input
If this interface has a 1-signal, then the running time is acquired.
REL_RT
Release
One can connect a release condition to interface REL_RT for the acquisition of the running time.
With a 0-signal at REL_RT no running time is acquired.

Edition: 02.05.2006
Interfaces to OS
COMMAND
Command word
Interface to OS
RES_RTOS
Reset time RT
Interface to OS
RT_OS
Run-time for OS in hours
Interface to OS
RT_H
Run-time for OS in hours (refreshed every hour)
Interface to OS
RT_MIS
Run-time in seconds (32-bit long)
RT_MIH
Run-time in seconds (32-bit long, refreshed every hour)

Edition: 02.05.2006
The run sequence for the run-time module can be chosen as desired.
The C_RUNNT has no Messages.
Commands

Edition: 02.05.2006
I/O-bar of C_RUNNT
C_RUNNT
Format
Default
Typ
e
Input
BOOL
REL_RT
Release acquisition
BOOL
COMMAND
Command word
WORD
W#16#0
Element
Meaning
RTLS
RES_RTOS Reset time of the run-time
DWORD DW#16#0
Attr.
HMI
IO
RT_OS
Run-time in hours for OS
REAL
IO
RT_H
Run-time in hours for OS
REAL
IO
RT_MIS
Run-time in seconds
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
RT_MIH
Run-time in seconds
Refresh every hour
DWORD DW#16#0
IO
Permitted
Values

Edition: 02.05.2006
S7-Par-Name
R_RTOS
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Delete counter
Command word
Designation English
Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit Reset time of the run-time

Betriebszeit in Std fr OS
Run-time in hours. for OS
Run-time in hours. for OS
Betriebszeit in Std fr OS
refreshed every hours
Betriebszeit in sekunden
Run-time in seconds
Run-time in seconds
Betriebszeit in sekunden
Refresh every hour
Zhler lschen
Command word
Designation German
RT_MIH
RT_MIS
RT_H
RES_RTOS
RT_OS
COM_B10
COM_B11
COM_B12
COM_B13
COM_B14
COM_B15
COM_B16
COM_B17
COM_B20
COM_B21
COM_B22
COM_B23
COM_B24
COM_B25
COM_B26
COM_B27
Command word
Assignment
OS variables table
OS-Var.
Output Level
D
D
D
Presentation
Number/NK
xxxxx
Date/time
xxxxx
Bit
Unit
h
Type
O
Dword
REAL
Dword
Date/time
REAL
16 bit
Value
Range
O
O
I/O
Annun. Class
OM
RTOS
Event Text
Fault Class
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
RS Info Module C_RS_IM
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BRS Info Module C_RS_IM
RS INFO MODULE C_RS_IM
Description of C_RS_IM
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
Engineering
AS
Settings and Configuration for C_RS_IM
OS
Symbols
OS Runtime
9
9
9
10
10
11
I/O-bar of C_RS_IM
13
OS variables table
15
RS_LINK Structure
16

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_RS_IM_009.doc
Description of C_RS_IM
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_RS_IM
FB1043
Calling OBs
C_RS_IM must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The Route Selection Information Module is used to hand over the status information from the
CEMAT blocks to the Route Selection OS Application. According to the selected mode the RS
Information Module can be used as Destination-, Source-, Analog value- and Process signalModule.
Each defined route must have one C_RS_IM block, defined as "Source" and one C_RS_IM
block, defined as "Destination".
As Standard Interface to the RS Main Module the structure RS_LINK is used.

Input Parameter for Silo Size, actual silo level, Warning limit, Alarm limit and Process signal
are transferred to the RS status word.
Output Parameter like RS_COMP (Route is running complete) and D_READY (Destination
selected and available) can be used as interlock signal to other modules.
The standard Route information like RS Job Number, RS Route Name and RS Material
Name will be shown in the block icon.

Operating principle
Input interfaces
MODE
Mode 0:
Mode 1:
Mode 2:
Mode 3:
Mode
Basic value = 0
Destination function
Source function
Analog value
Process signal
processed and the output PARAM_FT (Parameter failure) is set to 1-Signal.
SIZE
Size of Destination (Silo)
Basic value = 0-
Size of the Silo in meters.
A_MV
Actual measured value in %
Basic value = 0
For indication of the Silo level the actual measured Value in % (MV_PERC from C_MEASUR)
can be connected to A_MV.
W_LIM
Warning Limit reached
1-Signal means that the warning limit has been reached. This information is available for the OS
part of the Route Selection and can be used there as a start interlock condition.
A_LIM
Alarm Limit reached
1-Signal means that the alarm limit has been reached. This information is available for the OS
part of the Route Selection and can be used as an operation interlock or as a switch-over
condition.
PR_SIG
Process signal
PR_SIG is an interlocking condition for C_RS_IM. This can be status information from another
Cemat block (drive running, damper open.) or from a process signal.

Output interfaces
RS_LINK
drive block.
GR_LINK
Group link
RS_GFSO
Output RS_GFSO has 1-Signal if the module is not active in any route. This signal must be
RS_COMP
Route is running complete
RS_COMP has 1-Signal if the whole Route running.
D_READY
Destination selected and available
D_READY has 1-Signal if the Destination is selected and available.
PARAM_FT
Parameter Fault
1-Signal at PARAM_FT means no valid value for MODE (neither 0, 1, 2, nor 3).

Interfaces to OS
RS_JOB
RS Job Number
Interface to OS
RS_NAME
RS Name
Interface to OS
RS_MAT
RS Material Name
Interface to OS
MVP
Measuring Value in %
Interface to OS

The module should be called together with the other Cemat Objects before the associated
group.
There is no ALARM_8 module used.
Commands
For the command word 1 and 2 refer to RS_LINK Structure.

Engineering
AS
Settings and Configuration for C_RS_IM
Drag and drop the C_RS_IM blocks into the CFC and connect the output RS_LINK to an object
input of C_RSM. Define Tag, name and symbol no.
Depending on the functionality select the mode for source, destination, analog and process
signal.
Connect the interlock signal to PR_SIG.
Input signals for Warning and Alarm will be send to the RS Server for further interlocks.
The Analog value can be used to show a Process value for Material quantity or a silo level.

OS
Symbols
The symbols for RS_IM are shown in the flow mimics only. The symbol will be generated
automatically when you start the "Create/update Block icons.
The properties are filled up automatically.
Place the C_RS_IM Symbol next to the Source or Silo symbol.
10

OS Runtime
See the flow mimic with Source and Destination elements (Silos).

11
Mouse click on the symbol will open the faceplate

for Source
and Destination
In the faceplates, additionally to the TAG and comment the following information is shown:
- Route job information
- Route name
- Material name
- and depended on the mode:
- the status of process signal
- analog values (maximum-, actual- and %-value)
- status of external warning and fault
12

I/O-bar of C_RS_IM
C_RS_IM
Element
Meaning
MODE
0 = Destination,
1 = Source,
2 = Analog value,
3 = Process signal
SIZE
Size of destination silo
A_MV
actual Analog value in %

from C_MEASUR
W_LIM
Format
Default
Typ
e
Attr.
HMIK
INT
REAL
INT
Warning Limit reached
BOOL
A_LIM
Alarm Limit reached
BOOL
PR_SIG
Process signal
(Operation Interlock)
BOOL
RS_LINK

Module/ STATUS
WORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
RS_STRT_DLY
Start delay time
INT
RS_STOP_DLY
Stop delay time
INT
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number
STRING
(12)
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK
link to group or route filled

from RS
INT
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL
MVP
Measuring value in %
INT
RS_COMP
Route is running complete
BOOL
D_READY
Destination selected and

available
BOOL
PARAM_FT
Parameter failure
BOOL

Permitted
Values
13
Route Name
Material
RS_JOB
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
Material
Route Name
Job Name
Job-Name
A_MV
SIZE
MODE
RS_LINK
Designation English
0 = Destination,
1 = Source
2 = Analog value
3 = Process Signal
Size of destination
Actual Analog value in %
from C_MEASUR
RS_LINK /Status
Designation German
0 = Ziel,
1 = Quelle
2 = Analogwert
3 = Prozesssignal
Silohhe des Zielsilos
Aktueller Analgowert in % von
C_MEASUER
RS_LINK /Status
S7-Par-Name
Assignment.
OS variables table
OS-Var. No.
Output Level
O
S,O
S,O
Presentation
Number NK
Bit
Type
O
Value
Range
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
REAL
INT
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
15
RS_LINK Structure
Parameter Name
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
Function Name
OSAddr.
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
signal
RS_LINK /Status
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Process signal
Status = RS Command
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
OP_COND
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Format
DWORD
WORD

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Designation German
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD

RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM

INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL
17
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
RS Substation Module C_RS_SUB
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BRS Substation Module C_RS_SUB
RS SUBSTATION MODULE C_RS_SUB
Description of C_RS_SUB
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Output interfaces
Interfaces to OS
Commands
Engineering
AS
Settings and Configuration for C_RS_SUB
OS
Symbols
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
OS Runtime
11
I/O-bar of C_RS_SUB
13
OS variables table
15
RS_LINK Structure
16

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_RS_SUB_009.doc
Description of C_RS_SUB
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_RS_SUB
FB1044
Calling OBs
C_RS_SUB must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The Route Selection Substation Module C_RS_SUB is used in order to control a Substation like
a bag filter for silo dedusting within a Route Selection Application. C_RS_SUB is an interface
between the Route Selection Application C_RSM and the Standard Cemat functions like
C_DRV_1D, C_DAMPER, etc.
In the following descriptions the Standard Cemat functions which are not directly linked to the
C_RSM are called "external modules" or "sub-modules".
In case of a substation the C_RSM gives the start/stop command to block C_RS_SUB and the
Substation block transmits this information to the external modules (Standard CEMAT drives).
The feedback signal from the last drive is given to C_RS_SUB which forwards this information
to the C_RSM.
As Standard Interface to the RS Main Module C_RSM the structure RS_LINK is used.
Input Parameters for N_READY (Not Ready), FAULT (faulty), SM_RUN (all Sub-modules
running) and SM_STOP (all Sub-modules stopped) are transferred to the RS status word.
Output Parameter SM_ON (Sub-module ON) and SM_OFF (Sub-module OFF) are used in
order to start and stop the external modules.
The standard Route information like RS Job Number, RS Route Name and RS Material
Name will be shown in the block icon.

Operating principle
Input interfaces
OP_COND
Operation Condition
OP_COND is the Operation condition for the complete Substation (like xBVG of a Standard
CEMAT Block).
N_READY
external not ready
Input N_READY must have 1-Signal if the Substation is not ready for start (E. g. if one of the
Sub-modules is interlocked or not available.
FAULT
external Fault signal
Input FAULT must have 1-Signal if one of the Sub-modules has a fault (Summarizing fault SST
of the Sub-modules.
SM_RUN
Feedback signal RUN
SM_RUN must have 1-Signal if all drives, belonging to the Substation are running completely.
SM_STOP
Feedback signal OFF
SM_STOP must have 1-Signal if all drives, belonging to the Substation are stopped.

Output interfaces
RS_LINK
Status and link to RS Modules
Same as for a Standard Cemat Object the output RS_LINK of C_RS_SUB has to be connected
to input OBJ_Pnnn of the C_RSM block. Up to 300 links are possible. The C_RSM block has a
link to the group and it forwards this information to the Sub-module blocks.
GR_LINK
internal RS Group link
In case of a Substation function only the C_RS_SUB block is linked via RS_LINK to the
C_RSM. The Sub-modules have no connection to C_RSM block and no direct link to the group.
In order to transmit the Group Link information the output GR_LINK of the Substation block
C_RS_SUB has to be linked to the GR_LINK1 of all Sub-modules.
RS_GFSO
Output RS_GFSO has 1-Signal if the Substation is not active in any route. This signal must be
connected to input GFSO of all Sub-modules as a filter function for the Group Fault Display and
for the Group Status Call.
SM_ON
Start command to Sub modules
If the Substation receives a start command from C_RSM the output SM_ON will be set to 1Signal in order to start the external modules (which are not directly connected to C_RSM).
SM_ON is reset in case of a fault (like GBE).
Example: SM_ON is connected to EBFE of C_DRV_1D.
SM_OFF
Stop command to Sub modules
If the Substation receives a stop command from C_RSM the output SM_OFF will be set to 1Signal in order to stop the external modules (which are not directly connected to C_RSM).
Example: SM_OFF is connected to EBFA of C_DRV_1D.

Interfaces to OS
RS_JOB
RS Job Number
Interface to OS
RS_NAME
RS Name
Interface to OS
RS_MAT
RS Material Name
Interface to OS

The module should be called together with the Sub-modules and before the associated group.
There is no ALARM_8 module used.
Commands
For the command word 1 and 2 refer to RS_LINK Structure.

Engineering
AS
Settings and Configuration for C_RS_SUB
Drag and drop the C_RS_SUB block into the CFC and connect the output RS_LINK to an object
input of C_RSM. Define Tag, name and symbol no.
Connect the output GR_LINK of the C_RS_SUB to input GR_LINK1 of to the sub-modules
(standard CEMAT Objects C_DRV_1D, C_DRV_2D, C_DAMPER, C_VALVE, etc).
For start and stop of the sub-modules connect output SM_ON and SM_OFF to the start / stop
command of the sub-modules.
Interlocking conditions for the Substation must be connected to OP_COND of the C_RS_SUB
block.
The information "one of the sub-modules is not ready" has to be connected to input N_READY
of the C_RS_SUB block. The summarizing information "one of the sub-modules faulty" must be
connected to input FAULT of the C_RS_SUB block.
Connect the output RS_GFSO (Group fault / status off) to input GFSO of the standard CEMAT blocks.
If the last sub-module runs give the start feedback signal SM_RUN.
If the last sub-module is stopped give the stop feedback signal SM_STOP.

OS
Symbols
The symbols for C_RS_SUB are shown in the flow mimics only. The symbol will be generated
automatically when you start the "Create/update Block icons.
The properties are filled up automatically.
10

OS Runtime
See the flow mimic with Substation elements.

11
Mouse click on the symbol will open the faceplate.

for Substation modules
In the faceplates, additionally to the TAG and comment the following information is shown:
- Route job information
- Route name
- Material name
- and as digital signals
- Operating condition
- external modules "not ready"
- external modules "fault"
- Substation feedback ON
- Substation feedback OFF
12

I/O-bar of C_RS_SUB
C_RS_SUB
Format
Meaning
OP_COND
Operation Condition
BOOL
N_READY
External modules
not ready
BOOL
FAULT
External modules
fault signal
BOOL
SM_RUN
Feedback signal RUN
BOOL
SM_STOP
Feedback signal OFF
BOOL
RS_LINK

Module/ STATUS
WORD
RS_COMM
Command
WORD
RS_COMM2
Command2
WORD
RS_STRT_DLY
Start delay time
INT
RS_STOP_DLY
Stop delay time
INT
RS_JOB
RS JOB Number
STRING
(12)
RS_NAME
RS Name
STRING
(12)
RS_MAT
RS Material
STRING
(30)
GR_LINK
Instance DB group
module
WORD
RS_NO
Route Number (1-11)
BYTE
RS_BTYP

....)
BYTE
RS_GFSO
BOOL
SM_ON
Start command to the Sub

modules
BOOL
SM_OFF
Stop command to the Sub

modules
BOOL

Default
Typ
e
Element
Attr.
HMIK
Permitted
Values
13
Job-Name
Route Name
Material
RS_JOB
RS_NAME
RS_MAT
/Status
Material
Route Name
Job Name
RS_LINK
Designation English
RS_LINK
/Status
Designation German
RS_LINK
S7-Par-Name
Assignment.
OS variables table
OS-Var. No.
Output Level
O
S,O
S,O
Presentation
Number NK
Bit
Type
O
Value
Range
DWORD
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
15
Event Text
Fault Class
Annun. Class
Unit
RS_LINK Structure
Parameter Name
RS_LINK
_B40
_B41
_B42
_B43
_B44
_B45
Function Name
OSAddr.
Designation German
Designation English
RS_LINK /Status
Fehler
Nicht bereit
Grenzwert Warnung
Grenzwert Alarm
signal
RS_LINK /Status
Faulty
Not Ready
Limit Warning
Limit Alarm
Process signal
Status = RS Command
_B20-B27
frei
Not used
_B10-B17
Wert in %
Value in %
Kommandowort 1
Kommando Richtung 1
Kommando Richtung 2
Kommando Stopp
lschen
Commandword 1
Command Direction 1
Command Direction 2
Command Stop
Wert in %
Value in %
LIMIT ALARM
0
1
2
3
4
5
_B46
FULL / EMPTY
_B47
STAT= COMM
_B30
_B31
_B32
_B33
_B34
_B35
_B36
_B37
MATERIAL
R1
R2
FAULT
NOT READY
LIMIT WARNING
OP_COND
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RS_COMM
RS_COM_B20
RS_COM_B21
RS_COM_B22
COM_R1
COM_R2
COM_STOP
0
1
2
RS_COM_B23
RS_DEL
RS_COM_B24
RS_COM_B25
RS_COM_B26
RS_COM_B27
4
5
6
7
RS_COM_B10
RS_COM_B11
RS_COM_B12
RS_COM_B13
RS_COM_B14
RS_COM_B15
RS_COM_B16
RS_COM_B17
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Format
DWORD
WORD

Parameter Name
Function Name
OSAddr.
RS_COMM2
RS_COM2_B20
Designation German
Designation English
Kommandowort 2
Route aktiv
Objekt ist in RS_DB
vorhanden
Objekt ist an RS
angeschlossen
(GDA)
Command word 2
Route active
RS_STRT_DLY
RS_STOP_DLY
Einschaltverzgerung
Ausschaltverzgerung
Start delay time

Stop delay time
RS_JOB
RS Auftragsnummer
RS JOB Number
RS_NAME
RS Name
RS Name
RS_MAT
RS Materialkennung
RS Material
RS_COM2_B21
RS_COM2_B22
RS_COM2_B23
RS_COM2_B24
Format
WORD

RS_COM2_B25
RS_COM2_B26
RS_COM2_B27
RS_COM2_B10
RS_COM2_B11
RS_COM2_B12
RS_COM2_B13
RS_COM2_B14
RS_COM2_B15
RS_COM2_B16
RS_COM2_B17
GR_LINK
RS_NO
RS_BTYP
RS_GFSO
(von C_RSM)
Wegenummmer (1-11)

(from C_RSM)
Route Number (1-11)
Block Type
Bausteintyp
1 = C_DRV_1D
1 = C_DRV_1D
2 = C_DAMPER
2 = C_DAMPER
3 = C_DRV_2D
3 = C_DRV_2D
7 = C_VALVE
7 = C_VALVE
43 = C_RS_IM
43 = C_RS_IM
44 = C_RS_SUB
44 = C_RS_SUB
45 = C_RS_SM
45 = C_RS_SM

INT
INT
STRING
(12)
STRING
(12)
STRING
(30)
INT
BYTE
BYTE
BOOL
17
Cemat V 7.0
Edition 01 / 07
Object Data Acquisition
Safety Guidelines
degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
taken.
Caution
taken.
Attention
account.
Qualified Personnel
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
Trademarks


Siemens AG
Siemens AG 2005
0BObject Data Acquisition
OBJECT DATA ACQUISITION
Description of C_ODA
Type/Number
Calling OBs
Function
Operating principle
Input interfaces
Variables on the OS
Module states
Commands
4
4
5
7
7
9
10
10
10
10
I/O-bar of C_ ODA
11
OS variables table
15

N:\Cemat\DOKU\V70\English\Reference\Objekte\000_Normal\C_ODA_009.doc
Description of C_ODA
Type/Number
Module name:
Module no.:
C_ODA
FB1060 and FB 1061
Calling OBs
C_ODA must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK). (min. cycle time 60ms).

Function
Via CEMAT ODA (Operation Data Acquisition) block shift- or month-values can be provided for
an operating data protocol through preconfigured CFC-data acquisition blocks.
An operating data protocol usually has the following structure:
Data acquisition:
The data acquisition means the detection of all values which are necessary for the construction
of the BDP.
To these abovementioned values belongs a. o.:
-
operating time (RT module, Motor)
operating cycle (Counter, Damper, Valve)
amounts
electrical Energy
temperatures
pressure
states of plants or plant components
The main characteristic of the data acquisition is that information comes from the plant itself and
is processed via independent acquisition modules or CEMAT control blocks.
Data storage:
The data storage serves the purpose to deposit the information coming from the plant, and it
can be done hierarchically.
Viz.: Each acquisition block can handle a maximum of 15 values for local intermediate storage
of 24 hourly values and a summarizing for the current day.
The input values are also subdivided by the data format into 5 DWords and 10 REAL.
The information is stored in a data block, whose Data words are available as WinCC variable on
the OS.
The hourly values can be stored as continuing values or as differential values.
If you use the difference values you can additionally consider a conversion factor (e.g.
conversion in hours).
The next storage level is made then on the OS level in a data base (User archive or TAG
Logging)
Data handling:
The data handling is the processing of the recorded information from the data acquisition.
Here you can carry out additional conversions or totalizing for shift-, week- or month- protocols.

Data output:
The data output is the print of the Operation data protocol in a previously defined form at a
defined time.
Via PCS7 Reports or in the AddOn "WinCC Data Monitoring 6.2" the Output format can be
designed.
Alarm messages:
None
Visualization:
Example PDL.

Operating principle
Input interfaces
SHIFT1
SHIFT2
SHIFT3
Start time shift 1

Start time shift 2
Start time shift 3
Parameter instructions each acquisition port:

C01_PV
C01_SCAN
C01_ENPV
C01_DIF
C01_FAC
C01_OPM
Process value
Acquisition time
Release process value acquisition
Difference calculation at hour value storage
Calculation factor
Calculation mode 0= off; 1 multiply; 2 divide
Output interfaces
QT_DAY
QT_S1-S3
QTOG_DAY
QTOG_S1-S3
Day values are transferred

Shift values are transferred
Toggle day values are transferred
Toggle shift values are transferred
Output values each acquisition port:

C01_QT
Pulse value is transferred
C01_QA
Current process output value
C01_QH00-QH23
Hours value storage
C01_QS00-QS23
Hours storage for the past day
C01_QS1-3
Summarizing value of the single shifts for the current day
C01_QCS1-3
Summarizing value of the single shifts for the past day
C01_QCDAY
Day value
C01_DATE
Date of the storage day
Via interfaces "SHIFT1-3 the "shift initiation times are defined.

With the release input C01_ENPV the connected process value C01_PV is read in the adjusted
acquisition time C01_SCAN and written to the output C01_QA.
After the expiration of one full hour the output C01_QA or, depending on the parameterization,
the calculated value or difference value is written into the accordant output C01_QHxx and an
edge output bit C01_QT is triggered.
At the end of each shift the summarizing value is assigned to the shift output.
At the shift end 3 all hour values and shift values are copied into the security area C01_QSxx
and C01_QCSx, the day value is calculated and the current output values are deleted. The
security area also gets a date item for the expired day.
The release Cxx_ENPV cannot be operated via the OS.


Variables on the OS

None
No messages are deposited.
Module states
None
Commands
None
10

I/O-bar of C_ ODA
Type
Default
For
m
Beginning shift 1
INT
SHIFT2
Beginning shift 2
INT
SHIFT3
Beginning shift 3
INT
C01_PV
Process value
DWORD
C01_SCAN
Scan time in minutes
INT
C01_ENPV
Release process value
BOOL
C01_DIF
Difference value release
BOOL
C01_FAC
Conversion factor
REAL
C01_OPM
Calculating mode
0= off
1= multiply
2= divide
INT
C05_PV
Process value
DWORD
C05_SCAN
INT
C05_ENPV
BOOL
C05_DIF
BOOL
C05_FAC
Conversion factor
REAL
C05_OPM
Calculating mode
0= off
1= multiply
2= divide
INT
C06_PV
Process value
REAL
C06_SCAN
INT
C06_ENPV
BOOL
C06_DIF
BOOL
C06_FAC
Conversion factor
REAL
C06_OPM
Calculating mode
0= off
1= multiply
2= divide
INT
Element
Meaning
SHIFT1

Attr.
B&B
Permitted
values
11
12
Element
Meaning
Type
Default
For
m
C15_PV
Process value
REAL
C15_SCAN
INT
C15_ENPV
BOOL
C15_DIF
BOOL
C15_FAC
Conversion factor
REAL
C15_OPM
Calculating mode
0= off
1= multiply
2= divide
INT
QT_DAY
Day values transferred
BOOL
QT_S1
Shift 1 values transferred
BOOL
QT_S2
QT_S3
Attr.
B&B
BOOL
BOOL
QTOG_DAY
Toggle day value

transferred
BOOL
QTOG_S1
Toggle shift 1 transferred
BOOL
QTOG_S2
BOOL
QTOG_S3
BOOL
C01_QT
Impetus value transferred
BOOL
C01_QA
Current value
Real
C01_QH00
Hour value 00
Real
C01_QH01
Hour value 01
Real
C01_QH02
Hour value 02
Real
C01_QH03
Hour value 03
Real
C01_QH04
Hour value 04
Real
Permitted
values

Element
Meaning
Type
Default
For
m
C01_QH05
Hour value 05
Real
C01_QH06
Hour value 06
Real
C01_QH07
Hour value 07
Real
C01_QH08
Hour value 08
Real
C01_QH09
Hour value 09
Real
C01_QH10
Hour value 10
Real
C01_QH11
Hour value 11
Real
C01_QH12
Hour value 12
Real
C01_QH13
Hour value 13
Real
C01_QH14
Hour value 14
Real
C01_QH15
Hour value 15
Real
C01_QH16
Hour value 16
Real
C01_QH17
Hour value 17
Real
C01_QH18
Hour value 18
Real
C01_QH19
Hour value 19
Real
C01_QH20
Hour value 20
Real
C01_QH21
Hour value 21
Real
C01_QH22
Hour value 22
Real
C01_QH23
Hour value 23
Real
C01_QS1
Shift value 1 current day
Real
C01_QS2
Real
C01_QS3
Real
C01_QCS1
Shift value 1 past day
Real
C01_QCS2
Real
C01_QCS3
Real
C01_QCDAY
Sum day
Real
C01_DATE
Date of past day
DWORD

Attr.
B&B
Permitted
values
13
14
Element
Meaning
Type
Default
For
m
C02_QT
BOOL
C02_QA
Current value
Real
C02_QH00-H23
Hour value 00 to 23
Real
C02_QS1-3
Shift value 1-3 current day
Real
C02_QCS1-3
Shift value 1-3 past day
Real
C02_QCDAY
Sum day
Real
C02_DATE
Date of past day
DWORD
C03_QT
BOOL
C03_QA
Current value
Real
C03_QH00-H23
Hour value 00 to 23
Real
C03_QS1-3
Real
C03_QCS1-3
Real
C03_QCDAY
Sum day
Real
C03_DATE
Date of past day
DWORD
C15_QT
BOOL
C15_QA
Current value
Real
C15_QH00-H23
Hour value 00 to 23
Real
C15_QS1-3
Real
C15_QCS1-3
Real
C15_QCDAY
Sum day
Real
C15_DATE
Date of past day
DWORD
Attr.
B&B
Permitted
values

S7-Par-Name
shift 1 values are transferred

toggle: "day values are transferred
toggle: "shift 1 values are transferred
Pulse value is transferred
Actual value
Value H 00
Value H 01
Value H 02
Value H 03
Value H 04
Value H 05
Value H 06
Value H 07
Value H 08
Value H 09
Value H 10
Value H 11
Value H 12
Value H 13
Value H 14
Value H 15
Schicht 1 Werte transferiert
Toggle Tageswert transferiert
Toggle Schicht 1 transferiert
Impuls Wert transferiert
Aktueller Wert
Stundenwert 00
Stundenwert 01
Stundenwert 02
Stundenwert 03
Stundenwert 04
Stundenwert 05
Stundenwert 06
Stundenwert 07
Stundenwert 08
Stundenwert 09
Stundenwert 10
Stundenwert 11
Stundenwert 12
Stundenwert 13
Stundenwert 14
Stundenwert 15
Name English
day values are transferred
Name German
Tageswerte transferiert
QT_DAY
QT_S1
QT_S2
QT_S3
QTOG_DAY
QTOG_S1
QTOG_S2
QTOG_S3
C01_QT
C01_QA
C01_QH00
C01_QH01
C01_QH02
C01_QH03
C01_QH04
C01_QH05
C01_QH06
C01_QH07
C01_QH08
C01_QH09
C01_QH10
C01_QH11
C01_QH12
C01_QH13
C01_QH14
C01_QH15
Configuration
OS variables table
OS-VariablesNr.
Type
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Event text
Fault grade
Inform grade
Value facet
Dimension
Description
Nr./NK
Output level
15
Value H 20
Value H 21
Value H 23
Shift 1 value actual day
Shift 1 value day before
Total per day
Stundenwert 20
Stundenwert 21
Stundenwert 22
Stundenwert 23
Schichtwert 1 aktueller Tag
Schichtwert 1 vorheriger Tag
Summe Tag
C01_QH22
C01_QH23
C01_QS1
C01_QS2
C01_QS3
C01_QCS1
C01_QCS2
C01_QCS3
C01_QCDAY
16
C02_
C03_
C04_
C05_
C06_
C07_
C08_
C09_
C10_
C11_
C12_
C13_
C14_
C15_
C01_DATE
Value H 19
Stundenwert 19
Datum der gespeicherten

Daten
Struktur wie bei C01
Value H 18
Structure as used with C01

date for saved values
Value H 22
Value H 17
Stundenwert 18
Name English
Stundenwert 17
Name German
Value H 16
S7-Par-Name
Stundenwert 16
OS-VariablesNr.
C01_QH16
C01_QH17
C01_QH18
C01_QH19
C01_QH20
C01_QH21
Configuration
Output level
Type
Inform grade
Fault grade
Value facet
Dimension
Description
Nr./NK
DWO
RD
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Event text

C Cimos

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

C Cimos

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects

After the installation of CEMAT V6 the CEMAT documentation is available as PDL in

Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Reference Manual Objects

Installation of a PCS 7 Project

Engineering Check List

Cemat System Architecture

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects

Adapt to Simocode small

Annunciation Module with 7 Alarms

Measured Value Integrator

PID Controller with 3 Parameter sets

Route Selection Main module

Route Selection Information

Route Selection Substation

Reference ADD ONs

Object Data Acquisition

Definitions and Instructions

Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Copyright Siemens AG 2005 All rights reserved

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency

Reference Manual Objects

Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Interlock with 5 Inputs

PID mit 3 Stzen fr

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Runtime Module Loading Temp.

Reference Manual Objects

OB35_SYS1 ILS OB35 Begin

OB35_SYS2 ILS OB35 End

Runtime Module Loading Temp.

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

CEMAT OB1 Start

ILS OB1 Begin

Control Desk Push

Adapter block to connect non-CEMAT

Additional block for

ILS OB1 End

Interlock with 10 Inputs

Reference Manual Objects

Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Damper Annun. Meas. Valve Silopilot Counter

Communication resources (PBK) for

Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration:

Reference Manual Objects

Reference Manual Objects

Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

Unique name of the S7 Block, e. g. C_DRV_1D.

Unique number of the function block (FB) or function (FC).

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects